2008 Rondo Owners Manual EN

User Manual: 2008 Kia Rondo-Carens Navigation Manual - PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 341 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

kia,

the

company

Congratulations! Your selection of a KIA was a wise investment. It

will give you years of driving pleasure. Now that you are the owner of

a KIA vehicle, you’ll probably be asked a lot of questions about your

vehicle and the company like “What is a KIA?”, “Who is KIA?”,

“What does ‘KIA’ mean?”.

Here are some answers. First, KIA is the oldest car company in Korea.

It is a company that has thousands of employees focused on building

high-quality vehicles at affordable prices.

The first syllable, KI, in the word “KIA” means “to arise from to the

world” or “to come up out of to the world”. The second syllable, a,

means “Asia”. So, the word KIA, means “to arise from” or “to come

up out of Asia to the world”.

Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!

Thank you for choosing a KIA vehicle.

When you require service, remember that your dealer knows

your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained technicians,

recommended special tools, genuine KIA replacement parts

and is dedicated to your complete satisfaction.

Because subsequent owners require this important information

as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is

sold.

This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-

nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup-

plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual

that provides important information on all warranties regarding

your vehicle.

We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the

recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation

of your new vehicle.

KIA offers a great variety of options, components and features

for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment

described in this manual, along with the various illustrations,

may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.

The information and specifications provided in this manual

were accurate at the time of printing. KIA reserves the right to

discontinue or change specifications or design at any time

without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you

have questions, always check with your KIA dealer.

We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring

pleasure and satisfaction in your KIA vehicle.

mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any

information storage and retrieval system or translation in

whole or part is not permitted without written authorization

from Kia Motors Corporation.

Printed in Korea

Foreword

Introduction

Your vehicle at a glance

Safety features of your vehicle

Features of your vehicle

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications & Consumer information

Index

table of contents

How to use this manual / 1-2

Fuel requirements / 1-3

Vehicle break-in process / 1-4

Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster / 1-5

Introduction

A010000AUN

We want to help you get the greatest

possible driving pleasure from your vehi-

cle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist you

in many ways. We strongly recommend

that you read the entire manual. In order

to minimize the chance of death or injury,

you must read the WARNING and CAU-

TION sections in the manual.

Illustrations complement the words in this

manual to best explain how to enjoy your

vehicle. By reading your manual, you

learn about features, important safety

information, and driving tips under vari-

ous road conditions.

The general layout of the manual is pro-

vided in the Table of Contents. A good

place to start is the index; it has an alpha-

betical listing of all information in your

manual.

Sections: This manual has nine sections

plus an index. Each section begins with a

brief list of contents so you can tell at a

glance if that section has the information

you want.

You will find various WARNINGs,

CAUTIONs, and NOTICEs in this manu-

al. These WARNINGs were prepared to

enhance your personal safety.You should

carefully read and follow ALL procedures

and recommendations provided in these

WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and NOTICEs.

✽✽ NOTICE

A NOTICE indicates interesting or help-

ful information is being provided.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in

which harm, serious bodily injury or

death could result if the warning is

ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in

which damage to your vehicle could

result if the caution is ignored.

Introduction

A020101AUN-EU

Your new vehicle is designed to use only

unleaded fuel having a pump octane

number ((R+M)/2) of 87 or highter.

Your new vehicle is designed to obtain

maximum performance with UNLEADED

FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emis-

sions and spark plug fouling.

A020103AUN-EU

Gasoline containing alcohol and

methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and

ethanol (also known as grain alcohol),

and gasoline or gasohol containing

methanol (also known as wood alcohol)

are being marketed along with or instead

of unleaded gasoline.

Do not use gasohol containing more than

10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or

gasohol containing any methanol. Either

of these fuels may cause drivability prob-

lems and damage to the fuel system.

Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if

drivability problems occur.

Vehicle damage or drivability problems

may not be covered by the manufactur-

er’s warranty if they result from the use

of:

1. Gasohol containing more than 10%

ethanol.

2. Gasoline or gasohol containing

methanol.

3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-

prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 per-

cent gasoline, and is manufactured

exclusively for use in Flexible Fuel

Vehicles. “E85” is not compatible with

your vehicle. Use of “E85” may result in

poor engine performance and damage to

your vehicle's engine and fuel system.

KIA recommends that customers do not

use fuel with an ethanol content exceed-

ing 10 percent.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

CAUTION

Never add any fuel system cleaning

agents to the fuel tank other than

what has been specified. (Consult

an authorized KIA dealer for

details.)

CAUTION

Never use gasohol which contains

methanol. Discontinue use of any

gasohol product which impairs dri-

vability.

CAUTION

Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty

does not cover damage to the fuel

system or any performance prob-

lems caused by the use of “E85” fuel.

WARNING

• Do not "top off" after the nozzle

automatically shuts off when

refueling.

• Tighten the cap until it clicks,

otherwise the Check Engine

light will illuminate.

• Always check that the fuel cap is

installed securely to prevent fuel

spillage in the event of an acci-

dent.

Introduction

A020104AUN

Use of MTBE

KIA recommends avoiding fuels contain-

ing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether)

over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7%

weight) in your vehicle.

Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.

(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may

reduce vehicle performance and produce

vapor lock or hard starting.

A020105AUN

Do not use methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-

hol) should not be used in your vehicle.

This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-

formance and damage components of

the fuel system.

A020106AUN

Gasolines for cleaner air

To help contribute to cleaner air, KIA rec-

ommends that you use gasolines treated

with detergent additives, which help pre-

vent deposit formation in the engine.

These gasolines will help the engine run

cleaner and enhance performance of the

Emission Control System.

A020107AUN

Operation in foreign countries

If you are going to drive your vehicle in

another country, be sure to:

• Observe all regulations regarding reg-

istration and insurance.

• Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-

able.

A030000AUN

No special break-in period is needed. By

following a few simple precautions for the

first 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add to

the performance, economy and life of

your vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.

• While driving, keep your engine speed

(rpm, or revolutions per minute)

between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.

• Do not maintain a single speed for long

periods of time, either fast or slow.

Varying engine speed is needed to

properly break-in the engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-

cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-

erly.

• Don't let the engine idle longer than 3

minutes at one time.

• Don't tow a trailer during the first 2,000

km (1,200 miles) of operation.

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS

CAUTION

Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty

may not cover damage to the fuel

system and any performance prob-

lems that are caused by the use of

fuels containing methanol or fuels

containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary

Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.

(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)

Introduction

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Door ajar warning light

Seat belt warning light

High beam indicator

Turn signal indicator

Front fog light indicator (if equipped)

ABS warning light (if equipped)

Parking brake & Brake fluid warning light

Engine oil pressure warning light

ESC indicator (if equipped)

ESC OFF indicator (if equipped)

Malfunction indicator

Air bag warning light

Cruise indicator (if equipped)

Cruise SET indicator (if equipped)

Immobilizer indicator (if equipped)

Low fuel level warning light

Tailgate open warning light

* For more detailed explanations, refer to “Instrument cluster” in section 4.

Charging system warning light

Low windshield washer fluid level warning light

(if equipped)

A050000AUN-EC

Interior overview / 2-2

Instrument panel overview / 2-3

Engine compartment / 2-4

Your vehicle at a glance

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

B010000AUN-EU

1. Door lock/unlock button.....................4-11

2. Inner door handle..............................4-12

3. Outside rearview mirror control

switch ................................................4-32

4. Central door lock switch....................4-12

5. Power window lock button.................4-19

6. Power window switches ....................4-17

7. Fuse box ............................................7-45

8. Instrument panel illumination control

knob ..................................................4-35

9. ESC OFF button*..............................5-19

10. Front windshield deicer button* ......4-60

11. Hood release lever..........................4-20

12. Steering wheel ................................4-29

13. Steering wheel tilt lever...................4-30

14. Seat...................................................3-2

* : if equipped

OUN008001N

Your vehicle at a glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

B020000AUN

1. Driver’s front air bag.........................3-48

2. Light control / Turn signals ...............4-52

3. Instrument cluster.............................4-34

4. Wiper/Washer...................................4-55

5. Auto cruise controls*.........................5-24

6. Ignition switch.....................................5-4

7. Vent controls ............................4-64/4-73

8. Digital clock..........................................4-87

9. Hazard warning flasher switch...4-51/6-2

10. Audio controls*................................4-92

11. Climate control system*..........4-61/4-70

12. Shift lever .........................................5-7

13. Seat warmer* ...................................3-7

14. Shopping bag holder* ....................4-88

15. Passenger’s front air bag ...............3-48

16. Glove box .......................................4-80

17. Parking brake pedal .......................5-15

18. Brake pedal ....................................5-14

19. Accelerator pedal .............................5-6

* : if equipped

OUN007002N

Your vehicle at a glance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-17

2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-16

3. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-20

4. Air cleaner.........................................7-25

5. Fuse box ...........................................7-46

6. Negative battery terminal ...........6-4/7-28

7. Positive battery terminal .............6-4/7-28

8. Automatic transaxle fluid dipstick......7-22

9. Radiator cap ...............................6-6/7-19

10. Engine oil dipstick ...........................7-16

11. Power steering fluid reservoir .........7-21

12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir ...7-24

OUN078001L

B030000AUN-EU

■■2.4L Engine

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Your vehicle at a glance

OUN078001

1. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-17

2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-16

3. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-20

4. Air cleaner.........................................7-25

5. Fuse box ...........................................7-46

6. Negative battery terminal ...........6-4/7-28

7. Positive battery terminal .............6-4/7-28

8. Automatic transaxle fluid dipstick......7-22

9. Radiator cap ...............................6-6/7-19

10. Engine oil dipstick ...........................7-16

11. Power steering fluid reservoir .........7-21

12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir ...7-24

■■2.7L Engine

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Seats / 3-2

Seat belts / 3-18

Child restraint system / 3-32

Air bag-advanced supplemental restraint system / 3-40

Safety features of your vehicle

C010000AUN-EE

Front seat

(1) Forward and backward

(2) Seatback angle

(3) Seat cushion height (Driver’s seat)*

(4) Seat warmer*

(5) Headrest

2nd row seats

(6) Forward and backward*

(7) Seatback angle

(8) Walk-in seat*

(9) Headrest

3rd row seats*

(10) Folding the seatback

(11) Headrest

*: if equipped

SEATS

OUN027059L

7-Seater

5-Seater

Power seat

Manual seat

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING - Driver’s seat

• Never attempt to adjust seat

while the vehicle is moving. This

could result in loss of control,

and an accident causing death,

serious injury, or property dam-

age.

• Do not allow anything to interfere

with the normal position of the

seatback. Storing items against a

seatback or in any other way

interfering with proper locking of

a seatback could result in serious

or fatal injury in a sudden stop or

collision.

• Always drive and ride with your

seatback upright and the lap por-

tion of the seat belt snug and low

across the hips. This is the best

position to protect you in case of

an accident.

• In order to avoid unnecessary

and perhaps severe air bag

injuries, always sit as far back as

possible from the steering wheel

while maintaining comfortable

control of the vehicle. We recom-

mend that your chest be at least

10 inches (250 mm) away from

the steering wheel.

WARNING - Uprighting

seat

When you return the seatback to its

upright position, hold the seatback

and return it slowly and be sure

there are no other occupants

around the seat. If the seatback is

returned without being held and

controlled, the back of the seat

could spring forward resulting in

accidental injury to a person struck

by the seatback.

WARNING - Loose objects

Loose objects in the driver’s foot

area could interfere with the opera-

tion of the foot pedals, possibly

causing an accident. Do not place

anything under the front seats.

WARNING - Driver respon-

sibility for passengers

Riding in a vehicle with seatback

reclined could lead to serious or

fatal injury in an accident. If a seat

is reclined during an accident, the

occupant’s hips may slide under

the lap portion of the seat belt

applying great force to the unpro-

tected abdomen. Serious or fatal

internal injuries could result. The

driver must advise the passenger

to keep the seatback in an upright

position whenever the vehicle is in

motion.

Safety features of your vehicle

Front seat adjustment - manual

C010101AUN

Forward and backward

To move the seat forward or backward:

1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever

under the front edge of the seat cush-

ion up and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the

seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and make

sure the seat is locked securely by trying

to move forward and backward without

using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not

locked properly.

(Continued)

• When resetting the rear seatback

to the upright position, make

sure it is securely latched by

pushing it forward and back-

wards.

• To avoid the possibility of burns,

do not remove the carpet in the

cargo area. Emission controls

beneath this floor generate high

exhaust temperatures.

WARNING - Rear seat-

backs (2nd and/or 3rd row)

• The rear seatback must be

securely latched. If not, passen-

gers and objects could be thrown

forward resulting in serious

injury or death in the event of a

sudden stop or collision.

• Luggage and other cargo should

be laid flat in the cargo area. If

objects are large, heavy, or must

be piled, they must be secured.

Under no circumstances should

cargo be piled higher than the

seatbacks. Failure to follow these

warnings could result in serious

injury or death in the event of a

sudden stop, collision or rollover.

• No passenger should ride in the

cargo area or sit or lie on folded

seatbacks while the vehicle is

moving. All passengers must be

in seats and restrained properly

while riding.

(Continued)

WARNING

After adjusting the seat, always

check that it is securely locked into

place by attempting to move the

seat forward or reverse without

using the lock release lever.

Sudden or unexpected movement

of the driver's seat could cause you

to lose control of the vehicle result-

ing in an accident.

OUN028033

Safety features of your vehicle

C010102AUN

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on the

seatback recline lever located on the

outside of the seat at the rear.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat and

adjust the seatback of the seat to the

position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the

seatback is locked in place. (The lever

MUST return to its original position for

the seatback to lock.)

C010103AUN

Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)

To change the height of the seat cushion,

push the lever that is located on the out-

side of the seat cushion upwards or

downwards.

• To lower the seat cushion, push the

lever down several times.

• To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever

up several times.

C010104AUN

Headrest

The headrest not only provides comfort

for the driver and front passenger, but

also helps to protect the head and neck

in the event of a collision.

WARNING

• For maximum effectiveness in

case of an accident, the headrest

should be adjusted so the middle

of the headrest is at the same

height as the top of the occu-

pant's eyes. Also adjust the head-

rest so its distance from the head

is as wide as your fist. For this

reason, the use of a cushion that

holds the body away from the

seatback is not recommended.

• Do not operate the vehicle with

the headrests removed as severe

injury to the occupants may

occur in the event of an accident.

Headrests may provide protec-

tion against neck injuries when

properly adjusted.

• Do not adjust the headrest height

while the vehicle is in motion.

OUN028034OUN028035

Safety features of your vehicle

Forward and backward adjustment

(if equipped)

The headrest may be adjusted forward to

3 different positions by pulling the head-

rest forward to the desired detent. To

adjust the headrest to it’s furthest back-

wards position, pull it fully forward to the

farthest position and release it. Adjust the

headrest so that it properly supports the

head and neck.

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up to the

desired position (1). To lower the head-

rest, push and hold the release button (2)

on the headrest support and lower the

headrest to the desired position (3).

Removal

To remove the headrest, raise it as far as

it can go then press the release button (1)

while pulling upward (2).

OUN026037 OUN026038

OUN026036

OUN026036N

Type B

Type A

Safety features of your vehicle

Active headrest (if equipped)

The active headrest is designed to move

forward and upward during a rear impact.

This helps to prevent the driver's and

front passenger’s heads from moving

backward and thus helps prevent neck

injuries.

C010107AUN

Seat warmer (if equipped)

The seat warmer is provided to warm the

front seats during cold weather. With the

ignition switch in the ON position, push

either of the switches to warm the driver's

seat or the front passenger's seat.

During mild weather or under conditions

where the operation of the seat warmer

is not needed, keep the switches in the

OFF position.

✽✽NOTICE

With the seat warmer switch in the ON

position, the heating system in the seat

turns off or on automatically depending

on the seat temperature.

OUN026039

CAUTION

• When cleaning the seats, do not

use an organic solvent such as

thinner, benzene, alcohol and

gasoline. Doing so may damage

the surface of the heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating the seat

warmer, do not place blankets,

cushions or seat covers on the

seats while the seat warmer is in

operation.

• Do not place heavy or sharp

objects on seats equipped with

seat warmers. Damage to the seat

warming components could occur.

HNF2041-1

Safety features of your vehicle

C010108AUN-EU

Seatback pocket

The seatback pocket is provided on the

back of the front passenger’s and driver’s

seatbacks.

WARNING - Seat warmer

burns

Passengers should use extreme

caution when using seat warmers

due to the possibility of excess

heating or burns. In particular, the

driver must exercise extreme care

for the following types of passen-

gers:

1. Infants, children, elderly or dis-

abled persons, or hospital outpa-

tients

2. Persons with sensitive skin or

those that burn easily

3. Fatigued individuals

4. Intoxicated individuals

5. Individuals taking medication

that can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold

tablets, etc.) WARNING - Seatback

pockets

Do not put heavy or sharp objects

in the seatback pockets. In an acci-

dent they could come loose from

the pocket and injure vehicle occu-

pants.

WARNING

For proper operation of the occu-

pant classification system:

• Do not place any items cumula-

tively weighing over 1 kg (2.2 lbs)

in the seatback pocket or on the

seat.

• Do not hang onto the front pas-

senger seat.

OUN028040

Safety features of your vehicle

C010200AUN

Front seat adjustment - power

(for driver’s seat)

The front seat can be adjusted by using

the control knob located on the outside of

the seat cushion. Before driving, adjust

the seat to the proper position so as to

easily control the steering wheel, pedals

and switches on the instrument panel.

C010201AUN

Forward and backward

Push the control knob forward or back-

ward to move the seat to the desired

position. Release the knob once the seat

reaches the desired position.

WARNING

The power seat is operable with the

ignition OFF.

Therefore, children should never be

left unattended in the car.

CAUTION

• Power seat is driven by an elec-

tric motor. Stop operating once

the adjustment is completed.

Excessive operation may damage

the electrical equipment.

• When in operation, the power

seat consumes large amount of

electrical power. To prevent

unnecessary charging system

drain, don’t adjust the power seat

longer than necessary while the

engine is not running.

• Do not operate two or more power

seat control knobs at the same

time. Doing so may result in

power seat motor or electrical

component malfunction.

OUN028062

Safety features of your vehicle

103

C010202AUN

Seatback angle

Push the control knob forward or back-

ward to move the seatback to the desired

angle. Release the knob once the seat

reaches the desired position.

C010203AUN

Seat cushion height

Pull the front portion of the control knob

up to raise or down to lower the front part

of the seat cushion. Pull the rear portion

of the control knob up to raise or down to

lower the rear part of the seat cushion.

Release the knob once the seat reaches

the desired position.

Rear seat adjustment

C010301AUN

Forward and backward (if equipped)

To move the seat forward or backward:

1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment lever

under the front edge of the seat cush-

ion and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the

seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and make

sure the seat is locked securely by trying

to move forward and backward without

using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not

locked properly.

OUN026046L

■7-seater (2nd row seat)

OUN028063 OUN028064

311

Safety features of your vehicle

C010302AUN

Seatback angle (if equipped)

To recline the seatback:

1. Pull up the seatback recline lever

located on the outside of the seat at

the rear or on the top of the rear seat-

back.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat and

adjust the seatback of the seat to the

position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the

seatback is locked in place. (The lever

MUST return to its original position for

the seatback to lock.)

C010303AUN

Headrest

The headrest not only provides comfort

for passengers, but also helps to protect

the head and neck in the event of a colli-

sion.

OUN026047

OUN026047L

■7-seater (2nd row seat)

■5-seater

WARNING

• For maximum effectiveness in

case of an accident, the headrest

should be adjusted so the middle

of the headrest is at the same

height as the top of the occu-

pant's eyes. The use of a cushion

that holds the body away from

the seatback is not recommend-

ed.

• Do not operate the vehicle with

the headrests removed as severe

injury to an occupant may occur

in the event of an accident.

Headrests may provide protec-

tion against severe neck injuries

when properly adjusted.

Safety features of your vehicle

123

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up to the

desired position (1). To lower the head-

rest, push and hold the release button (2)

on the headrest support and lower the

headrest to the desired position (3).

Removal

To remove the headrest, raise it as far as

it can go then press the release button

(1) while pulling upward (2).

C010306AUN

Walk-in seat (if equipped)

To get in or out of the 3rd row seat, pull

up the recliner lever on the 2nd row seat-

back.

The 2nd row seatback will be folded and

the seat will be slid forward.

OUN026043 OUN026044 OUN028058L

■7-seater (2nd row seat)

313

Safety features of your vehicle

After getting in or out, simply slide the

2nd row seat backward and pull up the

seatback backward firmly until it clicks

into place. Make sure that the seat is

locked in place.

C010307AUN-EU

Folding the rear seat

The rear seatbacks (or cushions) may be

folded to facilitate carrying long items or

to increase the luggage capacity of the

vehicle.

To fold the rear seat cushion and back:

- 7-seater (2nd row seat)

1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in the

pocket between the rear seatback and

cushion, and insert the rear seat belt

webbing in the guide to prevent the

seat belt from being damaged.

2. Set the front seatback to the upright

position and if necessary, slide the

front seat forward or the rear seat

backward.

WARNING

Never attempt to adjust while the

vehicle is moving or the 2nd row

seat is occupied as the seat may

suddenly move and cause the pas-

senger on the seat to be injured.

WARNING

The purpose of the fold-down rear

seatbacks (or cushions) is to allow

you to carry longer objects than

could not otherwise be accommo-

dated.

Never allow passengers to sit on

top of the folded down seatback

while the car is moving as this is

not a proper seating position and

no seat belts are available for use.

This could result in serious injury

or death in case of an accident or

sudden stop. Objects carried on the

folded down seatback should not

extend higher than the top of the

front seats. This could allow cargo

to slide forward and cause injury or

damage during sudden stops.

Safety features of your vehicle

143

3. Pull the cushion folding strap (1) and

lift the rear portion of the seat cushion.

Stand the rear seat cushion vertically.

4. Remove the headrest from the rear

seatback

5. Pull up the rear seatback recline lever

(2) and fold the rear seatback forward

and down firmly.

6. Stow the headrest by inserting the

headrest poles into the holes on the

bottom of the seat cushion.

7. To use the rear seat, lift and push the

seatback backward by pulling up the

seatback recline lever (2). Pull the

seatback firmly until it clicks into place.

Make sure the seatback is locked in

place. Replace the headrest on the

seatback and adjust it to the desired

position.

OUN026054L

OUN026055L

OUN026052

OUN026053L

OUN026056L

315

Safety features of your vehicle

8. Return the seat cushion to the original

position by pushing down the seat

cushion and inserting the hook (3) into

the holder (4). Make sure the seat

cushion is locked in place.

9. Return the rear seat belt to the proper

position.

To fold down the rear seatback:

- 7-seater (3rd row seat)

- 5-seater

1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in the

pocket between the rear seatback and

cushion (if equipped), and insert the

rear seat belt webbing in the guide to

prevent the seat belt from being dam-

aged.

2. Set the front (or 2nd row) seatback to

the upright position and if necessary,

slide the front (or 2nd row) seat for-

ward.

3.Lower the rear headrests to the lowest

position.

4.Pull on the seatback folding lever (or

strap) (1), then fold the seat toward the

front of the vehicle. When you return

the seatback to its upright position,

always be sure it has locked into posi-

tion by pushing on the top of the seat-

back.

OUN026056

OUN026057

OUN028048L

OUN026048E

■7-seater (3rd row seat)

■5-seater

Safety features of your vehicle

163

5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull the

seatback backward by pulling on the

folding lever (or strap) (1). Pull the

seatback firmly until it clicks into place.

Make sure the seatback is locked in

place.

6. Return the rear seat belt to the proper

position.

OUN026050L

OUN026050E

■7-seater (3rd row seat)

■5-seater

WARNING

When you return the rear seatback

to its upright position after being

folded down:

Be careful not to damage the seat

belt webbing or buckle. Do not

allow the seat belt webbing or

buckle to get caught or pinched in

the rear seat. Ensure that the seat-

back is completely locked into its

upright position by pushing on the

top of the seatback. Otherwise, in

an accident or sudden stop, the

seat could fold down and allow

cargo to enter the passenger com-

partment, which could result in

serious injury or death.

WARNING - 3rd row seat

(if equipped)

The headrest on the 3rd row seat

should be adjusted so the middle of

the headrest is at the same height

as the top of the occupant's eyes.

If the tailgate is pushed down when

the passenger's head is not against

a properly adjusted headrest, the

tailgate may hit the occupant's

head, which could cause injury.

OUN026140

317

Safety features of your vehicle

C010313AUN-EU

Full flat seat

When the vehicle is parked, you can

place the front seat in a reclined position,

nearly flat.

1. Move the rear seat to the farthest rear-

ward position. (if equipped)

2. Move the front seat to the farthest for-

ward position.

3. Remove the headrest.

4. Recline the seatback as far as it can

go to allow the rear seat passenger to

support their legs in the reclined posi-

tion.

1VQA2329

WARNING - Full flat seat

Do not allow a passenger to use the

full flat seat feature while the vehi-

cle is in motion. Severe injury or

death could occur in an accident.

WARNING - Uprighting

seat

When you return the seatback to its

upright position, hold the seatback

and return it slowly. If the seatback

is returned without holding it, the

back of the seat could spring for-

ward resulting in accidental injury

from being struck by the seatback.

CAUTION - Rear seat belts

When returning the rear (2nd and /or

3rd row) seatbacks to the upright

position, remember to return the

rear shoulder belts to their proper

position. Routing the seat belt web-

bing through the rear seat belt

guides will help keep the belts from

being trapped behind or under the

seats.

CAUTION - Damaging rear

seat belt buckles

When you fold the rear (2nd and/or

3rd row) seatback or put luggage on

the rear (2nd and 3rd row) seat

cushion, insert the buckle in the

pocket between the rear seatback

and cushion. Doing so can prevent

the buckle from being damaged by

the rear seatback or luggage.

Safety features of your vehicle

183

C020100AUN

Seat belt restraint system

WARNING

• For maximum restraint system

protection, the seat belts must

always be used whenever the car

is moving.

• Seat belts are most effective

when seatbacks are in the

upright position.

• Children age 12 and under must

always be properly restrained in

the rear seat. Never allow chil-

dren to ride in the front passen-

ger seat. If a child over 12 must

be seated in the front seat, he/she

must be properly belted and the

seat should be moved as far back

as possible.

• Never wear the shoulder belt

under your arm or behind your

back. An improperly positioned

shoulder belt can cause serious

injuries in a crash. The shoulder

belt should be positioned midway

over your shoulder across your

collarbone.

(Continued)

• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.

A twisted belt can't do its job as

well. In a collision, it could even

cut into you. Be sure the belt

webbing is straight and not twist-

ed.

• Be careful not to damage the belt

webbing or hardware. If the belt

webbing or hardware is dam-

aged, replace it.

WARNING - Cargo loading

Make sure the engine is off, the

automatic transaxle is in P (Park)

and the parking brake is applied

whenever loading or unloading

cargo. Failure to take these steps

may allow the vehicle to move if

shift lever is inadvertently moved to

another position.

WARNING - Cargo

Cargo should always be secured to

prevent it from being thrown about

the vehicle in a collision and caus-

ing injury to the vehicle occupants.

Special care of objects should be

taken when placing them in the rear

(2nd and/or 3rd row) seats, since

those may hit the front seat occu-

pants in a frontal collision.

SEAT BELTS

319

Safety features of your vehicle

C020101AUN-EU

Seat belt warning

Driver's seat belt warning

As a reminder to the driver, the driver’s

seat belt warning light will blink for

approximately 6 seconds each time you

turn the ignition switch ON regardless of

belt fastening.

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened

when the ignition switch is turned ON or

if it is disconnected after the ignition

switch is turn ON, the driver's seat belt

warning light will blink for approximately

6 seconds and the seat belt warning

chime will sound for approximately 6 sec-

onds until the belt is fastened. If the dri-

ver's seat belt is not fastened for approx-

imately 36 seconds after starting the

engine, the driver's seat belt warning

light and chime will operate at most 11

times with a pattern of 6 seconds on and

24 seconds off or until the belt is fas-

tened. Front passenger's seat belt warning

As a reminder to the front passenger, the

front passenger's seat belt warning light

will blink for approximately 6 seconds

each time you turn the ignition switch ON

regardless of belt fastening. If the pas-

senger's seat belt is unfastened when

the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h (6

mph), the passenger's seat belt warning

light will blink for at least 6 seconds or

until the belt is fastened.

OUN036023N OUN037024N

Safety features of your vehicle

203

✽✽NOTICE

• You can find the front passenger’s

seat belt warning light on the center

fascia panel.

• Although the front passenger seat is

not occupied, the seat belt warning

light will blink for 6 seconds.

• The front passenger's seat belt warn-

ing may operate when luggage is

placed on the front passenger seat.

C020102AUN-EU

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system

with emergency locking retractor

To fasten your seat belt:

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the

retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into

the buckle (2). There will be an audible

"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to the

proper length only after the lap belt por-

tion is adjusted manually so that it fits

snugly around your hips. If you lean for-

ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will

extend and let you move around. If there

is a sudden stop or impact, however, the

belt will lock into position. It will also lock

if you try to lean forward too quickly.

You can adjust the height of the shoulder

belt anchor to one of 5 positions for max-

imum comfort and safety.

If the height of the adjusting seat belt is

too near your neck, you will not be getting

the most effective protection. The shoul-

der portion should be adjusted so that it

lies across your chest and midway over

your shoulder nearest the door and not

your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat belt

anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster

into an appropriate position.

B180A01NF

2OUN026100

Front seat

321

Safety features of your vehicle

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).

To lower it, push it down (3) while press-

ing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchor

into position. Try sliding the height

adjuster to make sure that it has locked

into position.

C020106AUN

Seat belts - Front passenger and rear

seat 3-point system with combination

locking retractor

To fasten your seat belt:

Combination retractor type seat belts are

installed in the rear seat positions to help

accommodate the installation of child

restraint systems. Although a combina-

tion retractor is also installed in the front

passenger seat position, it is strongly

recommended that children always be

seated in the rear seat. NEVER place

any infant restraint system in the front

seat of the vehicle.

This type of seat belt combines the fea-

tures of both an emergency locking

retractor seat belt and an automatic lock-

ing retractor seat belt. To fasten your seat

belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert

the metal tab into the buckle. There will

be an audible "click" when the tab locks

into the buckle. When not securing a

child restraint, the seat belt operates in

the same way as the driver's seat belt

(Emergency Locking Retractor Type). It

automatically adjusts to the proper length

only after the lap belt portion of the seat

belt is adjusted manually so that it fits

snugly around your hips.

WARNING

• Verify the shoulder belt anchor is

locked into position at the appro-

priate height. Never position the

shoulder belt across your neck or

face. Improperly positioned seat

belts can cause serious injuries

in an accident.

• Failure to replace seat belts after

an accident could leave you with

damaged seat belts that will not

provide protection in the event of

another collision leading to per-

sonal injury or death. Replace

your seat belts after being in an

accident as soon as possible.

WARNING

You should place the lap belt por-

tion as low as possible and snugly

across your hips, not on your waist.

If the lap belt is located too high on

your waist, it may increase the

chance of injury in the event of a

collision. Both arms should not be

under or over the belt. Rather, one

should be over and the other under,

as shown in the illustration.

Never wear the seat belt under the

arm nearest the door.

B200A02NF

Safety features of your vehicle

223

When the seat belt is fully extended from

the retractor to allow the installation of a

child restraint system, the seat belt oper-

ation changes to allow the belt to retract,

but not to extend (Automatic Locking

Retractor Type). Refer to “Using a child

restraint system” in this section.

✽✽NOTICE

Although the combination retractor

provides the same level of protection for

seated passengers in either emergency

or automatic locking modes, it is recom-

mended that seated passengers use the

emergency locking feature for improved

convenience. The automatic locking

function is intended to facilitate child

restraint installation. To convert from

the automatic locking feature to the

emergency locking operation mode,

allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully

retract.

When using the rear center seat belt, the

buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be

used.

To release the seat belt:

The seat belt is released by pressing the

release button (1) in the locking buckle.

When it is released, the belt should auto-

matically draw back into the retractor.

If this does not happen, check the belt to

be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

B210A01NF

OUN026131N

323

Safety features of your vehicle

C020104AUN

3-point rear center seat belt (5-seater)

To fasten the rear center seat belt:

1. Pull the webbing slowly out from the

retractor on the top of the seatback to

connect the rear center belt.

2. Insert the metal tab (1) into the open

end of the anchor connector (2) until

an audible “click" is heard, indicating

the latch is locked. Make sure the belt

is not twisted.

3. Pull the webbing and insert the tongue

plate (3) into the open end of the buck-

le (4) until an audible “click” is heard,

indicating the latch is locked. Make

sure the belt is not twisted.

OUN036132N OUN036133N

CAUTION - Cargo

Be sure that cargo is securely

loaded in the rear cargo area.

Failing to do so may cause damage

to the rear center seat belt in sud-

den stops or collisions.

OUN036903N

Safety features of your vehicle

243

There will be an audible “click” when the

tab locks in the buckle. The seat belt

automatically adjusts to the proper length

only after the lap belt is adjusted manu-

ally so that it fits snugly around your hips.

If you lean forward in a slow, easy

motion, the belt will extend and let you

move around. If there is a sudden stop or

impact, the belt will lock into position. It

will also lock if you try to lean forward too

quickly.

When using the rear center seat belt, the

buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be

used.

To unfasten the rear center seat belt:

1. Press the release button (5) on the

buckle (4) and remove the tongue

plate (3) from the buckle (4).

2. Allow the webbing to draw back auto-

matically into the retractor.

WARNING

Never let anyone ride in the rear

center seat without fastening all

metal tab (or tongue plate) and

anchor connector (or buckle) as

described in this section. This seat

belt is designed to function as a

typical 3-point restraint (lap/shoul-

der belt). Using only the shoulder

portion or lap portion of the belt

can result in serious or fatal

injuries in the event of a collision or

sudden stop.

OUN036134N OUN036904N

325

Safety features of your vehicle

3. If necessary, disconnect the metal tab

(1) from the anchor connector (2) by

inserting a key or similar small rigid

device into the release button (6) on

the anchor connector (2) and allow the

webbing to draw back automatically

into the retractor.

C020105AUN

Stowing the rear seat belt

• The rear seat belt buckles can be

stowed in the pocket between the rear

seatback and cushion when not in use.

• The center seat belt can be stowed

with the plate and webbing rolled in the

pocket between the rear seatback and

cushion.

Routing the seat belt webbing through

the rear seat belt guides will help keep

the belts from being trapped behind or

under the seats.

OUN036137L

OUN026133

2nd row seat (7-seater)

3rd row seat (7-seater)

OUN026134

OUN026135

2nd row seat

3rd row seat (7-seater)

OUN036136N

OUN036135N

Safety features of your vehicle

263

C020200AUN-EU

Pre-tensioner seat belt

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and

front passenger's pre-tensioner seat

belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is

to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly

against the occupant's body in certain

frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat

belts can be activated, where the frontal

collision is severe enough, together with

the air bags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if

the occupant tries to lean forward too

quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock

into position. In certain frontal collisions,

the pre-tensioner will activate and pull

the seat belt into tighter contact against

the occupant's body.

If the system senses excessive seat belt

tension on the driver or passenger's seat

belt when the pre-tensioner activates, the

load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will

release some of the pressure on the

affected seat belt. (if equipped)

The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-

sists mainly of the following components.

Their locations are shown in the illustra-

tion:

1. SRS air bag warning light

2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly

3. SRS control module

OMG035300 1LDE3100

327

Safety features of your vehicle

✽✽NOTICE

• Both the driver's and front passen-

ger's pre-tensioner seat belts will be

activated in certain frontal collisions.

The pre-tensioner seat belts can be

activated, where the frontal collision

is severe enough, together with the air

bags.

The pre-tensioners will not be activat-

ed if the seat belts are not being worn

at the time of the collision.

• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are

activated, a loud noise may be heard

and fine dust, which may appear to be

smoke, may be visible in the passenger

compartment. These are normal oper-

ating conditions and are not haz-

ardous.

• Although it is harmless, the fine dust

may cause skin irritation and should

not be breathed for prolonged peri-

ods. Wash all exposed skin areas thor-

oughly after an accident in which the

pre-tensioner seat belts were activat-

ed.

✽✽NOTICE

Because the sensor that activates the

SRS air bag is connected with the pre-

tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag

warning light on the instrument

panel will illuminate for approximately

6 seconds after the ignition switch has

been turned to the ON position, and

then it should turn off.

AIR

BAG

WARNING

To obtain maximum benefit from a

pre-tensioner seat belt:

1. The seat belt must be worn cor-

rectly and adjusted to the proper

position. Please read and follow

all of the important information

and precautions about your vehi-

cle’s occupant safety features –

including seat belts and air bags

– that are provided in this manu-

al.

2. Be sure you and your passen-

gers always wear seat belts prop-

erly.

CAUTION

If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not

working properly, this warning light

will illuminate even if there is no

malfunction of the SRS air bag. If

the SRS air bag warning light does

not illuminate when the ignition

switch is turned to ON, or if it

remains illuminated after illuminat-

ing for approximately 6 seconds, or

if it illuminates while the vehicle is

being driven, please have an

authorized KIA dealer inspect the

pre-tensioner seat belt or SRS air

bag system as soon as possible.

Safety features of your vehicle

283

C020300AUN-EU

Seat belt precautions

(Continued)

• Improper handling of the pre-ten-

sioner seat belt assemblies, and

failure to heed the warnings not

to strike, modify, inspect, replace,

service or repair the pre-tension-

er seat belt assemblies may lead

to improper operation or inadver-

tent activation and serious injury.

• Always wear the seat belts when

driving or riding in a motor vehi-

cle.

WARNING

• Pre-tensioners are designed to

operate only one time. After acti-

vation, pre-tensioner seat belts

must be replaced. All seat belts,

of any type, should always be

replaced after they have been

worn during a collision.

• The pre-tensioner seat belt

assembly mechanisms become

hot during activation. Do not

touch the pre-tensioner seat belt

assemblies for several minutes

after they have been activated.

• Do not attempt to inspect or

replace the pre-tensioner seat

belts yourself. This must be done

by an authorized KIA dealer.

• Do not strike the pre-tensioner

seat belt assemblies.

(Continued)

WARNING

All occupants of the vehicle must

wear their seat belts at all times.

Seat belts and child restraints

reduce the risk of serious or fatal

injuries for all occupants in the

event of a collision or sudden stop.

Without a seat belt, occupants

could be shifted too close to a

deploying air bag, strike the interior

structure or be thrown from the

vehicle. Properly worn seat belts

greatly reduce these hazards.

Even with advanced air bags,

unbelted occupants can be severe-

ly injured by a deploying air bag.

Always follow the precautions

about seat belts, air bags and occu-

pant seating contained in this man-

ual.

329

Safety features of your vehicle

C020306AUN

Infant or small child

You should be aware of the specific

requirements in your country. Child

and/or infant seats must be properly

placed and installed in the rear seat. For

more information about the use of these

restraints, refer to “Child restraint sys-

tem” in this section.

✽✽NOTICE

Small children are best protected from

injury in an accident when properly

restrained in the rear seat by a child

restraint system that meets the require-

ments of safety standards of your coun-

try. Before buying any child restraint

system, make sure that it has a label cer-

tifying that it meets safety standards of

your country. The restraint must be

appropriate for your child's height and

weight. Check the label on the child

restraint for this information. Refer to

“Child restraint system” in this section.

C020301AUN

Larger children

Children who are too large for child

restraint systems should always occupy

the rear seat and use the available

lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should

be fastened snug on the hips and as low

as possible. Check belt fit periodically. A

child's squirming could put the belt out of

position. Children are afforded the most

safety in the event of an accident when

they are restrained by a proper restraint

system in the rear seat. If a larger child

(over age 12) must be seated in the front

seat, the child should be securely

restrained by the available lap/shoulder

belt and the seat should be placed in the

rearmost position. Children age 12 and

under should be restrained securely in

the rear seat. NEVER place a child age

12 and under in the front seat. NEVER

place a rear facing child seat in the front

seat of a vehicle.

WARNING

Every person in your vehicle needs

to be properly restrained at all

times, including infants and chil-

dren. Never hold a child in your

arms or lap when riding in a vehi-

cle. The violent forces created dur-

ing a crash will tear the child from

your arms and throw the child

against the interior. Always use a

child restraint appropriate for your

child's height and weight.

Safety features of your vehicle

303

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-

es the child’s neck or face, try placing the

child closer to the center of the vehicle. If

the shoulder belt still touches their face

or neck they need to be returned to a

child restraint system.

C020302AUN

Pregnant women

The use of a seat belt is recommended

for pregnant women to lessen the chance

of injury in an accident. When a seat belt

is used, the lap belt portion should be

placed as low and snugly as possible on

the hips, not across the abdomen. For

specific recommendations, consult a

physician.

C020303AUN

Injured person

A seat belt should be used when an

injured person is being transported.

When this is necessary, you should con-

sult a physician for recommendations.

C020304AUN

One person per belt

Two people (including children) should

never attempt to use a single seat belt.

This could increase the severity of

injuries in case of an accident.

C020305AUN

Do not lie down

To reduce the chance of injuries in the

event of an accident and to achieve maxi-

mum effectiveness of the restraint system,

all passengers should be sitting up and the

front and rear (2nd and/or 3rd row) seats

should be in an upright position when the

car is moving.

A seat belt cannot provide proper protec-

tion if the person is lying down in the rear

seat or if the front and rear (2nd and/or 3rd

row) seats are in a reclined position.

WARNING - Shoulder belts

on small children

• Never allow a shoulder belt to be

in contact with a child’s neck or

face while the vehicle is in

motion.

• If seat belts are not properly worn

and adjusted on children, there is

a risk of death or serious injury.

331

Safety features of your vehicle

C020400AUN

Care of seat belts

Seat belt systems should never be disas-

sembled or modified. In addition, care

should be taken to assure that seat belts

and belt hardware are not damaged by

seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

C020401AUN

Periodic inspection

We recommend that all seat belts be

inspected periodically for wear or dam-

age of any kind. Any damaged parts

should be replaced as soon as possible.

C020402AUN

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.

If belts become dirty, they can be

cleaned by using a mild soap solution

and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong

detergents or abrasives should not be

used because they may damage and

weaken the fabric.

C020403AUN

When to replace seat belts

Entire in-use seat belt assembly or

assemblies should be replaced if the

vehicle has been involved in an accident.

This should be done even if no damage

is visible. Additional questions concern-

ing seat belt operation should be directed

to an authorized KIA dealer.

WARNING

When you return the rear seatback

to its upright position after the rear

seatback has been folded down, be

careful not to damage the seat belt

webbing or buckle. Be sure that the

webbing or buckle does not get

caught or pinched in the rear seat.

A seat belt with damaged webbing

or buckle will not be as strong and

could possibly fail during a colli-

sion or sudden stop, resulting in

serious injury.

WARNING

Riding with a reclined seatback

increases your chance of serious or

fatal injuries in the event of a colli-

sion or sudden stop. The protection

of your restraint system (seat belts

and air bags) is greatly reduced by

reclining your seat. Seat belts must

be snug against your hips and

chest to work properly. The more

the seatback is reclined, the greater

the chance that an occupant's hips

will slide under the lap belt causing

serious internal injuries or the

occupant's neck could strike the

shoulder belt. Drivers and passen-

gers should always sit well back in

their seats, properly belted, and

with the seatbacks upright.

Safety features of your vehicle

323

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

C030000BUN

Children riding in the car should sit in the

rear seat and must always be properly

restrained to minimize the risk of injury in

an accident, sudden stop or sudden

maneuver. According to accident statis-

tics, children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seats than in the

front seat. Larger children not in a child

restraint should use one of the seat belts

provided.

You should be aware of the specific

requirements in your country. Child

and/or infant safety seats must be prop-

erly placed and installed in the rear seat.

You must use a commercially available

child restraint system that meets the

requirements of the Safety Standards of

your country.

Children could be injured or killed in a

crash if their restraints are not properly

secured. For small children and babies, a

child seat or infant seat must be used.

Before buying a particular child restraint

system, make sure it fits your car seat

and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow

all the instructions provided by the man-

ufacturer when installing the child

restraint system.

WARNING

• A child restraint system must be

placed in the rear seat. Never

install a child or infant seat on the

front passenger's seat. Should an

accident occur and cause the

passenger-side air bag to deploy,

it could severely injure or kill an

infant or child seated in an infant

or child seat. Thus only use a

child restraint in the rear seat of

your vehicle.

• A seat belt or child restraint sys-

tem can become very hot if it is

left in a closed vehicle on a sunny

day, even if the outside tempera-

ture does not feel hot. Be sure to

check the seat cover and buckles

before placing a child there.

(Continued)

• When the child restraint system

is not in use, store it in the lug-

gage area or fasten it with a seat

belt so that it will not be thrown

forward in the case of a sudden

stop or an accident.

• Children may be seriously injured

or killed by an inflating air bag.

All children, even those too large

for child restraints, must ride in

the rear seat.

333

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING

To reduce the chance of serious or

fatal injuries:

• Children of all ages are safer

when restrained in the rear seat.

A child riding in the front passen-

ger seat can be forcefully struck

by an inflating air bag resulting in

serious or fatal injuries.

• Always follow the instructions for

installation and use of the child

restraint maker.

• Always make sure the child seat

is secured properly in the car and

your child is securely restrained

in the child seat.

• Never hold a child in your arms or

lap when riding in a vehicle. The

violent forces created during a

crash will tear the child from your

arms and throw the child against

the car’s interior.

• Never put a seat belt over your-

self and a child. During a crash,

the belt could press deep into the

child causing serious internal

injuries.

(Continued)

• Never leave children unattended

in a vehicle – not even for a short

time. The car can heat up very

quickly, resulting in serious

injuries to children inside. Even

very young children may inadver-

tently cause the vehicle to move,

entangle themselves in the win-

dows, or lock themselves or oth-

ers inside the vehicle.

• Never allow two children, or any

two persons, to use the same

seat belt.

• Children often squirm and repo-

sition themselves improperly.

Never let a child ride with the

shoulder belt under their arm or

behind their back. Always proper-

ly position and secure children in

rear seat.

• Never allow a child to stand-up or

kneel on the seat or floorboard of

a moving vehicle. During a colli-

sion or sudden stop, the child

can be violently thrown against

the vehicles interior, resulting in

serious injury.

(Continued)

• Never use an infant carrier or a

child safety seat that "hooks"

over a seatback, it may not pro-

vide adequate security in an acci-

dent.

• Seat belts can become very hot,

especially when the car is parked

in direct sunlight. Always check

seat belt buckles before fasten-

ing them over a child.

Safety features of your vehicle

343

C030100AUN-EU

Using a child restraint system

For small children and babies, the use of

a child seat or infant seat is required. This

child seat or infant seat should be of

appropriate size for the child and should

be installed in accordance with the man-

ufacturer's instructions.

For safety reasons, we recommend that

the child restraint system be used in the

rear seats.

Since all passenger seat belts move

freely under normal conditions and only

lock under extreme or emergency condi-

tions (emergency lock mode), you must

manually change these seat belts to the

auto lock mode to secure a child

restraint.

C030102AUN-EU

Placing a passenger seat belt into

the auto lock mode

The use of the auto lock mode will

ensure that the normal movement of the

child in the vehicle does not cause the

seat belt to be pulled out and loosen the

firmness of its hold on the child restraint

system. To secure a child restraint sys-

tem, use the following procedure.

CRS

OUN026150

Forward-facing child restraint system

Rearward-facing child restraint system

WARNING - Child seat

installation

• Before installing the child

restraint system, read the

instructions supplied by the child

restraint system manufacturer.

• If the seat belt does not operate

as described in this section, have

the system checked immediately

by your authorized KIA dealer.

• Failure to observe this manual's

instructions regarding child

restraint system and the instruc-

tions provided with the child

restraint system could increase

the chance and/or severity of

injury in an accident.

WARNING

Never place a rear-facing child

restraint in the front passenger

seat, because of the danger that an

inflating passenger-side air bag

could impact the rear-facing child

restraint and kill the child.

335

Safety features of your vehicle

To install a child restraint system on the

outboard or center rear seats, do the fol-

lowing:

1. Place the child restraint system in the

seat and route the lap/shoulder belt

around or through the restraint, follow-

ing the restraint manufacturer’s

instructions. Be sure the seat belt web-

bing is not twisted.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into

the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”

sound.

Position the release button so that it is

easy to access in case of an emergency.

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat

belt all the way out. When the shoulder

portion of the seat belt is fully extend-

ed, it will shift the retractor to the “Auto

Lock” (child restraint) mode.

E2MS103005 E2BLD310 MMSA3028

Safety features of your vehicle

363

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of

the seat belt to retract and listen for an

audible “clicking” or “ratcheting” sound.

This indicates that the retractor is in

the “Auto Lock” mode. If no distinct

sound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. Remove as much slack from the belt

as possible by pushing down on the

child restraint system while feeding the

shoulder belt back into the retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraint

system to confirm that the seat belt is

holding it firmly in place. If it is not,

release the seat belt and repeat steps

2 through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor is in

the “Auto Lock” mode by attempting to

pull more of the seat belt out of the

retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is

in the “Auto Lock” mode.

To remove the child restraint, press the

release button on the buckle and then

pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the

restraint and allow the seat belt to retract

fully.

When the seat belt is allowed to

retract to its fully stowed position, the

retractor will automatically switch

from the “Auto Lock” mode to the

emergency lock mode for normal

adult usage.

"Click"

MMSA3029 MMSA3030

WARNING - Auto lock

mode

The lap/shoulder belt automatically

returns to the “emergency lock

mode” whenever the belt is allowed

to retract fully. Therefore, the pre-

ceding seven steps must be fol-

lowed each time a child restraint is

installed.

If the retractor is not in the

Automatic Locking mode, the child

restraint can move when your vehi-

cle turns or stops suddenly. A child

can be seriously injured or killed if

the child restraint is not properly

anchored to the car, including set-

ting the retractor to the Automatic

Locking mode.

337

Safety features of your vehicle

C030103AUN

Securing a child restraint seat with

tether anchor system

Child restraint hook holders are located

on the floor behind the rear seats (or on

the back of the rear seatbacks).

1. Route the child restraint seat strap

over the seatback.

For vehicles with adjustable headrest,

route the tether strap under the head-

rest and between the headrest posts,

otherwise route the tether strap over

the top of the seatback.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to the

appropriate child restraint hook holder

and tighten to secure the seat.

WARNING - Tether strap

Never mount more than one child

restraint to a single tether or to a

single lower anchorage point. The

increased load caused by multiple

seats may cause the tethers or

anchorage points to break, causing

serious injury or death.

WARNING

A child can be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child

restraint is not properly anchored

to the car and the child is not prop-

erly restrained in the child restraint.

Always follow the child seat manu-

facturer’s instructions for installa-

tion and use.

OUN036100N

OUN036138L

7-seater

5-seater 2GHA3300L

Safety features of your vehicle

383

C030104AUN-EU

Securing a child restraint seat with

child seat lower anchor system

Some child seat manufacturers make

child restraint seats that are labeled as

LATCH or LATCH-compatible child

restraint seats. LATCH stands for "Lower

anchors and Tethers for Children". These

seats include two rigid or webbing

mounted attachments that connect to

two LATCH anchors at specific seating

positions in your vehicle. This type of

child restraint seat eliminates the need to

use seat belts to attach the child seat in

the rear seats.

There is a child restraint symbol located

on the lower portion of each side of the

rear seatbacks. These symbols indicate

the position of the lower anchors for child

restraints so equipped.

WARNING - Child restraint

check

Check that the child restraint sys-

tem is secure by pushing and

pulling it in different directions.

Incorrectly fitted child restraints

may swing, twist, tip or separate

causing death or serious injury.

WARNING - Child restraint

anchorage

• Child restraint anchorages are

designed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used for

adult seat belts or harnesses or

for attaching other items or

equipment to the vehicle.

• The tether strap may not work

properly if attached somewhere

other than the correct tether

anchor.

OUN036101L OUN036139L

339

Safety features of your vehicle

LATCH anchors have been provided in

your vehicle. The LATCH anchors are

located in the left and right outboard rear

seating positions. Their locations are

shown in the illustration. There is no

LATCH anchor provided for the center

rear seating position.

The LATCH anchors are located between

the seatback and the seat cushion of the

rear seat left and right outboard seating

positions.

Follow the child seat manufacturer’s

instructions to properly install child

restraint seats with LATCH or LATCH-

compatible attachments.

Once you have installed the LATCH child

restraint, assure that the seat is properly

attached to the LATCH and tether

anchors.

Also, test the child restraint seat before

you place the child in it. Tilt the seat from

side to side. Also try to tug the seat for-

ward. Check to see if the anchors hold

the seat in place.

WARNING

If the child restraint is not anchored

properly, the risk of a child being

seriously injured or killed in a colli-

sion greatly increases.

WARNING - LATCH lower

anchors

LATCH lower anchors are only to

be used with the left and right rear

outboard seating positions. Never

attempt to attach an LATCH

equipped seat in the center seating

position. You may damage the

anchors or the anchors may fail

and break in a collision.

WARNING

When using the vehicle's "LATCH"

system to install a child restraint

system in the rear seat, all unused

vehicle rear seat belt metal latch

plates or tabs must be latched

securely in their seat belt buckles

and the seat belt webbing must be

retracted behind the child restraint

to prevent the child from reaching

and taking hold of unretracted seat

belts. Unlatched metal latch plates

or tabs may allow the child to reach

the unretracted seat belts which

may result in strangulation and a

serious injury or death to the child

in the child restraint.

OUN036140L

WARNING

Install the child restraint seat fully

rearward against the seatback with

the seatback reclined one position

from the most upright latched posi-

tion.

CAUTION

Do not allow the rear seat belt web-

bing to get scratched or pinched by

the child-seat latch and LATCH

anchor during the installation.

Safety features of your vehicle

403

C040000AUN

(1) Driver’s front air bag

(2) Passenger’s front air bag

(3) Side air bag*

(4) Curtain air bag*

* : if equipped

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

OEN036301

* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

WARNING

Even in vehicles with air bags, you

and your passengers must always

wear the safety belts provided in

order to minimize the risk and

severity of injury in the event of a

collision or rollover.

341

Safety features of your vehicle

C040100AUN-EU

SRS components and functions

The SRS consists of the following com-

ponents:

1. Driver's front air bag module

2. Passenger's front air bag module

3. Side air bag modules*

4. Curtain air bag modules*

5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies

6. Air bag warning light

7. SRS control module (SRSCM)

8. Front impact sensors

9. Side impact sensors*

10. “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indi-

cator (Front passenger’s seat only)

11. Occupant classification system

(Front passenger’s seat only)

12. Driver’s seat track position sensor

13. Driver’s and front passenger’s seat

belt buckle sensors

*: if equipped

The SRSCM continually monitors all

SRS components while the ignition

switch is ON to determine if a crash

impact is severe enough to require air

bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat

belt deployment.

The SRS "AIR BAG" warning light on the

instrument panel will illuminate for about

6 seconds after the ignition switch is

turned to the ON position, after which the

SRS "AIR BAG" warning light should go

out.

If any of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the SRS.

Have an authorized KIA dealer inspect

the air bag system as soon as possible.

• The light does not turn on briefly when

you turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illuminating for

approximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on while the vehicle is

in motion.

The air bag modules are located both in

the center of the steering wheel and in

the front passenger's panel above the

glove box. When the SRSCM detects a

sufficiently severe impact to the front of

the vehicle, it will automatically deploy

the front air bags.

B240B01L

Driver’s front air bag (1)

OUN027160N

Safety features of your vehicle

423

Upon deployment, tear seams molded

directly into the pad covers will separate

under pressure from the expansion of the

air bags. Further opening of the covers

then allows full inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combination

with a properly worn seat belt, slows the

driver's or the passenger's forward

motion, reducing the risk of head and

chest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bag

immediately starts deflating, enabling the

driver to maintain forward visibility and

the ability to steer or operate other con-

trols.

B240B02L B240B03L

Driver’s front air bag (2) Driver’s front air bag (3)

WARNING

• Do not install or place any acces-

sories (drink holder, cassette

holder, sticker, etc.) on the front

passenger's panel above the

glove box in a vehicle with a pas-

senger's air bag. Such objects

may become dangerous projec-

tiles and cause injury if the pas-

senger's air bag inflates.

• When installing a container of liq-

uid air freshener inside the vehi-

cle, do not place it near the

instrument cluster nor on the

instrument panel surface.

It may become a dangerous pro-

jectile and cause injury if the pas-

senger's air bag inflates.

B240B05L

Passenger’s front air bag

343

Safety features of your vehicle

C040300AUN

Occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with an occu-

pant classification system in the front

passenger's seat.

WARNING

• If an air bag deploys, there may

be a loud noise followed by a fine

dust released in the vehicle.

These conditions are normal and

are not hazardous - the air bags

are packed in this fine powder.

The dust generated during air

bag deployment may cause skin

or eye irritation as well as aggra-

vate asthma for some persons.

Always wash all exposed skin

areas thoroughly with lukewarm

water and a mild soap after an

accident in which the air bags

were deployed.

• The SRS can function only when

the ignition switch is in the ON

position. If the SRS "AIR BAG"

warning light does not illuminate,

or continuously remains on after

illuminating for about 6 seconds

when the ignition switch is turned

to the ON position, or after the

engine is started, comes on while

driving, the SRS is not working

properly. If this occurs, have your

vehicle immediately inspected by

an authorized KIA dealer.

(Continued)

• Before you replace a fuse or dis-

connect a battery terminal, turn

the ignition switch to the LOCK

position and remove the ignition

switch. Never remove or replace

the air bag related fuse(s) when

the ignition switch is in the ON

position. Failure to heed this

warning will cause the SRS “AIR

BAG” warning light to illuminate.

OUN037161N

Safety features of your vehicle

443

The occupant classification system is

designed to detect the presence of a

properly-seated front passenger and

determine if the passenger's front air bag

should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

The driver's front air bag is not affected

or controlled by the occupant classifica-

tion system.

If the front passenger seat is occupied by

a person that the system determines to

be of adult size, and he/she sits properly

(sitting upright with the seatback in an

upright position, centered on the seat

cushion with their seat belt on, legs com-

fortably extended and their feet on the

floor), the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"

indicator will be turned off and the front

passenger's air bag will be able to inflate,

if necessary, in frontal crashes.

You will find the "PASSENGER AIR BAG

OFF" indicator on the center facia panel.

This system detects the conditions 1~4

in the following table and activates or

deactivates the front passenger air bag

based on these conditions.

C040301AUN

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

*1) The system judges a person of adult

size as an adult. When a smaller

adult sits in the front passenger seat,

the system may recognize him/her

as a child depending on his/her

physique and posture.

*2) Do not allow children to ride in the

front passenger seat. When a larger

child who has outgrown a child

restraint system sits in the front pas-

senger seat, the system may recog-

nize him/her as an adult depending

on his/her physique or posture.

*3) Never install a child restraint system

on the front passenger seat.

WARNING

Riding in an improper position or

placing weight on the front passen-

ger's seat when it is unoccupied by

a passenger adversely affects the

occupant classification system

(OCS).

(Continued)

Condition

detected by the

occupant classi-

fication system

1. Adult *1

2. Child*2or

child restraint

system*3

3. Unoccupied

4. There is a

malfunction

in the system

Off

Activated

Deactivated

Activated

"PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF"

indicator light

SRS warning

light

Front passen-

ger air bag

Activated

Deactivated

Activated

Side air bag

Activated

Curtain air bag

Indicator/Warning light Devices

345

Safety features of your vehicle

1KMN3663

1KMN3664

1KMN3665

- Never sit with hips shifted

towards the front of the seat.

- Never lean on the center console.

- Never sit on one side of the front

passenger seat.

- Never place feet on the dash-

board.

OVQ036013N

1KMN3662

- Never put a heavy load in the

front passenger seat or seatback

pocket.

- Never excessively recline the

front passenger seatback.

OVQ036014N

- Never place feet on the front pas-

senger seatback.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

463

When an adult is seated in the front pas-

senger seat, if the “PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF” indicator is on, turn the igni-

tion switch to the LOCK position and ask

the passenger to sit properly (sitting

upright with the seat back in an upright

position, centered on the seat cushion

with their seat belt on, legs comfortably

extended and their feet on the floor).

Restart the engine and have the person

remain in that position. This will allow the

system to detect the person and to

enable the passenger air bag.

If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-

cator is still on, ask the passenger to

move to the rear seat.

✽✽NOTICE

The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"

indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-

onds after the ignition switch is turned

to the ON position or after the engine is

started. If the front passenger seat is

occupied, the occupant classification

sensor will then classify the front pas-

senger after several more seconds.

B990A01O

WARNING

Do not allow an adult passenger to

ride in the front seat when the

“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indi-

cator is illuminated, because the air

bag will not deploy in the event of a

crash. If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG

OFF" indicator remains illuminated

after the passenger repositions

themselves properly and the car is

restarted, it is recommended that

passenger move to the rear seat

because the passenger's front air

bag will not deploy.

Front seat passengers must stay

properly seated to avoid serious

injury from a deploying air bag.

WARNING

Do not put a heavy load in the front

passenger seatback pocket or on

the front passenger seat. Do not

hang onto the front passenger seat.

Do not hang any items such as

seatback table on the front passen-

ger seatback. Do not place feet on

the front passenger seatback. Do

not place any items under the front

passenger seat. Any of these could

interfere with proper sensor opera-

tion.

Proper position

347

Safety features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• Air bags can only be used once –

have an authorized KIA dealer

replace the air bag immediately

after deployment.

• A smaller-stature adult who is not

seated correctly (for example:

seat excessively reclined, leaning

on the center console, or hips

shifted forward in the seat) can

cause a condition where the

advanced frontal air bag system

senses less weight than if the

occupant were seated properly

(sitting upright with the seatback

in an upright position, centered

on the seat cushion with their

seat belt on, legs comfortably

extended and their feet on the

floor).

This condition can result in an

adult potentially being misclassi-

fied and illumination of the "PAS-

SENGER AIR BAG OFF" indica-

tor.

(Continued)

• Do not modify or replace the front

passenger seat. Don't place any-

thing on or attach anything such

as a blanket or after market seat

heater to the front passenger

seat.This can adversely affect the

occupant classification system.

• Do not sit on sharp objects such

as tools when occupying the

front passenger seat. This can

adversely affect the occupant

classification system.

• Do not use accessory seat cov-

ers on the front seats.

• Accident statistics show that

children are safer if they are

restrained in the rear, as opposed

to the front seat. It is recom-

mended that child restraints be

secured in a rear seat, including

an infant riding in a rear-facing

infant seat, a child riding in a for-

ward-facing child seat and an

older child riding in a booster

seat.

(Continued)

WARNING

• Even though your vehicle is

equipped with the occupant clas-

sification system, never install a

child restraint system in the front

passenger's seat. A deploying air

bag can forcefully strike a child

resulting in serious injuries or

death. Any child age 12 and

under should ride in the rear seat.

Children too large for child

restraints should use the avail-

able lap/shoulder belts. No matter

what type of crash, children of all

ages are safer when restrained in

the rear seat.

• If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG

OFF" indicator is illuminated

when the front passenger's seat

is occupied by an adult and

he/she sits properly (sitting

upright with the seatback in an

upright position, centered on the

seat cushion with their seat belt

on, legs comfortably extended

and their feet on the floor), have

that person sit in the rear seat.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

483

C040400AUN-EC

Driver's and passenger's front air

bag

Your vehicle is equipped with a

Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag)

System. The indications of the system's

presence are the letters "SRS AIR BAG"

embossed on the air bag pad cover in the

steering wheel and the passenger's side

front panel pad above the glove box.

The SRS consists of air bags installed

under the pad covers in the center of the

steering wheel and the passenger's side

front panel above the glove box.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide the

vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-

ger with additional protection than that

offered by the seat belt system alone in

case of a frontal impact of sufficient

severity. The SRS uses sensors to gath-

er information about the driver's seat

position, the driver's and front passen-

ger's seat belt usage and impact severi-

ty.

WARNING

If the occupant classification sys-

tem is not working properly, the

SRS air bag warning light on

the instrument panel will illuminate

because the passenger's front air

bag is connected with the occupant

classification system. If there is a

malfunction of the occupant classi-

fication system, the "PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF" indicator will not

illuminate and the passenger's

front air bag will inflate in frontal

impact crashes even if there is no

occupant in the front passenger's

seat. If the SRS air bag warning

light does not illuminate when the

ignition switch is turned to the ON

position, remains illuminated after

approximately 6 seconds when the

ignition switch is turned to the ON

position, or if it illuminates while

the vehicle is being driven, have an

authorized KIA dealer inspect the

occupant classification system and

the SRS air bag system as soon as

possible.

OUN026107

Driver’s front air bag

OUN026108

Passenger’s front air bag

349

Safety features of your vehicle

The driver's seat track position sensor,

which is installed on the seat track, deter-

mine if the seat is fore or aft of a refer-

ence position. The seat belt buckle sen-

sors determine if the driver and front pas-

senger's seat belts are fastened. These

sensors provide the ability to control the

SRS deployment based on how close the

driver's seat is to the steering wheel,

whether or not the seat belts are fas-

tened, and how severe the impact is.

The advanced SRS offers the ability to

control the air bag inflation with two lev-

els. A first stage level is provided for

moderate-severity impacts. A second

stage level is provided for more severe

impacts.

According to the impact severity, seating

position and seat belt usage, the SRSCM

(SRS Control Module) controls the air

bag inflation. Failure to properly wear

seat belts can increase the risk or sever-

ity of injury in an accident.

Additionally, your vehicle is equipped

with an occupant classification system in

the front passenger's seat. The occupant

classification system detects the pres-

ence of a passenger in the front passen-

ger's seat and will turn off the front pas-

senger's air bag under certain condi-

tions. For more detail, see "Occupant

classification system" in this section.

WARNING

If a seat track position sensor or an

occupant classification system is

not working properly, the SRS air

bag warning light on the instru-

ment panel will illuminate because

the SRS air bag warning light is

connected with the seat track posi-

tion sensor and the occupant clas-

sification system. If the SRS air bag

warning light does not illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned

to the ON position, remains illumi-

nated after approximately 6 sec-

onds when the ignition switch is

turned to the ON position, or if it

illuminates while the vehicle is

being driven, have an authorized

KIA dealer inspect the advanced

SRS air bag system as soon as

possible.

AIR

BAG

Safety features of your vehicle

503

WARNING

• Modification to the seat structure

can adversely affect the seat

track position sensor and cause

the air bag to deploy at a different

level than should be provided.

• Do not place any objects under-

neath the front seats as they

could damage the seat track

position sensor or interfere with

the occupant classification sys-

tem.

• Do not place any objects that may

cause magnetic fields near the

front seat. These may cause a

malfunction of the seat track

position sensor.

WARNING

• Manufacturers are required by

government regulations to pro-

vide a contact point concerning

modifications to the vehicle for

persons with disabilities, which

modifications may affect the

vehicle’s advanced air bag sys-

tem. However, KIA does not

endorse nor will it support any

changes to any part or structure

of the vehicle that could affect

the advanced air bag system,

including the occupant classifi-

cation system.

(Continued)

Specifically, the front passenger

seat, dashboard or door should

not be replaced except by an

authorized KIA dealer using orig-

inal KIA parts designed for this

vehicle and model. Any other

such replacement or modification

could adversely affect the opera-

tion of the occupant classifica-

tion system and your advanced

air bags. For the same reason, do

not attach anything to the seat,

dashboard or door, even tem-

porarily. If the system is adverse-

ly affected, it could cause severe

personal injuries or death in a

collision.

351

Safety features of your vehicle

✽✽NOTICE

• Be sure to read information about the

SRS on the labels provided on the sun

visor.

• Advanced air bags are combined with

pre-tensioner seat belts to help pro-

vide enhanced occupant protection in

frontal crashes. Front air bags are not

intended to deploy in collisions in

which sufficient protection can be

provided by the pre-tensioner seat

belt.

(Continued)

• Move your seat as far back as

practical from the front air bags,

while still maintaining control of

the vehicle.

• You and your passengers should

never sit or lean unnecessarily

close to the air bags. Improperly

positioned drivers and passen-

gers can be severely injured by

inflating air bags.

• Never lean against the door or

center console – always sit in an

upright position.

• Do not allow a passenger ride in

the front seat when the “PASSEN-

GER AIR BAG OFF” indicator is

illuminated, because the air bag

will not deploy in the event of a

moderate or severe frontal crash.

(Continued)

WARNING

Always use seat belts and child

restraints – every trip, every time,

everyone! Air bags inflate with con-

siderable force and in the blink of

an eye. Seat belts help keep occu-

pants in proper position to obtain

maximum benefit from the air bag.

Even with advanced air bags,

improperly and unbelted occupants

can be severely injured when the

air bag inflates. Always follow the

precautions about seat belts, air

bags and occupant safety con-

tained in this manual.

To reduce the chance of serious or

fatal injuries and receive the maxi-

mum safety benefit from your

restraint system:

• Never place a child in any child or

booster seat in the front seat.

• ABC – Always Buckle Children in

the back seat. It is the safest

place for children of any age to

ride.

• Front and side air bags can injure

occupants improperly positioned

in the front seats.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

523

OEP036096N

OVQ036018N

1VQA2091

Rear impact

Side impact

Rollover

(Continued)

• No objects should be placed over

or near the air bag modules on

the steering wheel, instrument

panel, and the front passenger's

panel above the glove box,

because any such object could

cause harm if the vehicle is in a

crash severe enough to cause

the air bags to deploy.

• Never place covers, blankets or

aftermarket seat warmers on the

passenger seat as these may

interfere with the occupant clas-

sification system.

• Do not tamper with or disconnect

SRS wiring or other components

of the SRS system. Doing so

could result in injury, due to acci-

dental deployment of the air bags

or by rendering the SRS inopera-

tive.

• If the SRS air bag warning light

remains illuminated while the

vehicle is being driven, have an

authorized KIA dealer inspect the

air bag system as soon as possi-

ble.

(Continued)

• Air bags can only be used once –

have an authorized KIA dealer

replace the air bag immediately

after deployment.

• The SRS is designed to deploy

the front air bags only when an

impact is sufficiently severe and

when the impact angle is less

than 30° from the forward longitu-

dinal axis of the vehicle.

Additionally, the air bags will only

deploy once. Seat belts must be

worn at all times.

• Front air bags are not intended to

deploy in side-impact, rear-

impact or rollover crashes. In

addition, front air bags will not

deploy in frontal crashes below

the deployment threshold.

(Continued)

353

Safety features of your vehicle

C040600AUN-EU

Side air bag (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a side air

bag in each front seat. The purpose of

the air bag is to provide the vehicle's driv-

er and/or the front passenger with addi-

tional protection than that offered by the

seat belt alone.

(Continued)

• Sitting improperly or out of posi-

tion can result in serious or fatal

injury in a crash. All occupants

should sit upright with the seat

back in an upright position, cen-

tered on the seat cushion with

their seat belt on, legs comfort-

ably extended and their feet on

the floor until the vehicle is

parked and the ignition key is

removed.

• The SRS air bag system must

deploy very rapidly to provide

protection in a crash. If an occu-

pant is out of position because of

not wearing a seat belt, the air

bag may forcefully contact the

occupant causing serious or fatal

injuries.

(Continued)

• Even though your vehicle is

equipped with the occupant clas-

sification system, do not install a

child restraint system in the front

passenger seat position. A child

restraint system must never be

placed in the front seat.The infant

or child could be severely injured

or killed by an air bag deployment

in case of an accident.

• Children age 12 and under must

always be properly restrained in

the rear seat. Never allow chil-

dren to ride in the front passen-

ger seat. If a child over 12 must

be seated in the front seat, he or

she must be properly belted and

the seat should be moved as far

back as possible.

• For maximum safety protection in

all types of crashes, all occu-

pants including the driver should

always wear their seat belts

whether or not an air bag is also

provided at their seating position

to minimize the risk of severe

injury or death in the event of a

crash. Do not sit or lean unneces-

sarily close to the air bag while

the vehicle is in motion.

(Continued)

OUN026141

OUN026109/OUN026110

Safety features of your vehicle

543

The side impact air bags are designed to

deploy only during certain side-impact

collisions, depending on the crash sever-

ity, angle, speed and point of impact. The

side air bags are not designed to deploy

in all side impact situations.

(Continued)

• Do not install any accessories on

the side or near the side air bag.

• Do not place any objects over the

air bag or between the air bag

and yourself.

• Do not place any objects (an

umbrella, bag, etc.) between the

front door and the front seat.

Such objects may become dan-

gerous projectiles and cause

injury if the supplemental side air

bag inflates.

• To prevent unexpected deploy-

ment of the side air bag that may

result in personal injury, avoid

impact to the side impact sensor

when the ignition switch is on.

• If seat or seat cover is damaged,

have the vehicle checked and

repaired by an authorized KIA

dealer. Inform that your vehicle is

equipped with side air bags and

an occupant classification sys-

tem.

WARNING

• The side air bag is supplemental

to the driver's and the passen-

ger's seat belt systems and is not

a substitute for them. Therefore

your seat belts must be worn at

all times while the vehicle is in

motion. The air bags deploy only

in certain side impact conditions

severe enough to cause signifi-

cant injury to the vehicle occu-

pants.

• For best protection from the side

air bag system and to avoid being

injured by the deploying side air

bag, both front seat occupants

should sit in an upright position

with the seat belt properly fas-

tened. The driver's hands should

be placed on the steering wheel

at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions.

The passenger's arms and hands

should be placed on their laps.

• Do not use any accessory seat

covers.

• Use of seat covers could reduce

or prevent the effectiveness of

the system.

(Continued)

355

Safety features of your vehicle

C040700AUN

Curtain air bag (if equipped)

Curtain air bags are located along both

sides of the roof rails above the front and

rear doors.

They are designed to help protect the

heads of the front seat occupants and

the rear outboard seat occupants in cer-

tain side impact collisions.

The curtain air bags are designed to

deploy only during certain side impact

collisions, depending on the crash sever-

ity, angle, speed and impact. The curtain

air bags are not designed to deploy in all

side impact situations, collisions from the

front or rear of the vehicle or in most

rollover situations.

WARNING

• In order for side and curtain air

bags to provide the best protec-

tion, both front seat occupants

and both outboard rear occu-

pants should sit in an upright

position with the seat belts prop-

erly fastened. Importantly, chil-

dren should sit in a proper child

restraint system in the rear seat.

(Continued)

• When children are seated in the

rear outboard seats, they must be

seated in the proper child

restraint system. Make sure to

put the child restraint system as

far away from the door side as

possible, and secure the child

restraint system in a locked posi-

tion.

• Do not allow the passengers to

lean their heads or bodies onto

doors, put their arms on the

doors, stretch their arms out of

the window, or place objects

between the doors and passen-

gers when they are seated on

seats equipped with side and/or

curtain air bags.

• Never try to open or repair any

components of the side curtain

air bag system. This should only

be done by an authorized KIA

dealer.

Failure to follow the above men-

tioned instructions can result in

injury or death to the vehicle occu-

pants in an accident.

OUN026111

OUN026091

Safety features of your vehicle

563

C040800AUN

Why didn’t my air bag go off in a

collision? (Inflation and non-infla-

tion conditions of the air bag)

There are many types of accidents in

which the air bag would not be expect-

ed to provide additional protection.

These include rear impacts, second or

third collisions in multiple impact

accidents, as well as low speed

impacts. In other words, just because

your vehicle is damaged and even if it

is totally unusable, don’t be surprised

that the air bags did not inflate.

Air bag collision sensors

(1) SRS control module

(2) Front impact sensor

(3) Side impact sensor (if equipped)

(4) Side impact sensor (if equipped)

OUN027112N/OUN026113L/OUN026114L/OUN026115N/OUN026116

123 4 (if equipped)(if equipped)

357

Safety features of your vehicle

C040801AUN

Air bag inflation conditions

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate in a

frontal collision depending on the intensi-

ty, speed or angles of impact of the front

collision.

1VQA2084

WARNING

• Do not hit or allow any objects to

impact the locations where air

bags or sensors are installed.

This may cause unexpected air

bag deployment, which could

result in serious personal injury

or death.

• If the installation location or

angle of the sensors is altered in

any way, the air bags may deploy

when they should not or they may

not deploy when they should,

causing severe injury or death.

Therefore, do not try to perform

maintenance on or around the air

bag sensors. Have the vehicle

checked and repaired by an

authorized KIA dealer.

(Continued)

• Problems may arise if the sensor

installation angles are changed

due to the deformation of the

front bumper, body or B and C (if

equipped) pillar where side colli-

sion sensors are installed. Have

the vehicle checked and repaired

by an authorized KIA dealer.

• Your vehicle has been designed

to absorb impact and deploy the

air bag(s) in certain collisions.

Installing aftermarket bumper

guards or replacing a bumper

with non-genuine parts may

adversely affect your vehicle’s

collision and air bag deployment

performance.

Safety features of your vehicle

583

Side and/or curtain air bags (if equipped)

Side and/or curtain air bags are

designed to inflate when an impact is

detected by side collision sensors

depending on the strength, speed or

angles of impact resulting from a side

impact collision.

Although the front air bags (driver’s and

front passenger’s air bags) are designed

to inflate only in frontal collisions, they

also may inflate in other types of colli-

sions if the front impact sensors detect a

sufficient impact. Side air bags (side

and/or curtain air bags) are designed to

inflate only in side impact collisions, but

they may inflate in other collisions if the

side impact sensors detect a sufficient

impact.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by

bumps or objects on unimproved roads

or sidewalks, air bags may deploy. Drive

carefully on unimproved roads or on sur-

faces not designed for vehicle traffic to

prevent unintended air bag deployment.

C040802AUN

Air bag non-inflation conditions

• In certain low-speed collisions the air

bags may not deploy. The air bags are

designed not to deploy in such cases

because they may not provide benefits

beyond the protection of the seat belts

in such collisions.

1VQA2086

OVQ036018N

OUN026090

359

Safety features of your vehicle

• Frontal air bags are not designed to

inflate in rear collisions, because occu-

pants are moved backward by the

force of the impact. In this case, inflat-

ed air bags would not be able to pro-

vide any additional benefit.

• Front air bags may not inflate in side

impact collisions, because occupants

move to the direction of the collision,

and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag

deployment would not provide addi-

tional occupant protection.

However, side or curtain air bags may

inflate depending on the intensity, vehi-

cle speed and angles of impact.

• In a slant or angled collision, the force

of impact may direct the occupants in a

direction where the air bags would not

be able to provide any additional bene-

fit, and thus the sensors may not

deploy any air bags.

OUN036087 1VQA2089OVQ036018N

Safety features of your vehicle

603

• Just before impact, drivers often brake

heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the

front portion of the vehicle causing it to

“ride” under a vehicle with a higher

ground clearance. Air bags may not

inflate in this "under-ride" situation

because deceleration forces that are

detected by sensors may be signifi-

cantly reduced by such “under-ride”

collisions.

• Air bags may not inflate in rollover acci-

dents because air bag deployment

would not provide protection to the

occupants.

However, side and/or curtain air bags

may inflate when the vehicle is rolled

over by a side impact collision, if the

vehicle is equipped with side air bags

and curtain air bags.

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle

collides with objects such as utility

poles or trees, where the point of

impact is concentrated to one area and

the full force of the impact is not deliv-

ered to the sensors.

1VQA2090 1VQA2091 1VQA2092

361

Safety features of your vehicle

C040900AUN

How does the air bag system

operate

• Air bag are activated (able to inflate if

necessary) only when the ignition

switch is turned to the ON or START

position.

• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of

a serious frontal or side collision (if

equipped with side air bag or curtain

air bag) in order to help protect the

occupants from serious physical injury.

• There is no single speed at which the

air bags will inflate.

Generally, air bags are designed to

inflate by the severity of a collision and

its direction. These two factors deter-

mine whether the sensors send out an

electronic deployment/inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on a

number of factors including vehicle

speed, angles of impact and the densi-

ty and stiffness of the vehicles or

objects which your vehicle hits in the

collision. Though, factors are not limit-

ed to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completely

inflate and deflate in an instant.

It is virtually impossible for you to see

the air bags inflate during an accident.

It is much more likely that you will sim-

ply see the deflated air bags hanging

out of their storage compartments after

the collision.

• In order to help provide protection in a

severe collision, the air bags must

inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag

inflation is a consequence of the

extremely short time in which a collision

occurs and the need to get the air bag

between the occupant and the vehicle

structures before the occupant impacts

those structures. This speed of inflation

reduces the risk of serious or life-

threatening injuries in a severe collision

and is thus a necessary part of air bag

design.

However, air bag inflation can also

cause injuries which normally can

include facial abrasions, bruises and

broken bones, and sometimes more

severe injuries because the inflation

speed also causes the air bags to

expand with a great deal of force.

• There are even circumstances

under which contact with the steer-

ing wheel air bag can cause fatal

injuries, especially if the occupant

is positioned excessively close to

the steering wheel.

WARNING

• To avoid severe personal injury

or death caused by deploying air

bags in a collision, the driver

should sit as far back from the

steering wheel air bag as possi-

ble (at least 250 mm (10 inches)

away). The front passengers

should always move their seats

as far back as possible and sit

back in their seat.

• Air bags inflate instantly in the

event of collision, and passen-

gers may be injured by the air bag

expansion force if they are not in

proper position.

• Air bag inflation may cause

injuries which normally include

facial or bodily abrasions,

injuries from broken glasses or

burns by the air bag inflation

gasses.

Safety features of your vehicle

623

C040902AUN

Noise and smoke

When the air bags inflate, they make a

loud noise and they leave smoke and

powder in the air inside of the vehicle.

This is normal and is a result of the igni-

tion of the air bag inflator. After the air

bag inflates, you may feel substantial dis-

comfort in breathing due to the contact of

your chest with both the seat belt and the

air bag, as well as from breathing the

smoke and powder. Open your doors

and/or windows as soon as possible

after impact in order to reduce dis-

comfort and prevent prolonged expo-

sure to the smoke and powder.

Though smoke and powder are non-

toxic, it may cause irritation to the skin

(eyes, nose and throat, etc). If this is the

case, wash and rinse with cold water

immediately and consult a doctor if the

symptom persists.

C040903AUN

Installing a child restraint on a front

passenger’s seat is forbidden

Never place a rear-facing child restraint

in the front passenger’s seat. If the air

bag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac-

ing child restraint, causing serious or

fatal injury.

In addition, do not place front-facing child

restraints in the front passenger’s seat

either. If the front passenger air bag

inflates, it would cause serious or fatal

injuries to the child.

1JBH3051

WARNING

When the air bags deploy, the air

bag related parts in the steering

wheel and/or instrument panel

and/or in both sides of the roof rails

above the front and rear doors are

very hot. To prevent injury, do not

touch the air bag storage area’s

internal components immediately

after an air bag has inflated.

363

Safety features of your vehicle

C041000AUN

Air bag warning light

The purpose of air bag warning light in

your instrument panel is to alert you of a

potential problem with your air bag -

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).

When the ignition switch is turned ON,

the warning light should illuminate for

approximately 6 seconds, then go off.

Have the system checked if:

• The light does not turn on briefly when

you turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illuminating for

approximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on while the vehicle is

in motion.

WARNING

• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a

rearward facing child restraint on

a seat protected by an air bag in

front of it!

• Never put a child restraint in the

front passenger’s seat. If the front

passenger air bag inflates, it

would cause serious or fatal

injuries.

• When children are seated in the

rear outboard seats of vehicle

equipped with side and/or curtain

air bags, be sure to install the

child restraint system as far away

from the door side as possible,

and securely lock the child

restraint system in position.

Inflation of side and/or curtain air

bags could cause serious injury

or death to an infant or child.

AIR

BAG

Safety features of your vehicle

643

C041100AUN

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-free

and so there are no parts you can safely

service by yourself. If the SRS "AIR BAG"

warning light does not illuminate, or con-

tinuously remains on, have your vehicle

immediately inspected by an authorized

KIA dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such as

removing, installing, repairing, or any

work on the steering wheel must be per-

formed by an authorized KIA dealer.

Improper handling of the SRS system

may result in serious personal injury.

WARNING

• Modification to SRS components

or wiring, including the addition

of any kind of badges to the pad

covers or modifications to the

body structure, can adversely

affect SRS performance and lead

to possible injury.

• For cleaning the air bag pad cov-

ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or

one which has been moistened

with plain water. Solvents or

cleaners could adversely affect

the air bag covers and proper

deployment of the system.

•

No objects should be placed over

or near the air bag modules on the

steering wheel, instrument panel,

and the front passenger's panel

above the glove box, because any

such object could cause harm if the

vehicle is in a crash severe enough

to cause the air bags to inflate.

(Continued)

• If the air bags inflate, they must

be replaced by an authorized KIA

dealer.

• Do not tamper with or disconnect

SRS wiring, or other components

of the SRS system. Doing so

could result in injury, due to acci-

dental inflation of the air bags or

by rendering the SRS inopera-

tive.

• If components of the air bag sys-

tem must be discarded, or if the

vehicle must be scrapped, certain

safety precautions must be

observed. An authorized KIA

dealer knows these precautions

and can give you the necessary

information. Failure to follow

these precautions and proce-

dures could increase the risk of

personal injury.

• If your car was flooded and has

soaked carpeting or water on

flooring, you shouldn't try to start

the engine; have the car towed to

an authorized KIA dealer.

365

Safety features of your vehicle

C041300AUN

Additional safety precautions

•Never let passengers ride in the

cargo area or on top of a folded-

down back seat. All occupants should

sit upright, fully back in their seats with

their seat belts on and their feet on the

floor.

•Passengers should not move out of

or change seats while the vehicle is

moving. A passenger who is not wear-

ing a seat belt during a crash or emer-

gency stop can be thrown against the

inside of the vehicle, against other

occupants, or out of the vehicle.

•Each seat belt is designed to

restrain one occupant. If more than

one person uses the same seat belt,

they could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

•Do not use any accessories on seat

belts. Devices claiming to improve

occupant comfort or reposition the seat

belt can reduce the protection provided

by the seat belt and increase the

chance of serious injury in a crash.

•Passengers should not place hard

or sharp objects between them-

selves and the air bags. Carrying

hard or sharp objects on your lap or in

your mouth can result in injuries if an

air bag inflates.

•Keep occupants away from the air

bag covers. All occupants should sit

upright, fully back in their seats with

their seat belts on and their feet on the

floor. If occupants are too close to the

air bag covers, they could be injured if

the air bags inflate.

•Do not attach or place objects on or

near the air bag covers. Any object

attached to or placed on the front or

side air bag covers could interfere with

the proper operation of the air bags.

•Do not modify the front seats.

Modification of the front seats could

interfere with the operation of the sup-

plemental restraint system sensing

components or side air bags.

•Do not place items under the front

seats. Placing items under the front

seats could interfere with the operation

of the supplemental restraint system

sensing components and wiring har-

nesses.

•Never hold an infant or child on your

lap. The infant or child could be seri-

ously injured or killed in the event of a

crash. All infants and children should

be properly restrained in appropriate

child safety seats or seat belts in the

rear seat.

C041400AUN

Adding equipment to or modify-

ing your air bag-equipped vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by changing

your vehicle's frame, bumper system,

front end or side sheet metal or ride

height, this may affect the operation of

your vehicle's air bag system.

WARNING

• Sitting improperly or out of posi-

tion can cause occupants to be

shifted too close to a deploying

air bag, strike the interior struc-

ture or be thrown from the vehicle

resulting in serious injury or

death.

• Always sit upright with the seat-

back in an upright position, cen-

tered on the seat cushion with

your seat belt on, legs comfort-

ably extended and your feet on

the floor.

Safety features of your vehicle

663

C041200AUN-EC

Air bag warning label

Air bag warning labels, some required by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS), are attached to alert the driv-

er and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.

OUN027118L/OUN026119L/OUN026120

(if equipped)

Keys / 4-3

Remote keyless entry / 4-6

Theft-alarm system / 4-9

Door locks / 4-11

Tailgate / 4-15

Windows / 4-17

Hood / 4-20

Fuel filler lid / 4-22

Sunroof / 4-25

Steering wheel / 4-29

Mirrors / 4-31

Instrument cluster / 4-34

Rear parking assist system / 4-48

Hazard warning flasher / 4-50

Lighting / 4-51

Wipers and washers / 4-54

Interior light / 4-58

Defroster / 4-59

Manual climate control system / 4-61

Automatic climate control system / 4-70

Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-77

Storage compartment / 4-80

Interior features / 4-83

Features of your vehicle

Exterior feature / 4-90

Audio system / 4-92

Features of your vehicle

D010100AUN

Record your key number

The key code number is stamped on the

bar code tag attached to the key set.

Should you lose your keys, this number

will enable an authorized KIA dealer to

duplicate the keys easily. Remove the bar

code tag and store it in a safe place. Also,

record the code number and keep it in a

safe place (not in the vehicle).

D010200AUN

Key operations

Used to start the engine, lock and unlock

the doors.

KEYS

WARNING - Ignition key

Leaving children unattended in a

vehicle with the ignition key is dan-

gerous even if the key is not in the

ignition switch. Children copy

adults and they could place the key

in the ignition switch. The ignition

key would enable children to oper-

ate power windows or other con-

trols, or even make the vehicle

move, which could result in serious

bodily injury or even death. Never

leave the keys in your vehicle with

unsupervised children.

OUN046100L OUN026060

WARNING

Use only KIA original parts for the

ignition key in your vehicle. If an

aftermarket key is used, the ignition

switch may not return to ON after

START. If this happens, the starter

will continue to operate causing

damage to the starter motor and

possible fire due to excessive cur-

rent in the wiring.

Features of your vehicle

D010300CUN-EC

Immobilizer system (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with an elec-

tronic engine immobilizer system to

reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle

use.

Your immobilizer system is comprised of

a small transponder in the ignition key

and electronic devices inside the vehicle.

With the immobilizer system, whenever

you insert your ignition key into the igni-

tion switch and turn it to ON, it checks

and determines and verifies if the ignition

key is valid or not.

If the key is determined to be valid, the

engine will start.

If the key is determined to be invalid, the

engine will not start.

To deactivate the immobilizer sys-

tem:

Insert the ignition key into the key cylin-

der and turn it to the ON position.

To activate the immobilizer system:

Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.

The immobilizer system activates auto-

matically. Without a valid ignition key for

your vehicle, the engine will not start.

✽✽NOTICE

When starting the engine, do not use the

key with other immobilizer keys around.

Otherwise the engine may not start or

may stop soon after it starts. Keep each

key separate in order to avoid a starting

malfunction.

✽✽NOTICE

If you need additional keys or lose your

keys, consult an authorized KIA dealer.

CAUTION

The transponder in your ignition

key is an important part of the

immobilizer system. It is designed

to give years of trouble-free service,

however you should avoid expo-

sure to moisture, static electricity

and rough handling. Immobilizer

system malfunction could occur.

OUN026060L

CAUTION

Do not put metal accessories near

the ignition switch.

The engine may not start for the

metal accessories may interrupt the

transponder signal from normally

transmitting.

WARNING

In order to prevent theft of your

vehicle, do not leave spare keys

anywhere in your vehicle. Your

Immobilizer password is a cus-

tomer unique password and should

be kept confidential. Do not leave

this number anywhere in your vehi-

cle.

Features of your vehicle

This device complies with Industry

Canada standard RSS-210.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

D010301AUN-EC

Limp home (override) procedure

When you turn the ignition switch to the

ON position, if the immobilizer indicator

( ) goes off after blinking 5 times,

your transponder equipped in the ignition

key is out of order. You cannot start the

engine without the lime home procedure.

To start the engine, you have to input

your password by using the ignition

switch.

The following procedure is how to input

your password of “2345” as an example.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion. The immobilizer indicator ( )

will blink 5 times and go off indicating

the beginning of the limp home proce-

dure.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC

position.

3. To enter the first digit (in this example

“2”), turn the ignition switch to the ON

and ACC position twice. Perform the

same procedure for the next digits

between 3 seconds and 10 seconds

(for example, for “3”, turn the ignition

ON and ACC 3 times).

4. If all of the digits have been input suc-

cessfully, you have to start the engine

within 30 seconds. If you attempt to

start the engine after 30 seconds, the

engine will not start and you will have

to input your password again.

After performing the limp home proce-

dure, you have to see an authorized KIA

dealer immediately to inspect and repair

your ignition key or immobilizer system.

CAUTION

Do not change, alter or adjust the

immobilizer system because it

could cause the immobilizer sys-

tem to malfunction and should only

be serviced by an authorized KIA

dealer.

Malfunctions caused by improper

alterations, adjustments or modifi-

cations to the immobilizer system

are not covered by your vehicle

manufacturer warranty.

WARNING

Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user's authority to operate

the equipment.

Features of your vehicle

Remote keyless entry system

operations

D020101AUN-EE

Lock (1)

All doors are locked if the lock button is

pressed.

If all doors are closed, the hazard warn-

ing lights blink once to indicate that all

doors are locked. However, if any door

remains open, the hazard warning lights

will not blink. If all doors are closed after

the lock button is pressed, the hazard

warning lights blink.

D020102AUN-EU

Unlock (2)

Driver's door is unlocked if the unlock

button is pressed once.

The hazard warning lights will blink twice

to indicate that the driver's door is

unlocked.

All doors are unlocked if the unlock but-

ton is pressed twice within 3 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will blink twice

again to indicate that all doors are

unlocked.

After depressing this button, the doors

will be locked automatically unless you

open any door within 30 seconds.

D020104AUN

Tailgate unlock (3)

The tailgate is unlocked if the button is

pressed for more than 0.5 second.

The hazard warning lights will blink twice

to indicate that the tailgate is unlocked.

After depressing this button, the tailgate

will be locked automatically unless you

open the tailgate within 30 seconds.

Also, once the tailgate is opened and

then closed, the tailgate will be locked

automatically.

D020105AUN

Alarm (4)

The horn sounds and hazard warning

lights flash for about 30 seconds if this

button is pressed for more than 0.5 sec-

ond. To stop the horn and lights, press

any button on the transmitter.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

OUN027001

Features of your vehicle

D020200AUN-EC

Transmitter precautions

✽✽NOTICE

The transmitter will not work if any of

following occur:

• The ignition key is in ignition switch.

• You exceed the operating distance

limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).

• The battery in the transmitter is

weak.

• Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.

• The weather is extremely cold.

• The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station or

an airport which can interfere with

normal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not work

correctly, open and close the door with

the ignition key. If you have a problem

with the transmitter, contact an author-

ized KIA dealer.

This device complies with Industry

canada standard RSS-210.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

Keep the transmitter away from

water or any liquid. If the keyless

entry system is inoperative due to

exposure to water or liquids, it will

not be covered by your manufactur-

er vehicle warranty.

WARNING

Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment. If the keyless entry

system is inoperative due to

changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance, it will

not be covered by your manufac-

ture vehicle warranty.

Features of your vehicle

D020300AUN

Battery replacement

Transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium battery

which will normally last for several years.

When replacement is necessary, use the

following procedure.

1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-

tly pry open the transmitter center

cover (1).

2. Replace the battery with new one.

When replacing the battery, make sure

the battery positive “+” symbol faces

down as indicated in the illustration.

3. Install the battery in the reverse order

of removal.

For replacement transmitters, see an

authorized KIA dealer for transmitter

reprogramming.

OUN027003

CAUTION

• The keyless entry system trans-

mitter is designed to give you

years of trouble-free use, howev-

er it can malfunction if exposed to

moisture or static electricity. If

you are unsure how to use your

transmitter or replace the battery,

contact an authorized KIA dealer.

• Using the wrong battery can

cause the transmitter to malfunc-

tion. Be sure to use the correct

battery.

• To avoid damaging the transmit-

ter, don't drop it, get it wet, or

expose it to heat or sunlight.

Features of your vehicle

D030000AUN-EE

This system is designed to provide pro-

tection from unauthorized entry into the

car. This system is operated in three

stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the

second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and

the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-

gered, the system provides an audible

alarm with blinking of the hazard warning

lights.

D030100AUN-EU

Armed stage

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm

the system as described below.

1. Remove the ignition key from the igni-

tion switch and exit the vehicle.

2. Make sure that all doors (and tailgate)

and engine hood are closed and

latched.

3. Lock the doors using the transmitter of

the keyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above, the

hazard warning lights will blink once to

indicate that the system is armed.

If any door (or tailgate) or engine hood

remains open, the hazard warning lights

will not blink and the theft-alarm will not

arm. If all doors (and tailgate) and engine

hood are closed after the lock button is

pressed, the hazard warning lights blink

once.

The system can also be armed by lock-

ing the doors with the key from the front

doors; however, the hazard warning

lights will not blink using this method.

Do not arm the system until all pas-

sengers have left the vehicle. If the

system is armed while a passenger(s)

remains in the vehicle, the alarm may

be activated when the remaining pas-

senger(s) leave the vehicle. If any

door (or tailgate) or engine hood is

opened within 30 seconds after the

system enters the armed stage, the

system is disarmed to prevent an

unnecessary alarm.

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Armed

stage

Theft-alarm

stage

Disarmed

stage

Features of your vehicle

104

D030200AUN-EU

Theft-alarm stage

The alarm will be activated if any of the

following occurs while the system is

armed.

• A front or rear door is opened without

using the ignition key or transmitter.

• The tailgate is opened without using

the transmitter.

• The engine hood is opened.

The siren will sound and the hazard

warning lights will blink continuously for

approximately 30 seconds, and repeat

the alarm 3 times unless the system is

disarmed. To turn off the system, unlock

the doors with the ignition key or trans-

mitter.

D030400AUN-EU

Disarmed stage

The system will be disarmed when the

doors are unlocked by depressing the

unlock button on the transmitter or

unlocked with the ignition key.

After depressing unlock button, the haz-

ard warning lights will blink twice to indi-

cate that the system is disarmed.

After depressing unlock button, if any

door is not opened within 30 seconds,

the system will be rearmed.

✽✽NOTICE - Non-immobilizer

system

• Avoid trying to start the engine while

the alarm is activated. The vehicle

starting motor is disabled during the

theft-alarm stage.

• If you lose your keys, consult your

authorized KIA dealer.

✽✽NOTICE - Immobilizer system

• If the system is not disarmed with the

ignition key or transmitter, insert the

key into the ignition switch and start

the engine. Then the system will be

disarmed.

• If you lose your keys, consult your

authorized KIA dealer.

411

Features of your vehicle

D050100AUN-EU

Operating door locks from out-

side the vehicle

• Turn the key toward the rear of the

vehicle to unlock and toward the front

of the vehicle to lock.

• If you lock the door with a key, all vehi-

cle doors will lock automatically. (if

equipped)

• From the driver’s door, turn the key to

the right once to unlock the driver’s

door and once more within 4 seconds

to unlock all doors.

• From the passenger’s door, turn the

key to the left once to unlock the pas-

senger’s door and once more within 4

seconds to unlock all doors.

• Doors can also be locked and

unlocked with the transmitter key (if

equipped).

• Once the doors are unlocked, they may

be opened by pulling the door handle.

• When closing the door, push the door

by hand. Make sure that doors are

closed securely.

❈If your vehicle is equipped with the

remote keyless entry system, there is

no key lock on the front passenger's

door.

✽✽NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may not work

properly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-

ple times in rapid succession with

either the vehicle key or door lock

switch, the system may stop operating

temporarily in order to protect the

circuit and prevent damage to system

components.

• To lock a door without the key, push the

inside door lock button (1) or central

door lock switch (2) to the “Lock” posi-

tion and close the door (3).

• If you lock the door with the central

door lock switch, all vehicle doors will

lock automatically.

✽✽NOTICE

Always remove the ignition key, engage

the parking brake, close all windows

and lock all doors when leaving your

vehicle unattended.

DOOR LOCKS

OUN026004

Lock

Unlock

OUN026005

Features of your vehicle

124

Operating door locks from inside

the vehicle

D050201AUN-EU

With the door lock button

• To unlock a door, push the door lock

button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The

red mark (2) on button will be visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lock but-

ton (1) to the “Lock” position. If the door

is locked properly, the red mark (2) on

the door lock button will not be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door handle

(3) outward.

• If the inner door handle of driver’s (or

front passenger’s) door is pulled when

the door lock button is in lock position,

the button is unlocked and door opens.

(if equipped)

• Front doors cannot be locked if the

ignition key is in the ignition switch and

any front door is open.

D050202AUN

With central door lock switch

Operate by depressing the central door

lock switch.

OUN026006

Lock

Unlock

WARNING - Door lock mal-

function

If a power door lock ever fails to

function while you are in the vehi-

cle, try one or more of the following

techniques to exit:

• Operate the door unlock feature

repeatedly (both electronic and

manual) while simultaneously

pulling on the door handle.

• Operate the other door locks and

handles, front and rear.

• Lower a front window and use the

key to unlock the door from out-

side.

• Move to the cargo area and open

the tailgate.

OUN026007

OUN026008

Driver’s door

Passenger’s door

413

Features of your vehicle

• When pushing down on the front por-

tion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doors

will lock.

• When pushing down on the rear por-

tion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doors

will unlock.

• If the key is in the ignition switch and

any front door is open, the doors will

not lock when the front portion (1) of

central door lock switch is pressed

WARNING - Unlocked

vehicles

Leaving your vehicle unlocked can

invite theft or possible harm to you

or others from someone hiding in

your vehicle while you are gone.

Always remove the ignition key,

engage the parking brake, close all

windows and lock all doors when

leaving your vehicle unattended.

WARNING - Unattended

children

An enclosed vehicle can become

extremely hot, causing death or

severe injury to unattended chil-

dren or animals who cannot escape

the vehicle. Furthermore, children

might operate features of the vehi-

cle that could injure them, or they

could encounter other harm, possi-

bly from someone gaining entry to

the vehicle. Never leave children or

animals unattended in your vehicle.

WARNING - Doors

• The doors should always be fully

closed and locked while the vehi-

cle is in motion to prevent acci-

dental opening of the door.

Locked doors will also discour-

age potential intruders when the

vehicle stops or slows.

• Be careful when opening doors

and watch for vehicles, motorcy-

cles, bicycles or pedestrians

approaching the vehicle in the

path of the door. Opening a door

when something is approaching

can cause damage or injury.

Features of your vehicle

144

D050300AUN

Impact sensing door unlock sys-

tem (if equipped)

All doors will be automatically unlocked

when the impact is delivered to impact

sensors while the ignition switch ON.

However, the doors may not be unlocked

if mechanical problems occur with the

door lock system or battery.

D050500AUN

Child-protector rear door lock

The child safety lock is provided to help

prevent children from accidentally open-

ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.

The rear door safety locks should be

used whenever children are in the vehi-

cle.

1. Open the rear door.

2. Push the child safety lock located on

the rear edge of the door to the lock

( ) position. When the child safety

lock is in the lock position, the rear

door will not open even though the

inner door handle is pulled.

3. Close the rear door.

To open the rear door, pull the outside

door handle (1).

Even though the doors may be unlocked,

the rear door will not open by pulling the

inner door handle (2) until rear door child

safety lock is unlocked ( ).

WARNING - Rear door

locks

If children accidentally open the

rear doors while the vehicle is in

motion, they could fall out and be

severely injured or killed. To pre-

vent children from opening the rear

doors from the inside, the rear door

safety locks should be used when-

ever children are in the vehicle.

OUN026009

415

Features of your vehicle

D070100AUN

Opening the tailgate

• The tailgate is locked or unlocked

when all doors are locked or unlocked

with the key, transmitter or central door

lock switch.

• Only the tailgate is unlocked if the tail-

gate unlock button on the transmitter is

pressed. Once the tailgate is opened

and then closed, the tailgate is locked

automatically.

• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened

by pressing the handle and pulling it

up.

✽✽NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, door lock and

door mechanisms may not work proper-

ly due to freezing conditions.

D070200AUN

Closing the tailgate

To close the tailgate, lower and push

down the tailgate firmly. Make sure that

the tailgate is securely latched.

TAILGATE

WARNING

The tailgate swings upward. Make

sure no objects or people are near

the rear of the vehicle when open-

ing the tailgate.

CAUTION

Make certain that you close the tail-

gate before driving your vehicle.

Possible damage may occur to the

tailgate lift cylinders and attaching

hardware if the tailgate is not

closed prior to driving.

WARNING - Exhaust

fumes

If you drive with the tailgate open,

you will draw dangerous exhaust

fumes into your vehicle which can

cause serious injury or death to

vehicle occupants.

If you must drive with the tailgate

open, keep the air vents and all

windows open so that additional

outside air comes into the vehicle.

WARNING - Rear cargo

area

Occupants should never ride in the

rear cargo area where no restraints

are available. To avoid injury in the

event of an accident or sudden

stops, occupants should always be

properly restrained.

OUN027015

Features of your vehicle

164

D070300AUN

Emergency tailgate safety release

Your vehicle is equipped with emergency

tailgate safety release lever located on

the bottom of the tailgate. When some-

one is inadvertently locked in the lug-

gage compartment, if the lever is

pushed, the tailgate latch mechanism is

released and the tailgate is opened by

pushing backward.

WARNING

• For emergency, be fully aware of

the location of the emergency

tailgate safety release lever in

this vehicle and how to open the

tailgate if you are accidentally

locked in the luggage compart-

ment.

• No one should be allowed to

occupy the luggage compartment

of the vehicle at any time. The

luggage compartment is a very

dangerous location in the event

of a crash.

• Use the release lever for emer-

gency only. Use extreme caution,

especially while the vehicle is in

motion.

OUN026017

417

Features of your vehicle

D080000AUN

(1) Driver’s door power window switch

(2) Front passenger’s door power win-

dow switch

(3) Rear door (left) power window switch

(4) Rear door (right) power window

switch

(5) Window opening and closing

(6) Automatic power window down

(Driver’s window)

(7) Power window lock switch

✽✽NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, power windows

may not work properly due to freezing

conditions.

WINDOWS

OUN026010

Features of your vehicle

184

D080100AUN

Power windows

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position for power windows to operate.

Each door has a power window switch

that controls the door's window. The driv-

er has a power window lock switch which

can block the operation of passenger

windows. The power windows can be

operated for approximately 30 seconds

after the ignition key is removed or turned

to the ACC or LOCK position. However, if

the front doors are opened, the power

windows cannot be operated within the

30 second period after the ignition key

removal.

✽✽NOTICE

While driving, if you notice buffeting

and pulsation (wind shock) with either

side window open, you should open the

opposite window slightly to reduce the

condition.

D080101AUN

Window opening and closing

The driver’s door has a master power

window switch that controls all the win-

dows in the vehicle.

To open or close a window, press down

or pull up the front portion of the corre-

sponding switch to the first detent posi-

tion (5).

D080102AUN

Auto down window

(Driver’s window)

Depressing the power window switch

momentarily to the second detent posi-

tion (6) completely lowers the driver’s

window even when the switch is

released. To stop the window at the

desired position while the window is in

operation, pull up the switch momentarily

to the opposite direction of the window

movement.

OUN026012 OUN026011

419

Features of your vehicle

D080104AUN

Power window lock button

• The driver can disable the power win-

dow switches on the passenger doors

by depressing the power window lock

switch located on the driver’s door to

LOCK (pressed).

• When the power window lock switch

is ON, the driver’s master control

cannot operate the passenger door

power windows.

OUN026014

CAUTION

• To prevent possible damage to

the power window system, do not

open or close two windows or

more at the same time. This will

also ensure the longevity of the

fuse.

• Never try to operate the main

switch on the driver's door and

the individual door window

switch in opposing directions at

the same time. If this is done, the

window will stop and cannot be

opened or closed.

WARNING - Windows

• NEVER leave the ignition key in

the vehicle.

• NEVER leave any child unattend-

ed in the vehicle. Even very

young children may inadvertently

cause the vehicle to move, entan-

gle themselves in the windows,

or otherwise injure themselves or

others.

• Always double check to make

sure all arms, hands, head and

other obstructions are safely out

of the way before closing a win-

dow.

• Do not allow children to play with

the power windows. Keep the dri-

ver’s door power window lock

switch in the LOCK position

(depressed). Serious injury can

result from unintentional window

operation by the child.

• Do not extend face or arms out-

side through the window opening

while driving.

Features of your vehicle

204

D090100AUN

Opening the hood

1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the

hood. The hood should pop open

slightly.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the

hood slightly, pull the secondary latch

(1) inside of the hood center and lift

the hood (2).

3.Pull the support rod from the hood.

4.Hold the hood open with the support

rod.

HOOD

OUN026022

WARNING - Hot parts

Grasp the support rod in the area

wrapped in rubber. The rubber will

help prevent you from being burned

by hot metal when the engine is

hot.

OUN026023L OUN028024

421

Features of your vehicle

D090200AUN

Closing the hood

1. Before closing the hood, check the fol-

lowing:

• All filler caps in engine compartment

must be correctly installed.

• Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must be removed

from the engine compartment.

2. Return the support rod to its clip to

prevent it from rattling.

3. Lower the hood until it is about 30 cm

(1 ft.) above the closed position and let

it drop. Make sure that it locks into

place.

WARNING

• Before closing the hood, ensure

that all obstructions are removed

from the hood opening. Closing

the hood with an obstruction

present in the hood opening may

result in property damage or

severe personal injury.

• Do not leave gloves, rags or any

other combustible material in the

engine compartment. Doing so

may cause a heat-induced fire.

WARNING

• Always double check to be sure

that the hood is firmly latched

before driving away. If it is not

latched, the hood could open

while the vehicle is being driven,

causing a total loss of visibility,

which might result in an accident.

• The support rod must be inserted

completely into the hole provided

in the hood whenever you inspect

the engine compartment. This will

prevent the hood from falling and

possibly injuring you.

• Do not move the vehicle with the

hood in the raised position, as

vision is obstructed and the hood

could fall or be damaged.

Features of your vehicle

224

D100100AUN

Opening the fuel filler lid

The fuel filler lid must be opened from

inside the vehicle by pushing the fuel

filler lid opener button located on the dri-

ver’s door.

✽✽NOTICE

If the fuel filler lid will not open because

ice has formed around it, tap lightly or

push on the lid to break the ice and

release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If

necessary, spray around the lid with an

approved de-icer fluid (do not use radi-

ator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a

warm place and allow the ice to melt.

1. Stop the engine.

2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the fuel

filler lid opener button.

3. Pull the fuel filler lid (1) out to fully

open.

4. To remove the cap (2), turn the fuel

tank cap counterclockwise.

5. Refuel as needed.

D100200AUN

Closing the fuel filler lid

1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until

it “clicks”. This indicates that the cap is

securely tightened.

2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it light-

ly and make sure that it is securely

closed.

D100300AUN-EC

FUEL FILLER LID

OUN026019 OUN026020 WARNING - Refueling

• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it

can cover your clothes or skin

and thus subject you to the risk

of fire and burns. Always remove

the fuel cap carefully and slowly.

If the cap is venting fuel or if you

hear a hissing sound, wait until

the condition stops before com-

pletely removing the cap.

• Do not "top off" after the nozzle

automatically shuts off when

refueling.

• Tighten the cap until it clicks, oth-

erwise the Check Engine light

will illuminate.

• Always check that the fuel cap is

installed securely to prevent fuel

spillage in the event of an acci-

dent.

423

Features of your vehicle

(Continued)

Use only approved portable plas-

tic fuel containers designed to

carry and store gasoline.

• Do not use cellular phones while

refueling. Electric current and/or

electronic interference from cel-

lular phones can potentially

ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

• When refueling, always shut the

engine off. Sparks produced by

electrical components related to

the engine can ignite fuel vapors

causing a fire. Once refueling is

complete, check to make sure the

filler cap and filler door are

securely closed, before starting

the engine.

• DO NOT use matches or a lighter

and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit

cigarette in your vehicle while at

a gas station especially during

refueling. Automotive fuel is

highly flammable and can, when

ignited, result in fire.

(Continued)

• Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refueling

since you can generate static

electricity by touching, rubbing

or sliding against any item or fab-

ric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)

capable of producing static elec-

tricity. Static electricity discharge

can ignite fuel vapors resulting in

rapid burning. If you must re-

enter the vehicle, you should

once again eliminate potentially

dangerous static electricity dis-

charge by touching a metal part

of the vehicle, away from the fuel

filler neck, nozzle or other gaso-

line source.

• When using an approved

portable fuel container, be sure to

place the container on the

ground prior to refueling. Static

electricity discharge from the

container can ignite fuel vapors

causing a fire. Once refueling has

begun, contact with the vehicle

should be maintained until the

filling is complete.

(Continued)

WARNING - Refueling dan-

gers

Automotive fuels are flammable

materials. When refueling, please

note the following guidelines care-

fully. Failure to follow these guide-

lines may result in severe personal

injury, severe burns or death by fire

or explosion.

• Read and follow all warning at the

gas station facility.

• Before refueling note the location

of the Emergency Gasoline Shut-

Off, if available, at the gas station

facility.

• Before touching the fuel nozzle,

you should eliminate potentially

dangerous static electricity dis-

charge by touching another metal

part of the vehicle, a safe dis-

tance away from the fuel filler

neck, nozzle, or other gas source.

(Continued)

Features of your vehicle

244

D100500AUN

Emergency fuel filer lid release

If the fuel filler lid does not open using

the remote fuel filler lid release, you can

open it manually. Unsnap and remove the

panel in the cargo area. Pull the handle

outward slightly. (if equipped)

(Continued)

• If a fire breaks out during refuel-

ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi-

cle, and immediately contact the

manager of the gas station and

then contact the local fire depart-

ment. Follow any safety instruc-

tions they provide.

CAUTION

• Make sure to refuel with unleaded

fuel only.

• If the fuel filler cap requires

replacement, use only a genuine

KIA cap or the equivalent speci-

fied for your vehicle. An incorrect

fuel filler cap can result in a seri-

ous malfunction of the fuel sys-

tem or emission control system.

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Any type

of fuel spilled on painted surfaces

may damage the paint.

• After refueling, make sure the fuel

cap is installed securely to pre-

vent fuel spillage in the event of

an accident.

CAUTION

Do not pull the handle excessively,

otherwise the luggage area trim or

release handle may be damaged.

OUN026021

425

Features of your vehicle

D110000AUN

If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,

you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the

sunroof control buttons located on the

overhead console.

(1) Slide button

(2) Tilt button

(3) Close button

The sunroof can only be opened, closed,

or tilted when the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

✽✽NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof

may not work properly due to freez-

ing conditions.

• After washing the car or after there is

rain, be sure to wipe off any water

that is on the sunroof before operating

it.

✽✽NOTICE

The sunroof cannot slide when it is in

the tilt position nor can it be tilted while

in an open or slide position.

SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

OUN026025

CAUTION

Do not continue to press the sun-

roof control button(s) after the sun-

roof is in the fully open, closed, or

tilt position(s). Damage to the motor

or system components could occur.

WARNING

Never adjust the sunshade while

driving. This could result in loss of

control and an accident that may

cause death, serious injury, or

property damage.

Features of your vehicle

264

D110100AUN

Sliding the sunroof

To open the sunroof (autoslide feature),

press the slide button (1) on the over-

head console for more than 0.5 second.

The sunroof will slide all the way open. To

stop the sunroof sliding at any point,

press any sunroof control button.

To close the sunroof (autoslide feature),

press the close button (3) on the over-

head console for more than 0.5 second.

The sunroof will slide all the way close.To

stop the sunroof sliding at any point,

press any sunroof control button.

D110101AUN

Automatic reversal

If an object or part of the body is detect-

ed while the sunroof is closing automati-

cally, it will reverse direction, and then

stop.

Auto reverse function does not work if a

tiny obstacle is between the sliding glass

and the sunroof sash. You should always

check that all passengers and objects

are away from the sunroof before closing

it.

D110200AUN

Tilting the sunroof

To open the sunroof (autotilt feature),

press the tilt button (2) on the overhead

console for more than 0.5 second.

The sunroof will tilt all the way open. To

stop the sunroof tilting at any point, press

any sunroof control button.

To close the sunroof, press the close but-

ton (3) on the overhead console and hold

it until the sunroof is closed.

OUN026026 OUN026027 OUN027028

427

Features of your vehicle

D110300AUN

Sunshade

The sunshade will be opened with the

glass panel automatically when the glass

panel is slid. Close it manually if you want

it closed.

D110400AUN

In case of an emergency

If the sunroof does not open electrically:

1. Open the map lamp cover.

WARNING - Sunroof

• Be careful that someone’s head,

hands and body are not trapped

by a closing sunroof.

• Do not extend face, neck, arms or

body outside through the sunroof

opening while driving.

• Make sure hand and face are

safely out of the way before clos-

ing a sunroof.

CAUTION

• Periodically remove any dirt that

may accumulate on the guide rail.

• If you try to open the sunroof

when the temperature is below

freezing or when the sunroof is

covered with snow or ice, the

glass or the motor could be dam-

aged.

• The sunroof is made to slide

together with sunshade. Do not

leave the sunshade closed while

the sunroof is open.

OUN026029OUN026031

Features of your vehicle

284

2. Insert the emergency handle (provided

with the vehicle) and turn the handle

clockwise to open or counterclockwise

to close.

D110500AUN

Resetting the sunroof

Whenever the vehicle battery is discon-

nected or discharged, or you use the

emergency handle to operate the sun-

roof, you must reset your sunroof system

as follows:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position.

2. According to the position of the sun-

roof, do the following.

1) in case the sunroof has closed

completely or been tilted:

Press the tilt button until the sun-

roof tilts completely upward.

2) in case the sunroof has slide-

opened:

Press and hold the close button

(for more than 5 seconds) until the

sunroof closes completely. Press

the tilt button until the sunroof tilts

completely upward.

3. Release the tilt button.

4. Press and hold the tilt button (for

more than 10 seconds) until the sun-

roof has returned to the original posi-

tion of tilt after it is raised a little high-

er than the maximum tilt position.

Then, release the button.

5. Press and hold the tilt button (for

more than 5 seconds) until the sun-

roof is operated as follows;

TILT DOWN →SLIDE OPEN →

SLIDE CLOSE

Then, release the button.

When this is complete, the sunroof sys-

tem is reset.

OUN026030

429

Features of your vehicle

D130100AUN

Power steering

Power steering uses energy from the

engine to assist you in steering the vehi-

cle. If the engine is off or if the power

steering system becomes inoperative,

the vehicle may still be steered, but it will

require increased steering effort.

Should you notice any change in the

effort required to steer during normal

vehicle operation, have the power steer-

ing checked by an authorized KIA dealer.

✽✽NOTICE

If the power steering drive belt breaks

or if the power steering pump malfunc-

tions, the steering effort will greatly

increase.

✽✽NOTICE

If the vehicle is parked for extended

periods outside in cold weather (below -

10°C/14°F), the power steering may

require increased effort when the engine

is first started. This is caused by

increased fluid viscosity due to the cold

weather and does not indicate a mal-

function.

When this happens, increase the engine

RPM by depressing accelerator until the

RPM reaches 1,500 rpm then release or

let the engine idle for two or three min-

utes to warm up the fluid.

D130300AUN

Tilt steering

Tilt steering allows you to adjust the

steering wheel before you drive. You can

also raise it to give your legs more room

when you exit and enter the vehicle.

The steering wheel should be positioned

so that it is comfortable for you to drive,

while permitting you to see the instru-

ment panel warning lights and gauges.

STEERING WHEEL

CAUTION

Never hold the steering wheel

against a stop (extreme right or left

turn) for more than 5 seconds with

the engine running. Holding the

steering wheel for more than 5 sec-

onds in either position may cause

damage to the power steering

pump.

WARNING

• Never adjust the angle of the

steering wheel while driving. You

may lose steering control and

cause severe personal injury,

death or accidents.

• After adjusting, push the steering

wheel both up and down to be

certain it is locked in position.

Features of your vehicle

304

To change the steering wheel angle, pull

down the lock-release lever (1), adjust

the steering wheel to the desired angle

(2), then pull up the lock-release lever to

lock the steering wheel in place. Be sure

to adjust the steering wheel to the

desired position before driving.

D130500AUN

Horn

To sound the horn, press the horn sym-

bol on your steering wheel.

Check the horn regularly to be sure it

operates properly.

✽✽NOTICE

To sound the horn, press the area indi-

cated by the horn symbol on your steer-

ing wheel (see illustration). The horn

will operate only when this area is

pressed.

OUN026123

CAUTION

Do not strike the horn severely to

operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do

not press on the horn with a sharp-

pointed object.

OUN026124

431

Features of your vehicle

D140100AUN

Inside rearview mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror to center on

the view through the rear window. Make

this adjustment before you start driving.

D140101AUN

Day/night rearview mirror

Make this adjustment before you start

driving and while the day/night lever is in

the day position.

Pull the day/night lever toward you to

reduce glare from the headlights of vehi-

cles behind you during night driving.

Remember that you lose some rearview

clarity in the night position.

D140200AUN-EU

Outside rearview mirror

Be sure to adjust mirror angles before

driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both left-

hand and right-hand outside rearview

mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted

remotely with the remote switch. The mir-

ror heads can be folded back to prevent

damage during an automatic car wash or

when passing in a narrow street.

MIRRORS

WARNING - Rear visibility

Do not place objects in the rear

seat or cargo area which would

interfere with your vision through

the rear window.

OUN026125

Day

Night

Features of your vehicle

324

D140201AUN

Remote control

The electric remote control mirror switch

allows you to adjust the position of the

left and right outside rearview mirrors. To

adjust the position of either mirror, move

the lever (1) to R or L to select the right

side mirror or the left side mirror, then

press a corresponding point on the mirror

adjustment control to position the select-

ed mirror up, down, left or right.

After adjustment, put the lever into neu-

tral (center) position to prevent the inad-

vertent adjustment.

WARNING - Rearview mir-

rors

• The right outside rearview mirror

is convex. Objects seen in the

mirror are closer than they

appear.

• Use your interior rearview mirror

or direct observation to deter-

mine the actual distance of fol-

lowing vehicles when changing

lanes.

CAUTION

Do not scrape ice off the mirror

face; this may damage the surface

of the glass. If ice should restrict

movement of the mirror, do not

force the mirror for adjustment. To

remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a

sponge or soft cloth with very warm

water.

CAUTION

If the mirror is jammed with ice, do

not adjust the mirror by force. Use

an approved spray de-icer (not radi-

ator antifreeze) to release the

frozen mechanism or move the

vehicle to a warm place and allow

the ice to melt.

WARNING

Do not adjust or fold the outside

rearview mirrors while the vehicle

is moving. This could result in loss

of control, and an accident which

could cause death, serious injury

or property damage.

OUN026128

433

Features of your vehicle

D140202AUN-EU

Folding the outside rearview mirror

To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp the

housing of mirror and then fold it toward

the rear of the vehicle.

CAUTION

• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximum adjust-

ing angles, but the motor contin-

ues to operate while the switch is

depressed. Do not depress the

switch longer than necessary, the

motor may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the out-

side rearview mirror by hand.

Doing so may damage the parts.

OUN026130

Features of your vehicle

344

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1. Tachometer

2. Turn signal indicators

3. Speedometer

4. Engine temperature gauge

5. Warning and indicator lights

6. Shift position indicator

7. Odometer/Trip computer*

8. Fuel gauge

* : if equipped

OUN026201C

D150000AUN

2 2

435

Features of your vehicle

D150100AUN

Instrument panel illumination

When the vehicle’s parking lights or head-

lights are on, rotate the illumination con-

trol knob to adjust the instrument panel

illumination intensity.

Gauges

D150201AUN-EC

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the forward

speed of the vehicle.

The speedometer is calibrated in kilome-

ters and/or miles per hour per hour.

D150202AUN

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates the approxi-

mate number of engine revolutions per

minute (rpm).

Use the tachometer to select the correct

shift points and to prevent lugging and/or

over-revving the engine.

When the door is open, or if the engine is

not started within 1 minute, the tachome-

ter pointer may move slightly in ON posi-

tion with the engine OFF. This movement

is normal and will not affect the accuracy

of the tachometer once the engine is run-

ning.

OUN026203

OUN027202G

OUN047200L

Features of your vehicle

364

D150203AUN

Engine temperature gauge

This gauge shows the temperature of the

engine coolant when the ignition switch

is ON.

Do not continue driving with an overheat-

ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer

to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.

OUN026205

CAUTION

If the gauge pointer moves beyond

the normal range area toward the

“H” position, it indicates overheat-

ing that may damage the engine.

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap

when the engine is hot. The engine

coolant is under pressure and

could cause severe burns. Wait

until the engine is cool before

adding coolant to the reservoir.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine within

the tachometer's RED ZONE.

This may cause severe engine dam-

age.

437

Features of your vehicle

D150204AUN

Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-

mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel

tank.

The fuel tank capacity is given in sec-

tion 9.

The fuel gauge is supplemented by

a low fuel warning light, which will illumi-

nate when the fuel tank is near empty.

On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge

pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel

warning light may come on earlier than

usual due to the movement of fuel in the

tank.

D150205AUN

Odometer/Tripmeter (if equipped)

Odometer

The odometer indicates the total dis-

tance the vehicle has been driven.

You will also find the odometer useful to

determine when periodic maintenance

should be performed.

✽✽NOTICE

It is forbidden that alteration of the

odometer of any vehicle with the intent

to change the mileage registered on the

odometer. The alteration may void your

warranty coverage.

OUN026206G

WARNING - Fuel gauge

Running out of fuel can expose

vehicle occupants to danger.

You must stop and obtain addition-

al fuel as soon as possible after the

warning light comes on or when the

gauge indicator comes close to the

E level.

OUN026243C

Features of your vehicle

384

Tripmeter

TRIP A: Tripmeter A

TRIP B: Tripmeter B

The tripmeter indicates the distance of

individual trips selected by the driver.

Tripmeter A or B can be reset to 0 by

pressing the TRIP button for 1 second or

more, and then releasing.

Tripmeter A or B can be selected by

pressing the TRIP button for less than 1

second.

D150206AUN-EE

Trip computer (if equipped)

The trip computer is a microcomputer-

controlled driver information system that

displays information related to driving,

including odometer, tripmeter, driving

time, average speed, average fuel con-

sumption and distance to empty on the

display when the ignition switch is in the

ON position. All stored driving informa-

tion (except odometer) is reset if the bat-

tery is disconnected.

OUN026208L OUN026209 OUN026209

439

Features of your vehicle

The odometer is always displayed until

the display is turned off.

Push the TRIP button for less than 1 sec-

ond to select tripmeter, driving time,

average speed, average fuel consump-

tion or distance to empty function as fol-

lows:

Odometer

The odometer indicates the total dis-

tance the vehicle has been driven.

You will also find the odometer useful to

determine when periodic maintenance

should be performed.

Tripmeter

TRIP A : Tripmeter A

TRIP B : Tripmeter B

This mode indicates the distance of indi-

vidual trips selected since the last trip-

meter reset.

The meter's working range is from 0.0 to

999.9 km.

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1

second, when the tripmeter (TRIP A or

TRIP B) is being displayed, clears the

tripmeter to zero (0.0).

OUN026207L

Tripmeter B

Average speed

Average fuel consumption

Distance to empty

Tripmeter A

Driving time

OUN026210L

Features of your vehicle

404

Driving time

This mode indicates the total time trav-

eled since the last driving time reset.

Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the

driving time keeps going while the engine

is running.

The meter’s working range is from

0:00~99:59.

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1

second, when the driving time is being

displayed, clears the driving time to zero

(0:00).

Average speed

This mode calculates the average speed

of the vehicle since the last average

speed reset.

Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the

average speed keeps going while the

engine is running.

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1

second, when the average speed is

being displayed, clears the average

speed to zero (----).

Average fuel consumption

This mode calculates the average fuel

consumption from the total fuel used and

the distance since the last average con-

sumption reset. The total fuel used is cal-

culated from the fuel consumption input.

For an accurate calculation, drive more

than 50 m.

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1

second, when the average fuel consump-

tion is being displayed, clears the aver-

age fuel consumption to zero (----).

OUN026212COUN026211L OUN026214C

441

Features of your vehicle

Distance to empty

This mode indicates the estimated dis-

tance to empty based on the current fuel

in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel

delivered to the engine.

When the remaining distance is below 50

km, “----” will be displayed and the dis-

tance to empty indicator will blink.

The meter’s working range is from 50 to

999 km.

✽✽NOTICE

• If the vehicle is not on level ground or

the battery power has been interrupt-

ed, the “Distance to empty” function

may not operate correctly.

The trip computer may not register

additional fuel if less than 6 liters (1.6

gallons) of fuel are added to the vehi-

cle.

• The fuel consumption and distance to

empty values may vary significantly

based on driving conditions, driving

habits, and condition of the vehicle.

• The distance to empty value is an esti-

mate of the available driving distance.

This value may differ from the actual

driving distance available.

D150300AUN

Warnings and indicators

All warning lights are checked by turning

the ignition switch ON (do not start the

engine). Any light that does not illuminate

should be checked by an authorized KIA

dealer.

After starting the engine, check to make

sure that all warning lights are off. If any

are still on, this indicates a situation that

needs attention. When releasing the

parking brake, the brake system warning

light should go off. The fuel warning light

will stay on if the fuel level is low.

OUN026213C

Features of your vehicle

424

D150302AUN

Air bag warning light

This warning light will illuminate for

approximately 6 seconds each time you

turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

This light also comes on when the

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is

not working properly. If the AIR BAG

warning light does not come on, or con-

tinuously remains on after operating for

about 6 seconds when you turned the

ignition switch to the ON position or start-

ed the engine, or if it comes on while

driving, have the SRS inspected by an

authorized KIA dealer.

D150303AUN

Anti-lock brake system

(ABS) warning light

(if equipped)

This light illuminates if the ignition switch

is turned to ON and goes off in approxi-

mately 3 seconds if the system is operat-

ing normally.

If the ABS warning light remains on,

comes on while driving, or does not

come on when the ignition switch is

turned to the ON position, this indicates

that there may be a malfunction with the

ABS.

If this occurs, have your vehicle checked

by an authorized KIA dealer as soon as

possible. The normal braking system will

still be operational, but without the assis-

tance of the anti-lock brake system.

Electronic brake force distri-

bution (EBD) system warning

light

If two warning lights illumi-

nate at the same time while

driving, your vehicle may

have a malfunction with ABS

and EBD system.

In this case, your ABS and regular brake

system may not work normally. Have the

vehicle checked by an authorized KIA

dealer as soon as possible.

AIR

BAG

WARNING

If the both ABS and Brake warning

lights are on and stay on, your vehi-

cle’s brake system will not work

normally. So you may experience

an unexpected and dangerous situ-

ation during sudden braking. In this

case, avoid high speed driving and

abrupt braking. Have your vehicle

checked by an authorized KIA deal-

er as soon as possible.

443

Features of your vehicle

D150304AUN-EU

Seat belt warning

Driver's seat belt warning

As a reminder to the driver, the driver's

seat belt warning light will blink for

approximately 6 seconds each time you

turn the ignition switch ON regardless of

belt fastening. If the driver's seat belt is

not fastened when the ignition switch is

turned ON or if it is disconnected after

the ignition switch is turn ON, the driver's

seat belt warning light will blink for

approximately 6 seconds and the seat

belt warning chime will sound for approx-

imately 6 seconds until the belt is fas-

tened. If the driver's seat belt is not fas-

tened for 36 seconds after starting the

engine, the driver's seat belt warning

light and chime will operate at most 11

times with a pattern of 6 seconds on and

24 seconds off or until the belt is fas-

tened.

Front passenger's seat belt warning

As a reminder to the front passenger, the

front passenger's seat belt warning light

will blink for approximately 6 seconds

each time you turn the ignition switch ON

regardless of belt fastening. If the pas-

senger's seat belt is unfastened when

the vehicle speed exceeds 5 km/h (3

mph), the passenger's seat belt warning

light will blink for at least 6 seconds or

until the belt is fastened.

✽✽NOTICE

• You can find the front passenger’s

seat belt warning light on the center

fascia panel.

• Although the front passenger seat is

not occupied, the seat belt warning

light will blink for 6 seconds.

• The front passenger's seat belt warn-

ing can be operated when luggage is

placed on the front passenger seat.

D150305AUN

Turn signal indicator lights

The blinking green arrows on the instru-

ment panel show the direction indicated

by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on

but does not blink, blinks more rapidly

than normal, or does not illuminate at all,

a malfunction in the turn signal system is

indicated. Your dealer should be consult-

ed for repairs.

D150306AUN

High beam indicator

This indicator illuminates when the head-

lights are on and in the high beam posi-

tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled

into the Flash-to-Pass position.

Features of your vehicle

444

D150307AUN

Engine oil pressure

warning

This warning light indicates the engine oil

pressure is low.

If the warning light illuminates while driv-

ing:

1. Drive safely to the side of the road and

stop.

2. With the engine off, check the engine

oil level. If the level is low, add oil as

required.

If the warning light remains on after

adding oil or if oil is not available, call an

authorized KIA dealer.

D150308AUN-EU

Parking brake & brake fluid

warning

Parking brake warning

This light is illuminated when the parking

brake is applied with the ignition switch in

the START or ON position. The warning

light should go off when the parking

brake is released while engine is run-

ning.

Low brake fluid level warning

If the warning light remains on, it may

indicate that the brake fluid level in the

reservoir is low.

If the warning light remains on:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2. With the engine stopped, check the

brake fluid level immediately and add

fluid as required. Then check all brake

components for fluid leaks.

3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are

found, the warning light remains on or

the brakes do not operate properly.

Have the vehicle towed to any author-

ized KIA dealer for a brake system

inspection and necessary repairs.

CAUTION

If the engine is not stopped imme-

diately after the engine oil pressure

warning light is illuminated, severe

damage could result.

CAUTION

If the oil pressure warning light

stays on while the engine is run-

ning, serious engine damage may

result. The oil pressure warning

light comes on whenever there is

insufficient oil pressure. In normal

operation, it should come on when

the ignition switch is turned on,

then go out when the engine is

started. If the oil pressure warning

light stays on while the engine is

running, there is a serious malfunc-

tion.

If this happens, stop the car as

soon as it is safe to do so, turn off

the engine and check the oil level. If

the oil level is low, fill the engine oil

to the proper level and start the

engine again. If the light stays on

with the engine running, turn the

engine off immediately. In any

instance where the oil light stays on

when the engine is running, the

engine should be checked by an

authorized KIA dealer before the

car is driven again.

445

Features of your vehicle

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diago-

nal braking systems. This means you still

have braking on two wheels even if one

of the dual systems should fail. With only

one of the dual systems working, more

than normal pedal travel and greater

pedal pressure are required to stop the

car. Also, the car will not stop in as short

a distance with only a portion of the

brake system working. If the brakes fail

while you are driving, shift to a lower gear

for additional engine braking and stop the

car as soon as it is safe to do so.

To check bulb operation, check whether

the parking brake and brake fluid warning

light illuminates when the ignition switch

is in the ON position.

D150309AUN

Front fog light indicator

(if equipped)

This light comes on when the front fog

lights are ON.

D150312AUN

Shift pattern indicator

The indicator displays to show the auto-

matic transaxle shift lever selection.

D150313AUN

Charging system warning

This warning light indicates a malfunction

of either the generator or electrical charg-

ing system.

If the warning light comes on while the

vehicle is in motion:

1. Drive to the nearest safe location.

2. With the engine off, check the generator

drive belt for looseness or breakage.

3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-

lem exists somewhere in the electrical

charging system. Have an authorized

KIA dealer correct the problem as soon

as possible.

D150315AUN

Tailgate open warning light

This warning light illuminates when the

tailgate is not closed securely with the

ignition switch in any position.

D150316AUN

Door ajar warning light

This warning light illuminates when a

door is not closed securely with the igni-

tion switch in any position.

D150317AUN

Immobilizer indicator

(if equipped)

This light illuminates when the immobiliz-

er key is inserted and turned to the ON

position to start the engine.

At this time, you can start the engine. The

light goes out after the engine is running.

If this light blinks when the ignition switch

is in the ON position before starting the

engine, have the system checked by an

authorized KIA dealer.

WARNING

Driving the vehicle with a warning

light on is dangerous. If the brake

warning light remains on, have the

brakes checked and repaired imme-

diately by an authorized KIA dealer.

Features of your vehicle

464

D150318AUN

Low fuel level warning

This warning light indicates the fuel tank

is nearly empty. When it comes on, you

should add fuel as soon as possible.

Driving with the fuel level warning light on

or with the fuel level below “E” can cause

the engine to misfire and damage the

catalytic converter.

D150319AUN

Low washer fluid level

warning indicator

(if equipped)

This warning light indicates the washer

fluid reservoir is near empty. Refill the

washer fluid as soon as possible.

D150320AUN-EU

Malfunction indicator lamp

(MIL) (check engine light)

This indicator light is part of the Engine

Control System which monitors various

emission control system components. If

this light illuminates while driving, it indi-

cates that a potential malfunction has

been detected somewhere in the emis-

sion control system.

This light will also illuminate when the

ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-

tion, and will go out in a few seconds

after the engine is started. If it illuminates

while driving, or does not illuminate when

the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position, take your vehicle to your near-

est authorized KIA dealer and have the

system checked.

Generally, your vehicle will continue to be

drivable, but have the system checked by

an authorized KIA dealer promptly.

CHECK

CAUTION

• Prolonged driving with the

Emission Control System

Malfunction Indicator Light

illuminated may cause damage to

the emission control systems

which could effect drivability

and/or fuel economy.

•

If the

Emission

Control System

Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-

nates, potential catalytic convert-

er damage is possible which

could result in loss of engine

power. Have the Engine Control

System inspected as soon as pos-

sible by an authorized KIA dealer.

447

Features of your vehicle

D150323AUN-EU

ESC indicator (Electronic

Stability Control)

(if equipped)

The ESC indicator will illuminate when

the ignition switch is turned ON, but

should go off after approximately 3 sec-

onds. When the ESC is on, it monitors

the driving conditions and under normal

driving conditions, the ESC light will

remain off. When a slippery or low trac-

tion condition is encountered, the ESC

will operate, and the ESC indicator will

blink to indicate the ESC is operating.

D150324AUN-EU

ESC OFF indicator

(if equipped)

The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned ON,

but should go off after approximately 3

seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode,

press the ESC OFF button. The ESC

OFF indicator will illuminate indicating

the ESC is deactivated. If this indicator

stays on when ESC OFF is not selected,

the ESC may have a malfunction. Take

your car to an authorized KIA dealer and

have the system checked.

D150325AUN

Cruise indicator (if equipped)

CRUISE indicator

The indicator light illuminates when the

cruise control system is enabled.

The cruise indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster is illuminated when the

cruise control ON-OFF button on the

steering wheel is pulled.

The indicator light turns off when the

cruise control ON-OFF button is pulled

again. For more information about the

use of cruise control, refer to “Cruise

control system” in section 5.

Cruise SET indicator

The indicator light illuminates when the

cruise function switch (COAST/SET or

RES/ACCEL) is ON.

The cruise SET indicator light in the

instrument cluster is illuminated when

the cruise control switch (COAST/SET or

RES/ACCEL) is pushed.

The cruise SET indicator light does not

illuminate when the cruise control switch

(CANCEL) is pushed or the system is

disengaged.

D150327AUN

Key reminder warning chime

(if equipped)

If the driver’s door is opened while the

ignition key is left in the ignition switch

(ACC or LOCK position), the key

reminder warning chime will sound. This

is to prevent you from locking your keys

in the vehicle. The chime sounds until the

key is removed from the ignition switch or

the driver’s door is closed.

ESC

OFF

CRUISE

SET

Features of your vehicle

484

D170000AEN

The rear parking assist system assists

the driver during backward movement of

the vehicle by chiming if any object is

sensed within a distance of 120 cm (47

in.) behind the vehicle. This system is a

supplemental system and it is not intend-

ed to nor does it replace the need for

extreme care and attention of the driver.

The sensing range and objects

detectable by the back sensors are limit-

ed. Whenever backing-up, pay as much

attention to what is behind you as you

would in a vehicle without a rear parking

assist system .

Operation of the rear parking

assist system

D170101AEN

Operating condition

• This system will activate when backing

up with the ignition switch ON.

If the vehicle is moving at a speed over

5 km/h (3 mph), the system may not be

activated correctly.

• The sensing distance while the rear

parking assist system is in operation is

approximately 120 cm (47 in.).

• When more than two objects are

sensed at the same time, the closest

one will be recognized first.

D170102AUN

Types of warning sound

• When an object is 120 cm to 81 cm (47

in. to 32 in.) from the rear bumper:

Buzzer beeps intermittently

• When an object is 80 cm to 41 cm (31

in. to 16 in.) from the rear bumper:

Buzzer beeps more frequently

• When an object is within 40 cm (15 in.)

of the rear bumper:

Buzzer sounds continuously.

REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING

The rear parking assist system is a

supplementary function only. The

operation of the rear parking assist

system can be affected by several

factors (including environmental

conditions). It is the responsibility

of the driver to always check the

area behind the vehicle before and

while backing up.

OUN027122

Rear parking assist system

449

Features of your vehicle

D170200AEN

Non-operational conditions of

rear parking assist system

The rear parking assist system may

not operate properly when:

1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will

operate normally when the moisture

has been cleared.)

2. The sensor is covered with foreign

matter, such as snow or water, or the

sensor cover is blocked. (It will operate

normally when the material is removed

or the sensor is no longer blocked.)

3. Driving on uneven road surfaces

(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradi-

ent).

4. Objects generating excessive noise

(vehicle horns, loud motorcycle

engines, or truck air brakes) are within

range of the sensor.

5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.

6. Wireless transmitters or mobile phones

are within range of the sensor.

7. The sensor is covered with snow.

8. Trailer towing.

The detecting range may decrease

when:

1. The sensor is stained with foreign mat-

ter such as snow or water. (The sens-

ing range will return to normal when

removed.)

2. Outside air temperature is extremely

hot or cold.

The following objects may not be rec-

ognized by the sensor:

1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,

chains or small poles.

2. Objects which tend to absorb the sen-

sor frequency such as clothes, spongy

material or snow.

3. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m

(40 in.) and narrower than 14 cm (6 in.)

in diameter.

D170300AEN

Rear parking assist system pre-

cautions

• The rear parking assist system may

not sound sequentially depending on

the speed and shapes of the objects

detected.

• The rear parking assist system may

malfunction if the vehicle bumper

height or sensor installation has been

modified or damaged. Any non-factory

installed equipment or accessories

may also interfere with the sensor per-

formance.

• The sensor may not recognize objects

less than 40 cm (15 in.) from the sen-

sor, or it may sense an incorrect dis-

tance. Use caution.

• When the sensor is frozen or stained

with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor

may be inoperative until the stains are

removed using a soft cloth.

• Do not push, scratch or strike the sen-

sor. Sensor damage could occur.

Features of your vehicle

504

✽✽NOTICE

This system can only sense objects with-

in the range and location of the sensors;

It can not detect objects in other areas

where sensors are not installed. Also,

small or slim objects, such as poles or

objects located between sensors may not

be detected by the sensors.

Always visually check behind the vehi-

cle when backing up.

Be sure to inform any drivers of the

vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the

system regarding the systems capabili-

ties and limitations.

D170400BUN

Self-diagnosis

If you don’t hear an audible warning

sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-

tently when shifting the gear to the R

(Reverse) position, this may indicate a

malfunction in the rear parking assist sys-

tem. If this occurs, have your vehicle

checked by an authorized KIA dealer as

soon as possible.

D180000AUN

The hazard warning flasher should be

used whenever you find it necessary to

stop the car in a hazardous location.

When you must make such an emer-

gency stop, always pull off the road as far

as possible.

The hazard warning lights are turned on

by pushing in the hazard switch. This

causes all turn signal lights to blink. The

hazard warning lights will operate even

though the key is not in the ignition

switch.

To turn the hazard warning lights off,

push the switch a second time.

WARNING

Pay close attention when the vehi-

cle is driven close to objects on the

road, particularly pedestrians, and

especially children. Be aware that

some objects may not be detected

by the sensors, due to the object’s

distance, size or material, all of

which can limit the effectiveness of

the sensor. Always perform a visual

inspection to make sure the vehicle

is clear of all obstructions before

moving the vehicle in any direction.

WARNING

Your new vehicle warranty does not

cover any accidents or damage to

the vehicle or its occupants due to

a rear parking assist system mal-

function. Always drive safely and

cautiously.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

OUN027218N

451

Features of your vehicle

D190100AUN

Battery saver function

• The purpose of this feature is to pre-

vent the battery from being dis-

charged. The system automatically

turns off the exterior lights when the

driver removes the ignition key and

opens the driver-side door.

• With this feature, the parking lights will

be turned off automatically if the driver

parks on the side of road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lights on

when the ignition key is removed, per-

form the following:

1) Open the driver-side door.

2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON

again using the light switch on the

steering column.

D190400AUN-EC

Lighting control

The light switch has a Headlight and a

Parking light position.

To operate the lights, turn the knob at the

end of the control lever to one of the fol-

lowing positions:

(1) OFF position

(2) Parking light position

(3) Headlight position

D190401AUN

Parking light position ( )

When the light switch is in the parking

light position (1st position), the tail posi-

tion, license and instrument panel lights

are ON.

LIGHTING

OUN026220N OUN026221

Features of your vehicle

524

D190402AUN

Headlight position ( )

When the light switch is in the headlight

position (2nd position) the head, tail posi-

tion, license and instrument panel lights

are ON.

✽✽NOTICE

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position to turn on the headlights.

D190500AUN

High beam operation

To turn on the high beam headlights,

push the lever away from you. Pull it back

for low beams.

The high beam indicator will light when

the headlight high beams are switched

on.

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the lights on for a

prolonged time while the engine is not

running.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever

towards you. It will return to the normal

(low beam) position when released. The

headlight switch does not need to be on

to use this flashing feature.

OUN026222 OUN026224OUN026225

453

Features of your vehicle

D190600AUN

Turn signals and lane change sig-

nals

The ignition switch must be on for the

turn signals to function. To turn on the

turn signals, move the lever up or down

(A). Green arrow indicators on the instru-

ment panel indicate which turn signal is

operating. They will self-cancel after a

turn is completed. If the indicator contin-

ues to flash after a turn, manually return

the lever to the OFF position.

To signal a lane change, move the turn

signal lever slightly and hold it in position

(B). The lever will return to the OFF posi-

tion when released.

If an indicator stays on and does not

flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the

turn signal bulbs may be burned out and

will require replacement.

✽✽NOTICE

If an indicator flash is abnormally quick

or slow, a bulb may be burned out or

have a poor electrical connection in the

circuit. D190700AUN

Front fog light (if equipped)

Fog lights are used to provide improved

visibility when visibility is poor due to fog,

rain or snow, etc. The fog lights will turn

on when fog light switch (1) is turned to

ON after the headlights are turned on.

To turn off the fog lights, turn the switch

to OFF.

OUN026226 OUN026219

CAUTION

When in operation, the fog lights

consume large amounts of vehicle

electrical power. Only use the fog

lights when visibility is poor.

Features of your vehicle

544

D190900AUN-EU

Daytime running light

(if equipped)

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make

it easier for others to see the front of your

vehicle during the day. DRL can be help-

ful in many different driving conditions,

and it is especially helpful after dawn and

before sunset.

The DRL system will make the head-

lights turn OFF when:

1. The headlight switch is ON.

2. The parking brake is applied.

3. Engine stops.

455

Features of your vehicle

A : Wiper speed control

· MIST – Single wipe

· OFF – Off

· INT – Intermittent wipe

· LO – Low wiper speed

· HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent or Auto control wipe

time adjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes

D : Rear wiper/washer control

· – Spraying washer fluid

· ON – Continuous wipe

· INT – Intermittent wipe (if equipped)

· OFF – Off

· – Wash with brief wipes

WIPERS AND WASHERS

Type A

Type B Type B

Type A

OUN028370N/OUN028371N/OUN028372N/OUN028373N

Windshield wiper/washer Rear window wiper/washer

(if equipped)

Features of your vehicle

564

D200100AUN-EU

Windshield wipers

Operates as follows when the ignition

switch is turned ON.

MIST : For a single wiping cycle, push

the lever upward and release it

with the lever in the OFF position.

The wipers will operate continu-

ously if the lever is pushed

upward and held.

OFF : Wiper is not in operation

INT : Wiper operates intermittently at the

same wiping intervals. Use this

mode in a light rain or mist. To vary

the speed setting, turn the speed

control knob (1).

LO : Normal wiper speed

HI : Fast wiper speed

✽✽NOTICE

If there is heavy accumulation of snow

or ice on the windshield, defrost the

windshield for about 10 minutes, or

until the snow and/or ice is removed

before using the windshield wipers to

ensure proper operation.

D200200AUN

Windshield washers

In the OFF position, pull the lever gently

toward you to spray washer fluid on the

windshield and to run the wipers 1-3

cycles.

Use this function when the windshield is

dirty.

OUN027227N

OUN028227N-1

Type A

Type B

Fast

Slow

OUN026229N

OUN028229N-1

Type A

Type B

457

Features of your vehicle

The spray and wiper operation will con-

tinue until you release the lever.

If the washer does not work, check the

washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not

sufficient, you will need to add appropri-

ate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid

to the washer reservoir.

The reservoir filler neck is located in the

front of the engine compartment on the

passenger side.

CAUTION

To prevent possible damage to the

washer pump, do not operate the

washer when the fluid reservoir is

empty.

WARNING

Do not use the washer in freezing

temperatures without first warming

the windshield with the defrosters;

the washer solution could freeze on

contact with the windshield and

obscure your vision.

CAUTION

• To prevent possible damage to

the wipers or windshield, do not

operate the wipers when the

windshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiper

blades, do not use gasoline,

kerosene, paint thinner, or other

solvents on or near them.

• To prevent damage to the wiper

arms and other components, do

not attempt to move the wipers

manually.

Features of your vehicle

584

D200300BUN-EE

Rear window wiper and washer

switch (if equipped)

The rear window wiper and washer

switch is located at the end of the wiper

and washer switch lever. Turn the switch

to desired position to operate the rear

wiper and washer.

- Spraying washer fluid and wiping

ON - Normal wiper operation

INT - Intermittent wiper operation

(if equipped)

OFF - Wiper is not in operation

- Wash with brief wipes

OUN026230N

OUN028230N-1

Type A

Type B

459

Features of your vehicle

D210000AUN

D210100AUN

Map lamp (if equipped)

Push the switch to turn the light on or off.

This light produces a spot beam for con-

venient use as a map lamp at night or as

a personal lamp for the driver and the

front passenger.

D210200AUN

Room lamp

• DOOR:

In the DOOR position, the light comes on

when any door is opened regardless of

the ignition switch position.

INTERIOR LIGHT

OUN026231 OUN026245

CAUTION

Do not use the interior lights for

extended periods when engine is

not running.

It may cause battery discharge.

Features of your vehicle

604

When doors are unlocked by the trans-

mitter, the light comes on for approxi-

mately 30 seconds as long as any door is

not open. The light goes out gradually

after approximately 30 seconds if the

door is closed. However, if the ignition

switch is ON or all doors are locked, the

light will turn off immediately.

If a door is opened with the ignition

switch in the ACC or LOCK position, the

light stays on for about 20 minutes.

However, if a door is opened with the

ignition switch is in the ON position, the

light stays on continuously.

• ON:

In the ON position, the light stays on at all

times.

• OFF:

In the OFF position, the light stays off at

all times, even when a door is open.

D210600AUN

Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)

Opening the lid of the vanity mirror will

automatically turn on the mirror light.

D220000AUN

✽✽NOTICE

If you want to defrost and defog the

front windshield, refer to “Windshield

defrosting and defogging” in this sec-

tion.

OUN026233

CAUTION

Do not leave the switch in this posi-

tion for an extended period of time

when the vehicle is not running.

DEFROSTER

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the conduc-

tors bonded to the inside surface of

the rear window, never use sharp

instruments or window cleaners

containing abrasives to clean the

window.

461

Features of your vehicle

D220100AUN

Rear window defroster

The defroster heats the window to

remove frost, fog and thin ice from the

rear window, while engine is running.

To activate the rear window defroster,

press the rear window defroster button

located in the center facia switch panel.

The indicator on the rear window

defroster button illuminates when the

defroster is ON.

If there is heavy accumulation of snow on

the rear window, brush it off before oper-

ating the rear defroster.

The rear window defroster automatically

turns off after approximately 20 minutes

or when the ignition switch is turned off.

To turn off the defroster, press the rear

window defroster button again.

D220101AUN

Outside mirror defroster

(if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with outside

mirror defrosters, they will operate at the

same time when you turn on the rear

window defroster.

D220200AUN

Front windshield deicer (if equipped)

The engine must be running to enable

this feature. To activate the front wind-

shield deicer, press the front windshield

deicer button. The indicator on the button

illuminates when the deicer is ON. The

front windshield deicer automatically

turns off after 20 minutes or when the

ignition switch is turned off.To turn off the

deicer, press the front windshield deicer

button again.

OUN027240N

OUN028237

OUN026239N

Type A

Type B

Features of your vehicle

624

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OUN028301N

1. Fan speed control knob

2. Mode selection knob

3. Temperature control knob

4. Rear window defroster button

5. Air conditioning button (if equipped)

6. Air intake control button

4 5 6

D230000AUN

463

Features of your vehicle

D230100AUN

Heating and air conditioning

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the

air conditioning system (if equipped)

on.

OUN026302

Features of your vehicle

644

D230101AUN-EU

Mode selection

The mode selection knob controls the

direction of the air flow through the venti-

lation system.

Air can be directed to the floor, dash-

board outlets, or windshield. Six symbols

are used to represent MAX A/C, Face,

Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost

air position.

The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the

inside of the vehicle faster.

The steps (•) between the air flow posi-

tions adjust the direction of the air flow to

the middle position.

MAX A/C-Mode (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body

and face.

In this mode, the air conditioning and the

recirculated air position will be selected

automatically.

Face-Level (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body

and face. Additionally, each outlet can be

controlled to direct the air discharged

from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, D, C, E)

Air flow is directed towards the face and

the floor.

Off-Mode

The fan is turned off.

Floor-Level (C, E, A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount of the air being

directed to the windshield and side win-

dow defrosters.

OUN028358N

465

Features of your vehicle

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, E, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor

and the windshield with a small amount

directed to the side window defrosters.

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

windshield with a small amount of air

directed to the side window defrosters. Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed

separately using the horizontal thumb-

wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to

the maximum position. To open the vent,

rotate it right to the desired position.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air

delivery from these vents using the vent

control lever as shown.

D230102AUN

Temperature control

The temperature control knob allows you

to control the temperature of the air flow-

ing from the ventilation system. To

change the air temperature in the pas-

senger compartment, turn the knob to

the right position for warm and hot air or

left position for cooler air.

OUN026306OUN026303

Features of your vehicle

664

D230103AUN

Air intake control

This is used to select outside (fresh) air

position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position,

push the control button.

Recirculated air position

The indicator light on the

button illuminates when the

recirculated air position is

selected.

With the recirculated air

position selected, air from

the passenger compart-

ment will be drawn through

the heating system and

heated or cooled according

to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

The indicator light on the

button does not illuminate

when the outside (fresh) air

position is selected.

With the outside (fresh) air

position selected, air enters

the vehicle from outside and

is heated or cooled accord-

ing to the function selected.

✽✽NOTICE

Prolonged operation of the heater in the

recirculated air position (without air

conditioning selected) may cause fog-

ging of the windshield and side windows

and the air within the passenger com-

partment may become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air

conditioning with the recirculated air

position selected will result in excessive-

ly dry air in the passenger compart-

ment.

OUN028307

467

Features of your vehicle

D230104AUN-EU

Fan speed control

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position for fan operation.

The fan speed control knob allows you to

control the fan speed of the air flowing

from the ventilation system. To change

the fan speed, turn the knob to the right

for higher speed or left for lower speed.

Setting the mode selection knob to the

OFF position turns off the fan.

D230105AUN

Air conditioning (if equipped)

Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-

tioning system on (indicator light will illu-

minate). Push the button again to turn the

air conditioning system off.

WARNING

• Continued climate control system

operation in the recirculated air

position may allow humidity to

increase inside the vehicle which

may fog the glass and obscure

visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with air

conditioning or heating system

on. It may cause serious harm or

death due to a drop in the oxygen

level and/or body temperature.

• Continued climate control system

operation in the recirculated air

position can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness, and loss of vehicle

control. Set the air intake control

to the outside (fresh) air position

as much as possible while driv-

ing.

OUN026308N OUN028307A

Features of your vehicle

684

System operation

D230501AUN

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

D230502AUN

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn

the air conditioning system (if

equipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode

to the ,position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from

entering the car through the ventilation

system, temporarily set the air intake

control to the recirculated air position.

Be sure to return the control to the

fresh air position when the irritation

has passed to keep fresh air in the

vehicle. This will help keep the driver

alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling system is

drawn in through the grilles just ahead

of the windshield. Care should be

taken that these are not blocked by

leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-

shield, set the air intake control to the

fresh air position and fan speed to the

desired position, turn on the air condi-

tioning system, and adjust temperature

control to desired temperature.

D230503AUN

Air conditioning (if equipped)

All KIA Air Conditioning Systems are

filled with environmentally friendly

R-134a refrigerant which does not dam-

age the ozone layer.

1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-

tioning button.

2. Set the mode to the position.

3. Set the air intake control to the outside

air or recirculated air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-

perature control to maintain maximum

comfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired, set

the temperature control to the extreme

left position, set the mode control to

the MAX A/C position, then set the fan

speed control to the highest speed.

469

Features of your vehicle

✽✽NOTICE

• When using the air conditioning sys-

tem, monitor the temperature gauge

closely while driving up hills or in

heavy traffic when outside tempera-

tures are high. Air conditioning sys-

tem operation may cause engine over-

heating. Continue to use the blower

fan but turn the air conditioning sys-

tem off if the temperature gauge indi-

cates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows in humid

weather air conditioning may create

water droplets inside the vehicle.

Since excessive water droplets may

cause damage to electrical equipment,

air conditioning should only be run

with the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct

sunlight during hot weather, open the

windows for a short time to let the hot

air inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of the

windows on rainy or humid days,

decrease the humidity inside the vehi-

cle by operating the air conditioning

system.

• During air conditioning system opera-

tion, you may occasionally notice a

slight change in engine speed as the

air conditioning compressor cycles.

This is a normal system operation

characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system every

month only for a few minutes to ensure

maximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning sys-

tem, you may notice clear water drip-

ping (or even puddling) on the ground

under the passenger side of the vehi-

cle. This is a normal system operation

characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning system

in the recirculated air position provides

maximum cooling, however, continual

operation in this mode may cause the

air inside the vehicle to become stale.

D230300AUN

Climate control air filter

(if equipped)

The climate control air filter installed

behind the glove box filters the dust or

other pollutants that come into the vehi-

cle from the outside through the heating

and air conditioning system. If dust or

other pollutants accumulate in the filter

over a period of time, the air flow from the

air vents may decrease, resulting in

moisture accumulation on the inside of

the windshield even when the outside

(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-

pens, have the climate control air filter

replaced by an authorized KIA dealer.

1LDA5047

Outside air

Recirculated

air

Climate control

air filter

Blower

Evaporator

core

Heater core

Features of your vehicle

704

✽✽NOTICE

• Replace the filter every 15,000 km

(10,000 miles) or once a year.

If the car is being driven in severe

conditions such as dusty, rough roads,

more frequent air conditioner filter

inspections and changes are required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly

decreases, the system should be

checked at an authorized KIA dealer.

D230400AUN

Checking the amount of air con-

ditioner refrigerant and compres-

sor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low,

the performance of the air conditioning is

reduced. Overfilling also has a negative

impact on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is

found, have the system inspected by an

authorized KIA dealer.

✽✽NOTICE

It is important when servicing the air

conditioning system that the correct

type and amount of oil and refrigerant is

used. Otherwise, damage to the com-

pressor and abnormal system operation

may occur.

WARNING

The air conditioning system should

be serviced by an authorized KIA

dealer. Improper service may cause

serious injury to the person per-

forming the service.

471

Features of your vehicle

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

1. AUTO (automatic control) button

2. Temperature control knob

3. A/C display

4. Fan speed control knob

5. OFF button

6. Mode selection button

7. Front windshield defrost button

8. Recirculated air position button

9. Air conditioning button

10. Rear window defrost button

11. Outside air position button

OUN026310N

6 7 8

10 11

D240000AUN-EU

Features of your vehicle

724

D240100BUN

Automatic heating and air condi-

tioning

The automatic climate control system is

controlled by simply setting the desired

temperature.

The Full Automatic Temperature Control

(FATC) system automatically controls the

heating and cooling system as follows;

1. Push the AUTO button. It is indicated

by AUTO on the display. The modes,

fan speeds, air intake and air-condi-

tioning will be controlled automatically

by temperature setting.

2. Turn the TEMP knob to set the desired

temperature.

If the temperature is set to the lowest

setting (Lo), the air conditioning sys-

tem will operate continuously.

3. To turn the automatic operation off,

press any button or turn any knob

except the temperature control knob. If

you press the mode selection button,

air conditioning button, defrost button

or air intake control button, or turn the

fan speed knob, the selected function

will be controlled manually while other

functions operate automatically. ✽✽NOTICE

Never place anything over the sensor

located on the instrument panel to

ensure better control of the heating and

cooling system.

OUN026312OUN026311

473

Features of your vehicle

D240200AUN

Manual heating and air condition-

ing

The heating and cooling system can be

controlled manually by pushing buttons

other than the AUTO button. In this case,

the system works sequentially according

to the order of buttons selected.

When pressing any button (or turning

any knob) except AUTO button while

automatic operation, the functions not

selected will be controlled automatically.

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the

air conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order to con-

vert to full automatic control of the sys-

tem.

D240201AUN

Mode selection

The mode selection button controls the

direction of the air flow through the venti-

lation system.

The air flow outlet port is converted as

follows:

Refer to the illustration in the “Manual cli-

mate control system”.

Face-Level (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body

and face. Additionally, each outlet can be

controlled to direct the air discharged

from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, D, C, E)

Air flow is directed towards the face and

the floor.

Floor-Level (C, E, A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount of the air being

directed to the windshield and side win-

dow defrosters.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, E, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor

and the windshield with a small amount

directed to the side window defrosters.

OUN026313N

Features of your vehicle

744

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

windshield with a small amount of air

directed to the side window defrosters.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed

separately using the horizontal thumb-

wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to

the maximum position. To open the vent,

rotate it right to the desired position.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air

delivery from these vents using the vent

control lever as shown.

D240202AUN-EU

Temperature control

The temperature will increase to the

maximum (HI) by turning the knob to the

right extremely.

The temperature will decrease to the

minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to the

left extremely.

When turning the knob, the temperature

will increase or decrease by 0.5°C/1°F.

When set to the lowest temperature set-

ting, the air conditioning will operate con-

tinuously.

OUN026314N OUN026303 OUN026315

475

Features of your vehicle

Temperature conversion

If the battery has been discharged or

disconnected, the temperature mode dis-

play will reset to Fahrenheit.

This is a normal condition.You can switch

the temperature mode between

Fahrenheit to Centigrade as follows;

While depressing the AUTO button,

depress the OFF button for 3 seconds or

more. The display will change from

Fahrenheit to Centigrade, or from

Centigrade to Fahrenheit.

D240203AUN-EU

Air intake control

This is used to select outside (fresh) air

position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position,

push the control button.

Recirculated air position

The indicator light on the

button illuminates when the

recirculated air position is

selected.

With the recirculated air

position selected, air from

the passenger compart-

ment will be drawn through

the heating system and

heated or cooled according

to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

The indicator light on the

button illuminates when the

outside (fresh) air position is

selected.

With the outside (fresh) air

position selected, air enters

the vehicle from outside and

is heated or cooled accord-

ing to the function selected.

OUN026316L

Features of your vehicle

764

✽✽NOTICE

Prolonged operation of the heater in the

recirculated air position (without air

conditioning selected) may cause fog-

ging of the windshield and side windows

and the air within the passenger com-

partment may become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air

conditioning with the recirculated air

position selected will result in excessive-

ly dry air in the passenger compart-

ment.

D240205AUN

Fan speed control

The fan speed can be set to the desired

speed by turning the fan speed control

knob.

The higher the fan speed is, the more air

is delivered.

Pressing the OFF button turns off the

fan.

WARNING

• Continued climate control system

operation in the recirculated air

position may allow humidity to

increase inside the vehicle which

may fog the glass and obscure vis-

ibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with air

conditioning or heating system on.

It may cause serious harm or death

due to a drop in the oxygen level

and/or body temperature.

• Continued climate control system

operation in the reciruclated air

position can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness, and loss of vehicle

control. Set the air intake control to

the outside (fresh) air position as

much as possible while driving.

OUN026319

477

Features of your vehicle

D240206AUN

Air conditioning

Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-

tioning system on (indicator light will illu-

minate).

Push the button again to turn the air con-

ditioning system off.

D240207AUN

Outside tempmeter

The current outside temperature is dis-

played in 1°C (1°F) increments. The tem-

perature range is between -40°C ~ 60°C

(-40°F~140°F).

D240208AUN

OFF mode

Push the OFF button to turn off the air cli-

mate control system. However, you can

still operate the mode and air intake but-

tons as long as the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

OUN026321N OUN026359 OUN026320

Features of your vehicle

784

D250000AUN • For maximum defrosting, set the tem-

perature control to the extreme

right/hot position and the fan speed

control to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired while

defrosting or defogging, set the mode

to the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and ice

from the windshield, rear window, out-

side rear view mirrors, and all side win-

dows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the hood

and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve

heater and defroster efficiency and to

reduce the probability of fogging up

inside of the windshield.

Manual climate control system

D250101AUN-EU

To defog inside windshield

1. Select desired fan speed.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Set the mode to the or posi-

tion.

4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected

automatically.

If the outside (fresh) air position is not

selected automatically, press the corre-

sponding button manually.

If the position is selected, lower fan

speed is controlled to higher fan speed.

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

OUN028323N

WARNING - Windshield

heating

Do not use the or position

during cooling operation in

extremely humid weather. The dif-

ference between the temperature of

the outside air and that of the wind-

shield could cause the outer sur-

face of the windshield to fog up,

causing loss of visibility. In this

case, set the mode selection knob

or button to the position and

fan speed control knob or button to

the lower speed.

479

Features of your vehicle

D250102AUN-EU

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot

position.

3. Set the mode to the position.

4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected

automatically.

If the position is selected, lower fan

speed is controlled to higher fan speed.

Automatic climate control system

D250201AUN-EU

To defog inside windshield

1. Select desired fan speed.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Press the defrost button ( ).

4. The outside (fresh) air position will be

selected automatically.

If the outside (fresh) air position are not

selected automatically, adjust the corre-

sponding button manually.

If the position is selected, lower fan

speed is automatically controlled to high-

er fan speed.

D250202AUN-EU

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot

(HI) position.

3. Press the defrost button ( ).

4. The outside (fresh) air position will be

selected automatically.

If the position is selected, lower fan

speed is controlled to higher fan speed.

OUN026325N OUN026326NOUN028324N

Features of your vehicle

804

D250300AUN-EU

Defogging logic

To reduce the probability of fogging up

the inside of the windshield, the air intake

is controlled automatically according to

certain conditions such as or

position. To cancel or return the defog-

ging logic, do the following.

D250301AUN

Manual climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

2. Turn the mode selection knob to the

defrost position ( ).

3. Push the air intake control button

( ) at least 5 times within 3 sec-

onds.

The indicator light in the air intake control

button will blink 3 times with 0.5 second

of interval. It indicates that the defogging

logic is canceled or returned to the pro-

grammed status.

If the battery has been discharged or dis-

connected, it resets to the defog logic

status.

D250302AUN

Automatic climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

2. Select the defrost position pressing

defrost button ( ).

3. While holding the air conditioning but-

ton (A/C) pressed, press the air intake

control button ( ) at least 5 times

within 3 seconds.

The A/C display blinks 3 times with 0.5

second of interval. It indicates that the

defogging logic is canceled or returned to

the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or

disconnected, it resets to the defog logic

status.

OUN028327N OUN026328

481

Features of your vehicle

D270000AUN

These compartments can be used to

store small items required by the driver

or passengers.

D270100AUN

Center console storage

These compartments can be used to

store small items required by the driver

or front passenger.

To open the center console storage pull

up the lever (1) or (2).

D270200AUN

Glove box

To open the glove box, pull the handle

and the glove box will automatically

open. Close the glove box after use.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

WARNING - Flammable

materials

Do not store cigarette lighters,

propane cylinders, or other flamma-

ble/explosive materials in the vehi-

cle. These items may catch fire

and/or explode if the vehicle is

exposed to hot temperatures for

extended periods.

CAUTION

• To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storage

compartment.

• Always keep the storage com-

partment covers closed while

driving. Do not attempt to place

so many items in the storage

compartment that the storage

compartment cover cannot close

securely.

OUN026336OUN026363

WARNING

To reduce the risk of injury in an

accident or sudden stop, always

keep the glove box door closed

while driving.

Features of your vehicle

824

D270300AUN

Sunglass holder

To open the sunglass holder, press the

cover and the holder will slowly open.

Place your sunglasses in the compart-

ment door with the lenses facing out.

Push to close.

D270400AUN

Multi box (for rear passenger,

if equipped)

To open the cover, pull up the lever and

lift the cover. It can be used for storing

small items.

OUN026339

WARNING

• Do not keep objects except sun-

glasses inside the sunglass hold-

er. Such objects can be thrown

from the holder in the event of a

sudden stop or an accident, pos-

sibly injuring the passengers in

the vehicle.

• Do not open the sunglass holder

while the vehicle is moving. The

rear view mirror of the vehicle

can be blocked by an open sun-

glass holder.

OUN026340

483

Features of your vehicle

D270500AUN

Luggage box

You can place a first aid kit, a reflector

triangle, tools, etc. in the box for easy

access.

1. Grasp the handle (1, if equipped) on

the edge of the cover and lift it.

2. Fold the cover forward. D270501AUN

Luggage side tray

To open the cover, pull up the lever (1)

and lift the cover (if equipped). It can be

used for storing small items.

OUN026364

OUN026343

Type A (if equipped)

Type B

OUN026341L

OUN028341

5-seater

7-seater

OUN027342L

OUN028342

5-seater

7-seater

Features of your vehicle

844

D280100AUN

Cigarette lighter

For the cigarette lighter to work, the igni-

tion switch must be in the ACC position

or the ON position.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the

way into its socket. When the element

has heated, the lighter will pop out to the

“ready” position.

If it is necessary to replace the cigarette

lighter, use only a genuine KIA replace-

ment or its approved equivalent.

D280200AUN

Ashtray

INTERIOR FEATURES

CAUTION

Only a genuine KIA lighter should

be used in the cigarette lighter

socket. The use of plug-in acces-

sories (shavers, hand-held vacu-

ums, and coffee pots, etc.) may

damage the socket or cause electri-

cal failure.

WARNING

• Do not hold the lighter in after it

is already heated because it will

overheat.

• If the lighter does not pop out

within 30 seconds, remove it to

prevent overheating.

OUN027331

WARNING - Ashtray use

• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays

as waste receptacles.

• Putting lit cigarettes or matches

in an ashtray with other com-

bustible materials may cause a

fire.

485

Features of your vehicle

D280202AUN

Rear (if equipped)

You can open the rear ashtray by pulling

it out by its top edge. To remove the ash-

tray to empty or clean it, push the tab

inside and pull it all the way out.

D280300AUN

Cup holder

D280301AUN

Front/Rear (if equipped)

Cups or small beverage cans may be

placed in the cup holders.

OUN026333

WARNING - Hot liquids

• Do not place uncovered cups of

hot liquid in the cup holder while

the vehicle is in motion. If the hot

liquid spills, you burn yourself.

Such a burn to the driver could

lead to loss of control of the vehi-

cle.

• To reduce the risk of personal

injury in the event of sudden stop

or collision, do not place uncov-

ered or unsecured bottles, glass-

es, cans, etc., in the cup holder

while the vehicle is in motion.

OUN026344

OUN026346

Front

Rear

Features of your vehicle

864

D280302AUN

Center (if equipped)

To use the cup holders in rear seat, pull

the rear cup holder cover. Place a cup or

small beverage can after pulling out the

blade (1).

Push the cover to close after use.

D280400AUN

Sunvisor

Use the sunvisor to shield direct light

through the front or side windows.

To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.

To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull

it downward, unsnap it from the bracket

(1) and swing it to the side (2).

To use the vanity mirror, pull down the

visor and pull up the mirror cover (3).

Adjust the sunvisor forward or backward

(4).

The ticket holder (5) is provided for hold-

ing a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)

OUN026330OUN026345

CAUTION - Vanity mirror

lamp

Close the vanity mirror cover

securely and return the sunvisor to

its original position after use. If the

vanity mirror is not closed securely,

the lamp will stay on and could

result in battery discharge and pos-

sible sunvisor damage.

487

Features of your vehicle

D280500AUN

Power outlet

The power outlet is designed to provide

power for mobile telephones or other

devices designed to operate with vehicle

electrical systems. The devices should

draw less than 10 amps with the engine

running.

D280600AUN

Digital clock

OUN028334

OUN026335

Front

Rear

CAUTION

• Use the power outlet only when

the engine is running and remove

the accessory plug after use.

Using the accessory plug for pro-

longed periods of time with the

engine off could cause the bat-

tery to discharge.

• Only use 12V electric accessories

which are less than 10A in elec-

tric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner or

heater to the lowest operating

level when using the power outlet.

• Close the cover when not in use.

• Some electronic devices can

cause electronic interference

when plugged into a vehicle’s

power outlet. These devices may

cause excessive audio static and

malfunctions in other electronic

systems or devices used in your

vehicle.

WARNING

Do not adjust the clock while driv-

ing. You may lose your steering

control and cause severe personal

injury or accidents.

OUN027329N

Features of your vehicle

884

Whenever the battery terminals or relat-

ed fuses are disconnected, you must

reset the time.

When the ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON position, the clock buttons operate as

follows:

D280601AUN

Hour (2)

Pressing the H button with your finger, a

pencil or similar object will advance the

time displayed by one hour.

D280602AUN

Minute (3)

Pressing the M button with your finger, a

pencil or similar object will advance the

time displayed by one minute.

D280603AUN

Reset (1)

To clear away minutes, press the R but-

ton with your finger, a pencil or similar

object. Then the clock will be set precise-

ly on the hour.

For example, if the R button is pressed

while the time is between 9:01 and 9:29,

the display will be reset to 9:00.

9:01 ~ 9:29 display changed to 9:00

9:30 ~ 9:59 display changed to 10:00

D280604AUN

Display conversion

To change the 12 hour format to the 24

hour format, press the R button for more

than 4 seconds.

For example, if the R button is pressed

for more than 4 seconds while the time is

10:15 p.m., the display will change to

22:15.

D280700AUN

Shopping bag holder (if equipped)

To use the holder, push the lower portion.

CAUTION

Do not hang a bag weighing more

than 3 kg (7 lbs.). It may cause dam-

age to the shopping bag holder.

OUN026347

489

Features of your vehicle

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the goods or

the vehicle, care should be taken

when carrying fragile or bulky

objects in the luggage compart-

ment.

WARNING

Avoid eye injury. DO NOT over-

stretch the luggage net, ALWAYS

keep your face and body out of the

luggage net’s recoil path. DO NOT

use when the strap has visible

signs of wear or damage.

D280800AUN

Clothes hanger (if equipped)

To use the hanger, pull down the upper

portion of the hanger.

D281000AUN

Luggage net (holder)

(if equipped)

To keep items from shifting in the cargo

area, you can use the 4 (or 6) holders

located in the cargo area to attach the

luggage net.

If necessary, contact your authorized KIA

dealer to obtain a luggage net.

OUN026348

CAUTION

Do not hang heavy clothes, since

those may damage the hook.

OUN027349

OUN026349L

Type A

Type B

Features of your vehicle

904

D281100AUN

Cargo security screen

(if equipped)

Use the cargo security screen to hide

items stored in the cargo area.

• To use the front shade of the cargo

security screen, pull the hook forward

and hang the hook on the headrest

pole.

• To use the rear shade of the cargo

security screen, pull the handle back-

ward and insert the edges into the

slots.

When not in use, place the cargo securi-

ty screen on the lower portion of the

cargo area.

CAUTION

When folding the rear seatback for-

ward, remove the hook from the

headrest pole. Otherwise, the front

shade of the cargo security screen

may be damaged or malformed.

OUN048180L OUN048181L OUN048182L

491

Features of your vehicle

D290100AUN

Roof rack (if equipped)

If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can

load cargo on top of your vehicle.

The two crossbars (if equipped) on the

roof rack can be repositioned forward or

rearward for conveniently loading cargo

or roof carrier. To move the crossbar, pull

the lever and move the crossbar to the

desired position. Release the lever and

lock the crossbar by moving the crossbar

slightly forward or rearward.

OUN026355

EXTERIOR FEATURE

WARNING

• Do not place objects on the cargo

security screen. Such objects

may be thrown about inside the

vehicle and possibly injure vehi-

cle occupants during an accident

or when braking.

• Never allow anyone to ride in the

luggage compartment. It is

designed for luggage only.

• Maintain the balance of the vehi-

cle and locate the weight as far

forward as possible.

CAUTION

Since the cargo security screen

may be damaged or malformed, do

not put the luggage on it when it is

used.

Features of your vehicle

924

✽✽NOTICE

• The crossbars should be placed in the

proper load carrying positions prior

to placing items onto the roof rack.

• If the vehicle is equipped with a sun-

roof, be sure not to position cargo onto

the roof rack in such a way that it

could interfere with sunroof opera-

tion.

CAUTION

• When carrying cargo on the roof

rack, take the necessary precau-

tions to make sure the cargo does

not damage the roof of the vehicle.

• When carrying large objects on

the roof rack, make sure they do

not exceed the overall roof length

or width.

WARNING

• The following specification is the

maximum weight that can be

loaded onto the roof rack.

Distribute the load as evenly as

possible across the crossbars

and roof rack and secure the load

firmly.

Loading cargo or luggage above

specification on the roof rack

may damage your vehicle.

• The vehicle center of gravity will

be higher when items are loaded

onto the roof rack. Avoid sudden

starts, braking, sharp turns,

abrupt maneuvers or high speeds

that may result in loss of vehicle

control or rollover causing an

accident.

(Continued)

ROOF 75 kg (165 lbs.)

RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED

(Continued)

• Always drive slowly and turn cor-

ners carefully when carrying

items on the roof rack. Severe

wind updrafts, caused by passing

vehicles or natural causes, can

cause sudden upward pressure

on items loaded on the roof rack.

This is especially true when car-

rying large, flat items such as

wood panels or mattresses. This

could cause the items to fall off

the roof rack and cause damage

to your vehicle or others around

you.

• To prevent damage or loss of

cargo while driving, check fre-

quently before or while driving to

make sure the items on the roof

rack are securely fastened.

493

Features of your vehicle

Antenna

D300102AUN

Roof antenna

Your car uses a roof antenna to receive

both AM and FM broadcast signals. This

antenna is a removable type. To remove

the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To

install the antenna, turn it clockwise.

D300200AUN

Audio remote control

(if equipped)

The steering wheel audio remote control

button is installed to promote safe driv-

ing.

AUDIO SYSTEM

OUN027353

CAUTION

• Before entering a place with a low

height clearance, be sure that the

antenna is fully folded down or

removed.

• Be sure to remove the antenna

before washing the car in an auto-

matic car wash or it may be dam-

aged.

• When reinstalling your antenna, it

is important that it is fully tight-

ened and adjusted to the upright

position to ensure proper recep-

tion.

But it could be folded or removed

when parking the vehicle or when

loading cargo on the roof rack.

• When cargo is loaded on the roof

rack, do not place the cargo near

the antenna pole to ensure proper

reception.

OUN026356L

CAUTION

Do not operate audio remote con-

trol buttons simultaneously.

Type A Type B

Features of your vehicle

944

MODE (1)

Press the button to select Radio, Tape (if

equipped) or CD (compact disc).

VOLUME (VOL

▲

▼

) (3)

• Press the up button (▲) to increase

volume.

• Press the down button (▼) to decrease

volume.

SEEK/PRESET (

▲

▼

) (2)

If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed

for 0.8 second or more, it will work as fol-

lows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK select

button.

TAPE mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

CDP mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

CDC mode

It will function as the DISC UP/DOWN

button.

If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed

for less than 0.8 second, it will work as

follows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STATION

select buttons.

TAPE mode

It will function as the AUTO MUSIC

Search(AMS) button.

CDP mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN

button.

CDC mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN

button.

Detailed information for audio control

buttons is described in the following

pages in this section.

D300800AUN-EU

How car audio works

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast

from transmitter towers located around

your city. They are intercepted by the

radio antenna on your car. This signal is

then received by the radio and sent to

your car speakers.

When a strong radio signal has reached

your vehicle, the precise engineering of

your audio system ensures the best pos-

sible quality reproduction. However, in

some cases the signal coming to your

vehicle may not be strong and clear. This

can be due to factors such as the dis-

tance from the radio station, closeness of

other strong radio stations or the pres-

ence of buildings, bridges or other large

obstructions in the area.

¢¢¢

JBM001

FM reception

495

Features of your vehicle

AM broadcasts can be received at

greater distances than FM broadcasts.

This is because AM radio waves are

transmitted at low frequencies. These

long, low frequency radio waves can fol-

low the curvature of the earth rather than

travelling straight out into the atmos-

phere. In addition, they curve around

obstructions so that they can provide bet-

ter signal coverage.

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high

frequencies and do not bend to follow the

earth's surface. Because of this, FM

broadcasts generally begin to fade at

short distances from the station. Also,

FM signals are easily affected by build-

ings, mountains, or other obstructions.

These can result in certain listening con-

ditions which might lead you to believe a

problem exists with your radio. The fol-

lowing conditions are normal and do not

indicate radio trouble:

• Fading - As your car moves away from

the radio station, the signal will weaken

and sound will begin to fade. When this

occurs, we suggest that you select

another stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or

large obstructions between the trans-

mitter and your radio can disturb the

signal causing static or fluttering nois-

es to occur. Reducing the treble level

may lessen this effect until the distur-

bance clears.

¢¢¢

JBM002 JBM003

AM reception FM radio station

¢¢¢

JBM004

Features of your vehicle

964

• Station Swapping - As a FM signal

weakens, another more powerful sig-

nal near the same frequency may

begin to play. This is because your

radio is designed to lock onto the

clearest signal. If this occurs, select

another station with a stronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals

being received from several directions

can cause distortion or fluttering. This

can be caused by a direct and reflect-

ed signal from the same station, or by

signals from two stations with close

frequencies. If this occurs, select

another station until the condition has

passed.

Using a cellular phone or a two-way

radio

When a cellular phone is used inside the

vehicle, noise may be produced from the

audio equipment. This does not mean

that something is wrong with the audio

equipment. In such a case, use the cellu-

lar phone at a place as far as possible

from the audio equipment.

Care of cassette tapes

(if equipped)

• Because the thickness of a cassette

tape with the total playback time of

over 60 minutes (C-60) are too thin, we

suggest that you do not use any of

them to avoid having tapes being tan-

gled.

• To achieve better sound quality, period-

ically clean the tape head using a cot-

ton stick with colorless alcohol (once

per month).

• If a tape is too loose, fasten it to reel by

winding with objects like a pencil.

• Because dust or foreign objects on a

cassette tape may damage the play-

back head, always store tapes in their

cases when not in use.

• Make sure cassette tapes are kept

away from magnetic devices (TV,

stereo system, etc) in order to achieve

better sound quality.

• Be certain that no objects or sub-

stances other than cassette tapes are

inserted into the cassette tape player.

• Because tape media can be distorted

when exposed to direct sunlight, Do

not leave cassette tapes on the seats,

dashboard or near the back wind-

shield.

JBM005

CAUTION

When using a communication sys-

tem such a cellular phone or a radio

set inside the vehicle, a separate

external antenna must be fitted.

When a cellular phone or a radio set

is used with an internal antenna

alone, it may interfere with the vehi-

cle's electrical system and adverse-

ly affect safe operation of the vehi-

cle.

WARNING

Don't use a cellular phone when

you are driving. You should stop at

a safe place to use a cellular phone.

497

Features of your vehicle

Care of disc (if equipped)

• If the temperature inside the car is too

high, open the car windows for ventila-

tion before using your car audio.

• It is illegal to copy and use

MP3/WMA/WAVE files without permis-

sion (If equipped with M466, use only

MP3/WMA, If equipped with M446, use

only CD-DA). Use CDs that are creat-

ed only by lawful means.

• Do not apply volatile agents such as

benzene and thinner, normal cl eaners

and magnetic sprays made for ana-

logue disc onto CDs.

• To prevent the disc surface from get-

ting damaged. Hold and carry CDs by

the edges or the edges of the center

hole only.

• Clean the disc surface with a piece of

soft cloth before playback (wipe it from

the center to the outside edge).

• Do not damage the disc surface or

attach pieces of sticky tape or paper

onto it.

• Make sure on undesirable matter other

than CDs are inserted into the CD

player (Do not insert more than one

CD at a time).

• Keep CDs in their cases after use to

protect them from scratches or dirt.

• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-

RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate

normally according to manufacturing

companies or making and recording

methods. In such circumstances, if you

still continue to use those CDs, they

may cause the malfunction of your car

audio system.

✽✽NOTICE - Playing an

Incompatible Copy

Protected Audio CD

Some copy protected CDs, which do not

comply with the international audio CD

standards (Red Book), may not play on

your car audio. Please note that if you

try to play copy protected CDs and the

CD player does not perform correctly

the CDs maybe defective, not the CD

player.

Features of your vehicle

984

1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME Control Knob

2. BAND (AM/FM) Select Buttons

3. TUNE Select/AUDIO Control Knob

4. AUTO SEEK Select Button

5. RADIO SCAN Button

6. EQ Button

7. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

UN-M446USA

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (M446) (IF EQUIPPED)

499

Features of your vehicle

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob

• The radio unit may be operated when

the ignition key is in the “ACC”or “ON”

position. Press the knob to switch the

power on. The LCD shows the radio

frequency in radio mode, and displays

the CD track in CD mode. To switch the

power off, press the knob again.

• Push the FM/AM or CD to turn on that

function without pushing the Power

ON-OFF control knob.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase

the volume and turn the knob counter-

clockwise to reduce the volume.

2. BAND Selector

FM Selection Button

Pressing the FM button changes the

FM1 and FM2 bands.

AM(MW, LW) Selection Button

Pressing the AM button selects the AM

band. AM mode is displayed on the LCD.

3. TUNE Select/AUDIO Control Knob

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase

the frequency and turn the knob counter-

clockwise to reduce the frequency.

Mode Select Knob

Pressing the MODE knob changes the

BASS, MID-RANGE, TREBLE, FADER

and BALANCE mode.

The mode selected is shown on the dis-

play.

After selecting the each mode, rotate the

mode select knob clockwise or counter-

clockwise.

BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knob

clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,

rotate the knob counterclockwise.

MID-RANGE Control

To increase the MID-RANGE, rotate the

knob clockwise, while to decrease the

MID-RANGE, rotate the knob counter-

clockwise.

TREBLE Control

To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob

clockwise, while to decrease the TRE-

BLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

FADER Control

Rotate the control knob clockwise to

emphasize rear speaker sound (front

speaker sound will be attenuated). When

the control knob is turned counterclock-

wise, front speaker sound will be empha-

sized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-

ated).

BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize

right speaker sound (left speaker sound

will be attenuated). When the control

knob is turned counterclockwise, left

speaker sound will be emphasized (right

speaker sound will be attenuated).

4. AUTO SEEK Select Button

(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the AUTO SEEK select button.

When the side is pressed, the unit

will automatically tune to the next higher

frequency and when the side is

pressed, it will automatically tune to the

next lower frequency.

Features of your vehicle

1004

5. RADIO SCAN Button

When you Press the button, frequency is

changed and the next channel is

received automatically.

To stay on a station, press the SCAN

button again.

6. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-

SIC, POP, ROCK, JAZZ and OFF MODE

for the desired tone quality. Each press of

the button changes the display as fol-

lows;

7. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

Six stations for AM, FM1 and FM2

respectively can be preset in the elec-

tronic memory circuit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be

programmed into the memory of the

radio. Then, by simply pressing the AM/

FM band select buttons and/or one of the

six station select buttons, you may recall

any of these stations instantly.

To program the stations, follow these

steps:

• Press AM/FM selector to set the band

for AM, FM1 and FM2.

• Select the desired station to be stored

by seek or manual tuning.

• Determine the preset station select

button you wish to use to access that

station.

• Press and hold the station select but-

ton for more than 0.8 seconds. A select

button indicator will show in the display

indicating which select button you have

depressed. The frequency display will

flash after it has been stored into the

memory. You should then release the

button, and proceed to program the

next desired station. A total of 18 sta-

tions can be programmed by selecting

one AM and two FM station per button.

• When completed, any preset station

may be recalled by selecting AM, FM1

or FM2 band and the appropriate sta-

tion button.

✽✽NOTICE

• Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The audio system mech-

anism may be damaged if you spill

them.

• Do not strike or allow anything to

impact the audio system, damage to

the system mechanisms could occur.

CLASSIC➟POP➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟OFF

4101

Features of your vehicle

1. CD/AUX Select Button

2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button

3. FF/REW Button

4. REPEAT (RPT) Button

5. CD SCAN Button

6. CD EJECT Button

7. RANDOM (RDM) Button

UN-M446USA

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (M446) (IF EQUIPPED)

Features of your vehicle

1024

1. CD/AUX Select Button

CD Select

• Insert the CD with the label facing

upward.

• Insert the CD to start CD playback,

during radio operation.

• When a disc is in the CD deck, if you

press the CD/AUX button the CD play-

er will begin playing even if the radio

player is being used.

• The CD/AUX player can be used when

the ignition switch is in either the “ON”

or “ACC” position.

• Push the CD/AUX button to turn on

that function without pushing the

Power ON-OFF control knob.

✽✽NOTICE

• Do not stick paper or tape etc., on the

label side or the recording side of any

discs, as it may cause a malfunction.

• The unit cannot play a CD-R

(Recordable CD) and CD-RW

(Rewritable CD) that is not finalized.

Please refer to the manual of CD-

R/CD-RW recoder or CD-R/CD-RW

software for more information on

finalization process. (Continued)

(Continued)

• Depending on the recording status,

some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not be

played on this unit.

AUX-IN Select

• When the AUX device (such as

portable MP3 players) is connected to

vehicle's AUX-IN terminal, you can

switch to AUX-IN mode by pressing

CD/AUX button.

• With a CD loaded and AUX device

connected at the same time, this but-

ton switches between AUX-IN mode

and CD mode.

✽✽NOTICE

• If the AUX device is not connected,

you cannot switch to AUX-IN mode.

• When the AUX device is disconnected

while in AUX-IN mode, the unit auto-

matically switches its mode to last

selected mode (CD mode or RADIO

mode).

• The quality of sound may be defected

or distorted when the unit's EQ

(BASS/MID/TREBLE) control and

AUX device's EQ control are both

enabled (not flat). When you want to

use the unit's EQ control feature, dis-

able the AUX device's EQ control fea-

ture, and vice versa.

AUX 3.5mm STEREO MINI PLUG

4103

Features of your vehicle

2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button

• The desired track on the disc currently

being played can be selected using the

track number.

• Press button once to skip forward

to the beginning of the next track.

Press within a second after play-

back begins to quickly move backward

through a CD.

If you press after more than a sec-

ond, it will take you to the beginning of

the track you are now listening to.

3. FF/REW Button

If you want to fast forward or reverse

through the compact disc track, push and

hold the or button.

When you release the button, the com-

pact disc player will resume playing.

4. REPEAT (RPT) Button

• To repeat the track you are currently

listening to, press the RPT button. To

cancel, press it again.

• If you do not release RPT operation

when the track ends, it will automati-

cally be replayed.

This process will be continued until you

push the button again or turn the

Power OFF then ON.

5. CD SCAN Button

• To playback the first 10 seconds of

each track, press the CD SCAN button.

• Press the CD SCAN button again with-

in 10 sec. when you have reached the

desired track.

6. CD EJECT Button

When the button is pressed with a CD

loaded, the CD will eject.

Forcing to eject : To force to eject a CD,

press this button for more than 3 sec-

onds.

(Do this only when a CD is jammed and

you can not eject it in the normal way -

e.g.) in case that you have inserted 2

CDs by mistake)

7. RANDOM (RDM) Button

With random, you can listen to the tracks

in random, rather than sequential order.

To use random, do the following:

Press the RDM button to listen to record-

ed tracks in random sequence. Press

RDM again to cancel or turn the power

OFF then ON. The unit defaults to playing

tracks in sequential order.

✽✽NOTICE

• To assure proper operation of the unit,

keep the vehicle interior temperature

within a normal range by using the

vehicle's air conditioning or heating

system.

• When replacing the fuse, replace it

with a fuse having the correct capaci-

ty.

• All stored bookmarks are all erased

when the car battery is disconnected

or power to the vehicle is lost. If this

occurs, the bookmarks will have to be

reset.

• This equipment is designed to be used

only in a 12 volt DC battery system

with negative ground.

• This unit is made of precision parts.

Do not attempt to disassemble or

adjust any parts.

• Do not expose this equipment (includ-

ing the speakers and CD) to water or

excessive moisture.

Features of your vehicle

1044

✽✽NOTICE

• Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage to

the unit may occur.

• Do not insert anything like coins into

the player slot as damage to the unit

may occur.

• Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mecha-

nism may be damaged if you spill

them.

• Do not strike or allow anything to

impact the audio system, damage to

the system mechanisms could occur.

• Off-road or rough surface driving

may cause the compact disc to skip.

Do not use the compact disc when

driving in such conditions as damage

to the compact disc face could occur.

• Do not attempt to grab or pull the

compact disc out while the disc is

being pulled into the audio unit by the

self-loading mechanism. Damage to

the audio unit and compact disc could

occur.

• Avoid using recorded compact discs in

your audio unit. Original compact

discs are recommended for best

results.

WARNING

When driving your vehicle, be sure

to keep the volume of the unit set

low enough to allow you to hear

sounds coming from the outside.

4105

Features of your vehicle

1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME Control Knob

2. BAND Select Button

3. RADIO SCAN Button

4. EQ Button

5. AUTO SEEK Select Button

6. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

7. AUDIO CONTROL / TUNE Select Knob

UN-M456USA

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (M456) (IF EQUIPPED)

Features of your vehicle

1064

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob

• The radio unit may be operated when

the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or

"ON" position. Press the button to

switch the power on. The LCD shows

the radio frequency in the radio mode,

CD/ MP3 track in the CD/MP3 mode.

To switch the power off, press the but-

ton again.

• Push the FM/AM or CD/MP3 to turn on

that function without pushing Power

ON-OFF control knob.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase

the volume and turn the knob counter-

clockwise to reduce the volume.

2. BAND Select Button

Pressing the FM/AM button changes the

AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode

selected is shown on the display.

3. RADIO SCAN Button

When you press the button, frequency is

changed and the next channel is

received automatically.

To stay on a station, press the SCAN but-

ton again.

4. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-

SIC, POP, ROCK, JAZZ and OFF MODE

for the desired tone quality. Each press of

the button changes the display as fol-

lows;

5. AUTO SEEK Select Button

(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the AUTO SEEK select button.

When the side is pressed, the unit

will automatically tune to the next higher

frequency and when the side is

pressed, it will automatically tune to the

next lower frequency.

6. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

Six stations for AM, FM1 and FM2

respectively can be preset in the elec-

tronic memory circuit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be

programmed into the memory of the

radio.

Then, by simply pressing the AM/FM

band select button and/or one of the six

station select buttons, you may recall any

of these stations instantly. To program the

stations, follow these steps:

• Press AM/FM selector to set the band

for AM, FM1 and FM2.

• Select the desired station to be stored

by seek or manual tuning.

• Determine the preset station select

button you wish to use to access that

station.

• Press and hold the station select button

for more than 0.8 seconds. A select but-

ton indicator will show in the display indi-

cating which select button you have

depressed. The frequency display will

flash after it has been stored in to the

memory.You should then release the but-

ton, and proceed to program the next

desired station. A total of 18 stations can

be programmed by selecting one AM and

two FM station per button.

• When completed, any preset station

may be recalled by selecting AM, FM1

or FM2 band and the appropriate sta-

tion button.

CLASSIC➟POP➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟OFF

4107

Features of your vehicle

7. AUDIO CONTROL / TUNE Select

Button

7-1. AUDIO

Pressing the AUDIO button changes the

BASS, MID-RANGE, TREBLE, FADER

and BALANCE mode.

The mode selected is shown on the dis-

play.

After selecting each mode, rotate the

Audio control knob clockwise or counter-

clockwise.

BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knob

clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,

rotate the knob counterclockwise.

MID-RANGE Control

To increase the MID-RANGE, rotate the

knob clockwise, while to decrease the

MID-RANGE, rotate the knob counter-

clockwise.

TREBLE Control

To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob

clockwise, while to decrease the TRE-

BLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

FADER Control

Turn the control knob clockwise to

emphasize rear speaker sound (front

speaker sound will be attenuated). When

the control knob is turned counterclock-

wise, front speaker sound will be empha-

sized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-

ated).

BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize

right speaker sound (left speaker sound

will be attenuated). When the control

knob is turned counter clockwise, left

speaker sound will be emphasized (right

speaker sound will be attenuated).

7-2. TUNE Select Knob

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase

the frequency and turn the knob counter-

clockwise to reduce the frequency.

✽✽NOTICE

• Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mecha-

nism may be damaged if you spill

them.

• Do not strike or allow anything to

impact the audio system, damage to

the system mechanisms could occur.

Features of your vehicle

1084

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD/AUX Select Button

2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button

3. FF/REW Button

4. REPEAT (RPT) Button

5. RANDOM (RDM) Button

6. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button

7. SCROLL Button

8. EQ Button

9. CD EJECT Button

10. CD SCAN Button

11. FILE SEARCH Knob

(TUNE Select Knob)

12. FOLDER SEARCH (FLDR) Button

13. INFO Button

UN-M456USA

COMPACT DISC PLAYER (M456) (IF EQUIPPED) - COMPATIABLE WITH MP3/WMA/WAVE

4109

Features of your vehicle

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD/AUX Select Button

AUDIO/MP3 CD Select

• Insert the CD with the label facing

upward.

• Insert the CD to start CD playback,

during radio operation.

• If you press the CD/AUX button while a

disc is in the CD deck, the CD player

will begin playing even if the radio is

being used.

• The CD/AUX player can be used when

the ignition switch is in either the “ON”

or “ACC” position.

• Push the CD/AUX button to turn on

that function without pushing the

Power ON-OFF control knob.

✽✽NOTICE

• Do not stick paper or tape etc., on the

label side or the recording side of any

discs, as it may cause a malfunction.

• The unit can play a multi-session CD-

R (recordable CD) and CD-RW

(rewritable CD) that consists of more

than two sessions.

Please refer to the manual of CD-

R/CD-RW recoder or CD-R/CD-RW

software for more information on

finalization process.

• Depending on the recording status,

some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not be

played on this unit.

✽✽NOTICE

Playback of MP3 and WMAfile formats

are supported. Load to play time for

these formats may be longer due to the

compressed nature of these discs.

AUX-IN Select

• When the AUX device (such as

portable MP3 players) is connected to

vehicle's AUX-IN terminal, you can

switch to AUX-IN mode by pressing

CD/AUX button.

• With a CD loaded and AUX device

connected at the same time, this but-

ton switches between AUX-IN mode

and CD mode.

✽✽NOTICE

• If the AUX device is not connected, you

cannot switch to AUX-IN mode.

• When the AUX device is disconnected

while in AUX-IN mode, the unit auto-

matically switches its mode to last

selected mode (CD mode or RADIO

mode).

• The quality of sound may be defected

or distorted when the unit's EQ

(BASS/MID/TREBLE) control and

AUX device's EQ control are both

enabled (not flat). When you want to

use the unit's EQ control feature, dis-

able the AUX device's EQ control fea-

ture, and vice versa.

2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button

• The desired track on the disc currently

being played can be selected using the

track number.

• Press button once to skip forward

to the beginning of the next track.

Press within a second after play-

back begins to quickly move backward

through a CD.

If you press after more than a sec-

ond, it will take you to the beginning of

the file you are now listening to.

AUX 3.5mm STEREO MINI PLUG

Features of your vehicle

1104

3. FF/REW Button

If you want to fast forward or reverse

through the compact disc track, push and

hold the FF or REW button.

When you release the button, the compact

disc player will resume playing.

4. REPEAT (RPT) Button

• To repeat the track you are currently

listening to, press the RPT button. To

cancel, press it again.

• To repeat the music within selected

folder, press the RPT button for more

than 0.8 seconds. To cancel, press it

again. (MP3 CD only)

• If you do not release RPT operation

when the track ends, it will automati-

cally be replayed.

This process will be continued until you

push the button again or turn the power

OFF then ON.

5. RANDOM (RDM) Button

With random, you can listen to the tracks

in random, rather than sequential order.

To use random, do the following:

• Press the RDM button to listen to

recorded tracks in random sequence.

Press RDM again to cancel or turn the

power OFF then ON.

The unit defaults to playing tracks in

sequential order.

• To listen to the music within the select-

ed folder in random order, press the

RDM button within a second. To can-

cel, press it again or turn the power

OFF then ON . (MP3 CD only)

6. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button

When the CD player unit is operating, the

desired track on the disc can be book-

marked by using the MARK button.(MP3

CD only)

• Press the MARK button for more than

0.8 seconds to bookmark the desired

track.

“M” will be displayed on the LCD and

“MEMORY(1~50)” will display for

approximately five seconds with beep

sound.

To play a bookmarked track, press the

MARK button within 0.8 seconds and

select the bookmarked track to play.

• To erase a bookmarked track, press

the MARK button for more than 0.8

seconds. The unit will beep once when

the bookmark is erased.

✽✽NOTICE

Tracks stored using the Bookmark func-

tion will be automatically erased after

you eject CDs that contain those tracks.

7. SCROLL Button

Press the button, and you can check the

file names with more than 16 characters

on MP3 CD(max 34 characters.).

The button doesn’t work on file names

with less than 16 characters.

8. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-

SIC, POP, ROCK, JAZZ and OFF MODE

for the desired tone quality. Each press of

the button changes the display as fol-

lows;

CLASSIC➟POP➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟OFF

4111

Features of your vehicle

9. CD EJECT Button

When the button is pressed with a CD

loaded, the CD will eject.

Forcing to eject : To force to eject a CD,

press this button for more than 3 sec-

onds. (Do this only when a CD is jammed

and you can not eject it in the normal way

- e.g.) in case that you have inserted 2

CDs by mistake)

10. CD SCAN Button

• To playback the first 10 seconds of

each track, press the CD SCAN button

more than 0.8 seconds.

• To playback the first 10 seconds of

each track in the selected folder, press

the CD SCAN button within 0.8 sec-

onds. (MP3 CD only)

• Press the CD SCAN button again with-

in 10 sec. when you have reached the

desired track.

11. FILE SEARCH Knob

(TUNE Select Knob)

• You can skip the track (file) by turning

the FILE SEARCH knob clockwise or

counterclockwise.

After selecting the desired track (file),

press the FILE SEARCH knob to play-

back the track (file).

If you do not press the FILE SEARCH

knob within five seconds, the search

will stop.

12. FOLDER SEARCH (FLDR) Button

• You can move through the folder by

pushing the FLDR button to up ( )

and down( ).

• After moving the desired folder, press

the FILE SEARCH knob to play back in

the selected folder. If you do not press

the FILE SEARCH knob within 5 sec-

onds, the folder searching function will

be released. It can not be operated in a

single folder.

13. INFO Button

While playing CD(MP3), If this button is

pressed repeatedly, the played file infor-

mation will be displayed in the following

order.

FILE NAME ➟ SONG TITLE ➟ ARTIST

NAME ➟ ALBUM TITLE ➟ FOLDER

NAME ➟ TOTAL FILE ➟ MARK

ADDRESS ➟ FILE NAME

“NO DATA” wil be displayed in case that

there is no information on the selected

item.

Features of your vehicle

1124

✽✽NOTICE

• To assure proper operation of the unit,

keep the vehicle interior temperature

within a normal range by using the

vehicle's air conditioning or heating

system.

• When replacing the fuse, replace it

with a fuse having the correct capaci-

ty.

• All stored bookmarks are all erased

when the car battery is disconnected

or power to the vehicle is lost. If this

occurs, the bookmarks will have to be

reset.

• This equipment is designed to be used

only in a 12 volt DC battery system

with negative ground.

• This unit is made of precision parts.

Do not attempt to disassemble or

adjust any parts.

• Do not expose this equipment (includ-

ing the speakers and tape) to water or

excessive moisture.

✽✽NOTICE

• Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage to

the unit may occur.

• Do not insert anything like coins into

the player slot as damage to the unit

may occur.

• Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mecha-

nism may be damaged if you spill

them.

• Do not strike or allow anything to

impact the audio system, damage to

the system mechanisms could occur.

• Off-road or rough surface driving

may cause the compact disc to skip.

Do not use the compact disc when

driving in such conditions as damage

to the compact disc face could occur.

• Do not attempt to grab or pull the

compact disc out while the disc is

being pulled into the audio unit by the

self-loading mechanism. Damage to

the audio unit and compact disc could

occur.

• Avoid using recorded compact discs in

your audio unit. Original compact

discs are recommended.

WARNING

When driving your vehicle, be sure

to keep the volume of the unit set

low enough to allow you to hear

sounds coming from the outside.

4113

Features of your vehicle

1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME Control Knob

2. BAND Select Button

3. AUTO SEEK Select Button

4. RADIO SCAN Button

5. EQ Select Button

6. PRESET Station Select Buttons

7. AUDIO CONTROL / TUNE Select Knob

UN-M466USA

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (M466) (IF EQUIPPED)

Features of your vehicle

1144

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob

• The radio unit may be operated when

the ignition key is in the "ACC" or “ON”

position. Press the knob to switch the

power on. The LCD shows the radio

frequency in the radio mode or

CD/MP3 track in the CD/MP3 mode or

CD AUTO CHANGER mode. To switch

the power off, press the knob again.

• Push the FM/AM or CD/MP3 to turn on

that function without pushing Power

ON-OFF control knob.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase

the volume and turn the knob counter-

clockwise to reduce the volume.

2. BAND Select Button

Pressing the FM, AM button changes the

AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode

selected is shown on the display.

3. AUTO SEEK Select Button

(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the AUTO SEEK select button.

When the side is pressed, the unit

will automatically tune to the next higher

frequency and when the side is

pressed, it will automatically tune to the

next lower frequency.

4. RADIO SCAN Button

When you press the button, frequency is

changed and the next channel is

received automatically.

To stay on a station, press the SCAN but-

ton again.

5. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-

SIC, POP, ROCK, JAZZ and OFF MODE

for the desired tone quality. Each press of

the button changes the display as fol-

lows;

6. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

Six stations for AM, FM1 and FM2

respectively can be preset in the elec-

tronic memory circuit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be

programmed into the memory of the

radio. Then, by simply pressing the AM/

FM band select button and/or one of the

six station select buttons, you may recall

any of these stations instantly. To pro-

gram the stations, follow these steps:

• Press AM/FM selector to set the band

for AM, FM1 and FM2.

• Select the desired station to be stored

by seek or manual tuning.

• Determine the preset station select

button you wish to use to access that

station.

• Press and hold the station select but-

ton for more than 0.8 seconds. A select

button indicator will show in the display

indicating which select button you have

depressed. The frequency display will

flash after it has been stored into the

memory. You should then release the

button, and proceed to program the

next desired station. A total of 18 sta-

tions can be programmed by selecting

one AM and two FM station per button.

• When completed, any preset station

may be recalled by selecting AM, FM1

or FM2 band and the appropriate sta-

tion button.

CLASSIC➟POP➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟OFF

4115

Features of your vehicle

7. AUDIO CONTROL / TUNE Select

Button

7-1. AUDIO

Pressing the AUDIO button changes the

BASS, MID-RANGE, TREBLE, FADER

and BALANCE TUNE mode.

The mode selected is shown on the dis-

play.

After selecting each mode, rotate the

Audio control knob clockwise or counter-

clockwise.

BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knob

clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,

rotate the knob counterclockwise.

MID-RANGE Control

To increase the MID-RANGE, rotate the

knob clockwise, while to decrease the

MID-RANGE, rotate the knob counter-

clockwise.

TREBLE Control

To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob

clockwise, while to decrease the TRE-

BLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

FADER Control

Turn the control knob clockwise to

emphasize rear speaker sound (front

speaker sound will be attenuated). When

the control knob is turned counterclock-

wise, front speaker sound will be empha-

sized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-

ated).

BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize

right speaker sound (left speaker sound

will be attenuated). When the control

knob is turned counter clockwise, left

speaker sound will be emphasized (right

speaker sound will be attenuated).

7-2. TUNE Select Knob

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase

the frequency and turn the knob counter-

clockwise to reduce the frequency.

✽✽NOTICE

• Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The audio system mech-

anism may be damaged if you spill

them.

• Do not strike or allow anything to

impact the audio system, damage to

the system mechanisms could occur.

Features of your vehicle

1164

COMPACT DISC PLAYER/CD AUTO CHANGER OPERATION (M466) (IF EQUIPPED)

- COMPATIABLE WITH MP3/WMA

UN-M466USA

1. LOAD Select Button

2. AUDIO/MP3 CD/AUX Select Button

3. CD EJECT Button

4. TRACK UP/DOWN Button

5. SCROLL Button

6. FF/REW Button

7. EQ Button

8. CD SCAN Button

9. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button

10. REPEAT (RPT) Button

11. RANDOM (RDM) Button

12. DISC UP/DOWN Button

13. FILE SEARCH Knob

(TUNE Select Knob)

14. FOLDER SEARCH (FLDR) Button

15. INFO Button

4117

Features of your vehicle

1. LOAD Button

This compact disc player will accommo-

date up to six compact discs.

To insert multiple discs into the player,

perform the following:

1.Press and release the LOAD Button.

2.Green light on the slot will be illuminat-

ed and the lowest number of empty

slot will blink on the display.

After “WAIT” is displayed on the LCD,

the slot will open with “INSERT” dis-

played on the LCD.

3.Insert a disc partway into the slot, label

side up. The player will pull the disc in.

When the disc is inserted, the disc will

begin to play automatically.

✽✽NOTICE

• The disc can be only inserted while the

green light is blinking on the slot.

• This CD player is suitable only for 12

cm discs, do not use irregular shaped

CDs.

To insert multiple discs:

1.Press and hold the LOAD button for

one second or more.

You will then hear a beep sound and

the green light on the slot will be illumi-

nated, and the numbers of empty disc

will blink on the display.

2. After “WAIT” is displayed on the LCD

with the lowest number of empty slot

blinking, the slot will open with “INSERT”

displayed on the LCD.

3.Insert a disc partway into the slot, label

side up. The player will pull the disc in.

Once the disc is loaded, the numbers

of the empty disc will blink on the dis-

play continuously.

If the next “DISC NO.” is displayed when

the slot is illuminated, you can then load

another disc.

4.Load the remaining disc by following

procedures 1 and 2. When you finished

loading 6 discs, the CD player will

begin to play the last CD loaded.

5. To load more than one disc but less

than six, complete Steps 1 and 2.

When you have finished loading discs,

press LOAD button to cancel the loading

function or wait for 10 seconds. The CD

player will begin to play the last CD

loaded. As each CD starts to play, the

DISC number will appear on the display.

✽✽NOTICE

The disc player takes up to six discs. Do

not try to load more than six.

2. AUDIO/MP3 CD/AUX Select Button

AUDIO/MP3 CD Select

• Insert the CD with the label facing

upward.

• Insert the CD to start CD playback,

during radio operation.

• If you press the CD/AUX button while a

disc is in the CD deck, the CD player

will begin playing even if the radio is

being used.

• The CD/AUX player can be used when

the ignition switch is in either the “ON”

or “ACC” position.

• Push the CD/AUX button to turn on

that function without pushing the

Power ON-OFF control knob.

Features of your vehicle

1184

✽✽NOTICE

Playback of MP3 and WMAfile formats

are supported. Load to play time for

these formats may be longer due to the

compressed nature of these discs.

✽✽NOTICE

• Do not stick paper or tape etc., on the

label side or the recording side of any

discs, as it may cause a malfunction.

• The unit can play a multi-session CD-

R (recordable CD) and CD-RW

(rewritable CD) that consists of more

than two sessions.

Please refer to the manual of CD-

R/CD-RW recorder or CD-R/CD-RW

software for more information on

finalization process.

• Depending on the recording status,

some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not play

on this unit.

AUX-IN Select

• When the AUX device (such as

portable MP3 players) is connected to

vehicle's AUX-IN terminal, you can

switch to AUX-IN mode by pressing

CD/AUX button.

• With a CD loaded and AUX device

connected at the same time, this but-

ton switches between AUX-IN mode

and CD mode.

✽✽NOTICE

• If the AUX device is not connected, you

cannot switch to AUX-IN mode.

• When the AUX device is disconnected

while in AUX-IN mode, the unit auto-

matically switches its mode to last

selected mode (CD mode or RADIO

mode).

• The quality of sound may be defected

or distorted when the unit's EQ

(BASS/MID/TREBLE) control and

AUX device's EQ control are both

enabled (not flat). When you want to

use the unit's EQ control feature, dis-

able the AUX device's EQ control fea-

ture, and vice versa.

3. CD EJECT Button

• When the button is pressed with a

CD loaded, the CD will eject.

• To eject all of the discs, press this but-

ton for one second or more.

4. TRACK UP/DOWN Button

• The desired track on the disc currently

being played can be selected using the

track number.

• Press once to skip forward to the

beginning of the next track.

• Press once to skip back to the

beginning of the track.

• Press before playback begins to

quickly move backward through a CD.

AUX 3.5mm STEREO MINI PLUG

4119

Features of your vehicle

5. SCROLL Button

Press the button, and you can check the file

names with more than 16 characters on

MP3 CD(max 34 characters).

The button doesn’t work on file names

less than 16 characters.

6. FF/REW Button

If you want to fast forward or reverse

through the compact disc track, push and

hold the FF or REW button.

When you release the button, the compact

disc player will resume playing.

7. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-

SIC, POP, ROCK, JAZZ and OFF MODE

for the desired tone quality. Each press of

the button changes the display as fol-

lows;

8. CD SCAN Button

• To playback the first 10 seconds of

each track, press the CD SCAN button

more than 0.8 seconds.

• To playback the first 10 seconds of

each track in the selected folder, press

the CD SCAN button within 0.8 sec-

onds. (MP3 CD only)

• Press the CD SCAN button again with-

in 10 sec. when you have reached the

desired track.

9. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button

When the CD player unit is operating, the

desired track on the disc can be book-

marked by using the MARK button.

• Press the MARK button for more than

0.8 seconds to bookmark the desired

track.

“M” will be displayed on the LCD and

“MEMORY(1~50)” will display for

approximately five seconds with beep

sound.

To play the bookmarked tracks, press

the MARK button within 0.8 seconds

and select the bookmarked track to

play.

• To erase a bookmarked track, press

the MARK button for more than 0.8

seconds. The unit will beep once when

the bookmark is erased.

If you want to delete all tracks stored using

the Bookmark function, press FILE

SEARCH Knob in the Mark Play mode for

more than 0.8 seconds.You will hear a beep

sound and all tracks will be deleted from

Mark Memory with “MARK DELETE ALL”

displayed on the LCD.

✽✽NOTICE

Tracks stored on Mark Memory will be

automatically erased after you eject CDs

that contain those tracks.

10. REPEAT (RPT) Button

• To repeat the track you are currently

listening to, press the RPT button.

To cancel, press it again.

• To repeat the music within selected

CD, press the RPT button for more

than 0.8 seconds.

To cancel, press it again for more than

0.8 seconds.

• To repeat the music within the current-

ly played folder, press the RPT button

for more than 0.8 seconds.

To cancel, press it again(MP3 CD only).

CLASSIC➟POP➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟OFF

Features of your vehicle

1204

• If you do not release RPT operation

after all the tracks are played back, the

unit will play back again from the first

track.

This process will be continued until you

push the button again or turn the power

OFF then ON.

11. RANDOM (RDM) Button

With random, you can listen to the tracks

in random, rather than sequential order

on one disc.

To use random, do the following:

• Press the RDM button to listen to

recorded tracks in random sequence.

Press RDM again to cancel or turn the

power OFF then ON. The unit defaults

to playing tracks in sequential order.

• To listen to the music within the select-

ed folder in random order, press the

RDM button within a second. To can-

cel, press it again or turn the power

OFF then ON. (MP3 CD only)

12. DISC UP/DOWN Button

• By pressing "DISC "/"DISC "

while CD changer is playing you can

move backward or forward to the next

disc and playback automatically

begins.

• If any of the slots do not contain a CD,

your car audio will skip the empty slot

and play only those that contain a CD.

When switching CD’s, the LCD dis-

plays the selected CD’s number.

13. FILE SEARCH Knob

(TUNE Select Knob)

• You can skip the track (file) by turning

the FILE SEARCH knob clockwise or

counterclockwise.

After selecting the desired track (file),

press the FILE SEARCH knob to play-

back the track (file).

If you do not press the FILE SEARCH

knob within five seconds, the search

will stop.

14. FOLDER SEARCH (FLDR) Button

• You can move through the folder by

pushing the FLDR button to up ( )

and down( ).

• After moving the desired folder, press

the FILE SEARCH knob to play back in

the selected folder. If you do not press

the FILE SEARCH knob within 5 sec-

onds, the folder searching function will

be released. It can not be operated in a

single folder.

15. INFO Button

While playing CD(MP3), If this button is

pressed repeatedly, the played file infor-

mation will be displayed in the following

order.

FILE NAME ➟ SONG TITLE ➟ ARTIST

NAME ➟ ALBUM TITLE ➟ FOLDER

NAME ➟ TOTAL FILE ➟ MARK

ADDRESS ➟ FILE NAME

“NO DATA” wil be displayed in case that

there is no information on the selected

item.

4121

Features of your vehicle

✽✽NOTICE

• To assure proper operation of the unit,

keep the vehicle interior temperature

within a normal range by using the

vehicle's air conditioning or heating

system.

• When replacing the fuse, replace it

with a fuse having the correct capaci-

ty.

• Stored bookmarks are all erased when

the car battery is disconnected or

power to the vehicle is lost. If this

occurs, the bookmarks will have to be

reset.

• This equipment is designed to be used

only in a 12 volt DC battery system

with negative ground.

• This unit is made of precision parts.

Do not attempt to disassemble or

adjust any parts.

• Do not expose this equipment (includ-

ing the speakers and tape) to water or

excessive moisture.

✽✽NOTICE

• Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage to

the unit may occur.

• Do not insert anything like coins into

the player slot as damage to the unit

may occur.

• Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mecha-

nism may be damaged if you spill

them.

• Do not strike or allow anything to

impact the audio system, damage to

the system mechanisms could occur.

• Off-road or rough surface driving

may cause the compact disc to skip.

Do not use the compact disc when

driving in such conditions as damage

to the compact disc face could occur.

• Do not attempt to grab or pull the

compact disc out while the disc is

being pulled into the audio unit by the

self-loading mechanism. Damage to

the audio unit and compact disc could

occur.

• Avoid using recorded compact discs in

your audio unit. Original compact

discs are recommended.

WARNING

When driving your vehicle, be sure

to keep the volume of the unit set

low enough to allow you to hear

sounds coming from the outside.

Before driving / 5-3

Key positions / 5-4

Starting the engine / 5-6

Automatic transaxle / 5-7

Brake system / 5-14

Cruise control system / 5-24

Economical operation / 5-28

Special driving conditions / 5-30

Winter driving / 5-34

Trailer towing / 5-37

Vehicle load limit / 5-44

Vehicle weight / 5-49

Driving your vehicle

E010000AUN

WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the win-

dows immediately.

• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.

Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxia-

tion.

• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear

a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the

exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized KIA dealer.

• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.

Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your

garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.

If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area

with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the tailgate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:

1. Close all windows.

2. Open side vents.

3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are

kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

Driving your vehicle

E020100AUN

Before entering vehicle

• Be sure that all windows, outside mir-

ror(s), and outside lights are clean.

• Check the condition of the tires.

• Check under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.

• Be sure there are no obstacles behind

you if you intend to back up.

E020200AUN

Necessary inspections

Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine

coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid

should be checked on a regular basis,

with the exact interval depending on the

fluid. Further details are provided in sec-

tion 7, “Maintenance”.

E020300AUN

Before starting

• Close and lock all doors.

• Position the seat so that all controls are

easily reached.

• Adjust the inside and outside rearview

mirrors.

• Be sure that all lights work.

• Check all gauges.

• Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is turned to

the ON position.

• Release the parking brake and make

sure the brake warning light goes out.

For safe operation, be sure you are famil-

iar with your vehicle and its equipment.

BEFORE DRIVING

WARNING

All passengers must be properly

belted whenever the vehicle is mov-

ing. Refer to “Seat belts” in section

3 for more information on their

proper use.

WARNING

Always check the surrounding

areas near your vehicle for people,

especially children, before putting a

car into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

Driving your vehicle

E030100AUN

Illuminated ignition switch

(if equipped)

Whenever a front door is opened, the

ignition switch will be illuminated for your

convenience, provided the ignition switch

is not in the ON position. The light will go

off immediately when the ignition switch

is turned on or go off after about 10 sec-

onds when the door is closed.

Ignition switch position

E030201AUN

LOCK

The steering wheel locks to protect

against theft. The ignition key can be

removed only in the LOCK position.

When turning the ignition switch to the

LOCK position, push the key inward at

the ACC position and turn the key toward

the LOCK position.

WARNING - Driving under

the influence of alcohol or

drugs

Drinking and driving is dangerous.

Drunk driving is the number one

contributor to the highway death

toll each year. Even a small amount

of alcohol will affect your reflexes,

perceptions and judgment. Driving

while under the influence of drugs

is as dangerous or more dangerous

than driving drunk.

You are much more likely to have a

serious accident if you drink or

take drugs and drive.

If you are drinking or taking drugs,

don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-

er who has been drinking or taking

drugs. Choose a designated driver

or call a cab.

OUN036001 1VQA3018

KEY POSITIONS

Driving your vehicle

E030202AUN

ACC (Accessory)

The steering wheel is unlocked and elec-

trical accessories are operative.

✽✽NOTICE

If difficulty is experienced in turning the

ignition switch to the ACC position, turn

the steering wheel right and left to

release the tension and then turn the

key.

E030203AUN

The warning lights can be checked

before the engine is started. This is the

normal running position after the engine

is started.

Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the

engine is not running to prevent battery

discharge.

E030204AUN

START

Turn the ignition switch to the START

position to start the engine. The engine

will crank until you release the key; then

it returns to the ON position. The brake

warning lamp can be checked in this

position.

WARNING - Ignition

switch

• Never turn the ignition switch to

LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is

moving. This would result in loss

of directional control and braking

function, which could cause an

accident.

• The anti-theft steering column lock

is not a substitute for the parking

brake. Before leaving the driver’s

seat, always make sure the shift

lever is engaged in P (Park) for the

automatic transaxle and set the

parking brake fully and shut the

engine off. Unexpected and sud-

den vehicle movement may occur

if these precautions are not taken.

• Never reach for the ignition switch,

or any other controls through the

steering wheel while the vehicle is

in motion. The presence of your

hand or arm in this area could

cause a loss of vehicle control, an

accident and serious bodily injury

or death.

• Do not place any movable objects

around the driver’s seat as they

may move while driving, interfere

with the driver and lead to an acci-

dent.

Driving your vehicle

E040000AUN-EU E040100AUN-EU

1. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

2. Place the transaxle shift lever in P

(Park). Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when the

shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to START and

hold it there until the engine starts (a

maximum of 10 seconds), then

release the key.

4. In extremely cold weather (below

-18°C / 0°F) or after the vehicle has

not been operated for several days, let

the engine warm up without depress-

ing the accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm, it

should be started without depressing

the accelerator.

STARTING THE ENGINE

WARNING

Always wear appropriate shoes

when operating your vehicle.

Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski

boots,etc.) may interfere with your

ability to use the brake and acceler-

ator pedal.

CAUTION

If the engine stalls while you are in

motion, do not attempt to move the

shift lever to the P (Park) position. If

traffic and road conditions permit,

you may put the shift lever in the N

(Neutral) position while the vehicle

is still moving and turn the ignition

switch to the START position in an

attempt to restart the engine.

CAUTION

Do not engage the starter for more

than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls

or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds

before re-engaging the starter.

Improper use of the starter may

damage it.

Driving your vehicle

E060000AUN-EU

E060100AUN-EU

Automatic transaxle operation

The automatic transaxle has 4 (or 5) for-

ward speeds and one reverse speed.The

individual speeds are selected automati-

cally, depending on the position of the

shift lever.

All normal forward driving is done with

the shift lever in the D (Drive) position.

To move the shift lever from the P (Park)

position, the brake pedal must be

depressed with the ignition switch ON.

✽✽NOTICE

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if

the battery has been disconnected, may

be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal

condition, and the shifting sequence will

adjust after shifts are cycled a few times

by the TCM (Transaxle Control

Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control

Module).

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

OUN036006

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

Depress the brake pedal when shifting.

The shift lever can be shifted freely.

Driving your vehicle

For smooth operation, depress the brake

pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a

forward or reverse gear.

E060101AUN-EU

Transaxle ranges

The indicator in the instrument cluster

displays the shift lever position when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop before

shifting into P (Park). This position locks

the transaxle and prevents the front

wheels from rotating.

WARNING - Automatic

transaxle

• Always check the surrounding

areas near your vehicle for peo-

ple, especially children, before

shifting a car into D (Drive) or R

(Reverse).

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always make sure the shift lever

is in the P (Park) position; then

set the parking brake fully and

shut the engine off. Unexpected

and sudden vehicle movement

can occur if these precautions

are not followed in the order iden-

tified.

CAUTION

• To avoid damage to your

transaxle, do not accelerate the

engine in R (Reverse) or any for-

ward gear position with the

brakes on.

• When stopped on an incline, do

not hold the vehicle stationary

with engine power. Use the serv-

ice brake or the parking brake.

• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P

(Park) into D (Drive), or R

(Reverse) when the engine is

above idle speed.

WARNING

• Shifting into P (Park) while the

vehicle is in motion will cause the

drive wheels to lock which will

cause you to lose control of the

vehicle.

• Do not use the P (Park) position

in place of the parking brake.

Always make sure the shift lever

is latched in the P (Park) position

and set the parking brake fully.

(Continued)

Driving your vehicle

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle

backward.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transaxle are not locked.

The vehicle will roll freely even on the

slightest incline unless the parking brake

or service brakes are applied.

D (Drive)

This is the normal forward driving posi-

tion. The transaxle will automatically shift

through a 4 (or 5)-gear sequence, pro-

viding the best fuel economy and power.

For extra power when passing another

vehicle or climbing grades, depress the

accelerator fully, at which time the

transaxle will automatically downshift to

the next lower gear.

✽✽NOTICE

Always come to a complete stop before

shifting into D (Driving).

(Continued)

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always make sure the shift lever

is in the P (Park) position. Set the

parking brake fully, shut the

engine off and take the key with

you. Unexpected and sudden

vehicle movement can occur if

you do not follow these precau-

tions in the order specified.

• Never leave a child unattended in

a vehicle.

CAUTION

The transaxle may be damaged if

you shift into P (Park) while the

vehicle is in motion.

CAUTION

Always come to a complete stop

before shifting into or out of R

(Reverse); you may damage the

transaxle if you shift into R while

the vehicle is in motion, except as

explained in “Rocking the vehicle”

in this section.

Driving your vehicle

105

Sports mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in

motion, sports mode is selected by push-

ing the shift lever from the D (Drive) posi-

tion into the manual gate. To return to D

(Drive) range operation, push the shift

lever back into the main gate.

In sports mode, moving the shift lever

backwards and forwards will allow you to

make gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to a

manual transaxle, the sports mode

allows gearshifts with the accelerator

pedal depressed.

Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to

shift up one gear.

Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once

to shift down one gear.

✽✽NOTICE

• In sports mode, the driver must exe-

cute upshifts in accordance with road

conditions, taking care to keep the

engine speed below the red zone.

• In sports mode, only the 4 (or 5) for-

ward gears can be selected. To reverse

or park the vehicle, move the shift

lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park)

position as required.

• In sports mode, downshifts are made

automatically when the vehicle slows

down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear

is automatically selected. (Continued)

(Continued)

• In sports mode, when the engine rpm

approaches the red zone shift points

are varied to upshift automatically.

• To maintain the required levels of

vehicle performance and safety, the

system may not execute certain

gearshifts when the shift lever is oper-

ated.

• When driving on a slippery road,

push the shift lever forward into the

+(up) position. This causes the

transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear

which is better for smooth driving on

a slippery road. Push the shift lever to

the -(down) side to shift back to the 1st

gear.

OUN036008

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

Sports mode

511

Driving your vehicle

E060102AUN

Shift lock system

For your safety, the automatic transaxle

has a shift lock system which prevents

shifting the transaxle from P (Park) or N

(Neutral) into R (Reverse) unless the

brake pedal is depressed.

To shift the transaxle from P (Park) or N

(Neutral) into R (Reverse):

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine or turn the ignition

switch to the ON position.

3. Move the shift lever.

If the brake pedal is repeatedly

depressed and released with the shift

lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering

noise near the shift lever may be heard.

This is a normal condition.

Shift-lock override

If the shift lever cannot be moved from

the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position into R

(Reverse) position with the brake pedal

depressed, continue depressing the

brake, then do the following:

1. Carefully remove the cap covering the

shift-lock override access hole.

2. Insert a screwdriver (or key) into the

access hole and press down on the

screwdriver (or key).

3. Move the shift lever.

4. Have your vehicle inspected by an

authorized KIA dealer immediately.

E060103AUN

Ignition key interlock system

The ignition key cannot be removed

unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)

position. If the ignition switch is in any

other position, the key cannot be

removed.

WARNING

Always fully depress the brake

pedal before and while shifting out

of the P (Park) position into anoth-

er position to avoid inadvertent

motion of the vehicle which could

injure persons in or around the car.

OUN036007

Driving your vehicle

125

E060200AUN

Good driving practices

• Never move the gear selector lever

from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to any

other position with the accelerator

pedal depressed.

• Never move the gear selector lever into

P (Park) when the vehicle is in motion.

• Be sure the car is completely stopped

before you attempt to shift into R

(Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Never take the car out of gear and

coast down a hill. This may be

extremely hazardous. Always leave the

car in gear when moving.

• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can

cause them to overheat and malfunc-

tion. Instead, when you are driving

down a long hill, slow down and shift to

a lower gear. When you do this, engine

braking will help slow the car.

• Slow down before shifting to a lower

gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may

not be engaged.

• Always use the parking brake. Do not

depend on placing the transaxle in P

(Park) to keep the car from moving.

• Exercise extreme caution when driving

on a slippery surface. Be especially

careful when braking, accelerating or

shifting gears. On a slippery surface,

an abrupt change in vehicle speed can

cause the drive wheels to lose traction

and the vehicle to go out of control.

• Optimum vehicle performance and

economy is obtained by smoothly

depressing and releasing the accelera-

tor pedal.

WARNING

• Always buckle-up! In a collision,

an unbelted occupant is signifi-

cantly more likely to be seriously

injured or killed than a properly

belted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when corner-

ing or turning.

• Do not make quick steering

wheel movements, such as sharp

lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly

increased if you lose control of

your vehicle at highway speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if

two or more wheels drop off the

roadway and the driver over-

steers to reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leaves

the roadway, do not steer sharply.

Instead, slow down before pulling

back into the travel lanes.

• Never exceed posted speed lim-

its.

513

Driving your vehicle

E060203AUN

Moving up a steep grade from a stand-

ing start

To move up a steep grade from a stand-

ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift

the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the

appropriate gear depending on load

weight and steepness of the grade, and

release the parking brake. Depress the

accelerator gradually while releasing the

service brakes.

When accelerating from a stop on a

steep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-

dency to roll backwards. Shifting the

shift lever into 2 (Second Gear) will

help prevent the vehicle from rolling

backwards.

WARNING

If your vehicle becomes stuck in

snow, mud, sand, etc., then you

may attempt to rock the vehicle free

by moving it forward and backward.

Do not attempt this procedure if

people or objects are anywhere

near the vehicle. During the rocking

operation the vehicle may suddenly

move forward of backward as it

becomes unstuck, causing injury

or damage to nearby people or

objects.

Driving your vehicle

145

E070100AUN

Power brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes

that adjust automatically through normal

usage.

In the event that the power-assisted

brakes lose power because of a stalled

engine or some other reason, you can

still stop your vehicle by applying greater

force to the brake pedal than you nor-

mally would. The stopping distance, how-

ever, will be longer.

When the engine is not running, the

reserve brake power is partially depleted

each time the brake pedal is applied. Do

not pump the brake pedal when the

power assist has been interrupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when neces-

sary to maintain steering control on slip-

pery surfaces.

E070101AUN

In the event of brake failure

If service brakes fail to operate while the

vehicle is in motion, you can make an

emergency stop with the parking brake.

The stopping distance, however, will be

much greater than normal.

BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING - Brakes

• Do not drive with your foot rest-

ing on the brake pedal. This will

create abnormal high brake tem-

peratures, excessive brake lining

and pad wear, and increased

stopping distances.

• When descending a long or steep

hill, shift to a lower gear and

avoid continuous application of

the brakes. Continuous brake

application will cause the brakes

to overheat and could result in a

temporary loss of braking per-

formance.

• Wet brakes may impair the vehi-

cle’s ability to sefely slow down;

the vehicle may also pull to one

side when the brakes are applied.

Applying the brakes lightly will

indicate whether they have been

affected in this way. Always test

your brakes in this fashion after

driving through deep water. To

dry the brakes, apply them lightly

while maintaining a safe forward

speed until brake performance

returns to normal.

WARNING - Parking brake

Applying the parking brake while

the vehicle is moving at normal

speeds can cause a sudden loss of

control of the vehicle. If you must

use the parking brake to stop the

vehicle, use great caution in apply-

ing the brake.

515

Driving your vehicle

E070102AUN

Disc brakes wear indicator

Your vehicle has disc brakes.

When your brake pads are worn and new

pads are required, you will hear a high-

pitched warning sound from your front

brakes or rear brakes. You may hear this

sound come and go or it may occur

whenever you depress the brake pedal.

Please remember that some driving con-

ditions or climates may cause a brake

squeal when you first apply (or lightly

apply) the brakes. This is normal and

does not indicate a problem with your

brakes. Parking brake

E070201AUN-EU

Applying the parking brake

To engage the parking brake, first apply

the foot brake and then depress the park-

ing brake pedal down as far as possible.

In addition it is recommended that when

parking the vehicle on an incline, the shift

lever should be in the P (Park) position.

WARNING - Brake wear

This brake wear warning sound

means your vehicle needs service.

If you ignore this audible warning,

you will eventually lose braking

performance, which could lead to a

serious accident.

CAUTION

• To avoid costly brake repairs, do

not continue to drive with worn

brake pads.

• Always replace brake pads as

complete front or rear axle sets.

CAUTION

Driving with the parking brake

applied will cause excessive brake

pad and brake rotor wear.

OUN036009

Driving your vehicle

165

E070202AUN-EU

Releasing the parking brake

To release the parking brake, depress

the parking brake pedal a second time

while applying the foot brake. The pedal

will automatically extend to the fully

released position. If the parking brake

pedal does not release or does not

release all the way, have the system

checked by an authorized KIA dealer.

Check the brake warning light by turning

the ignition switch ON (do not start the

engine). This light will be illuminated when

the parking brake is applied with the igni-

tion switch in the START or ON position.

Before driving, be sure the parking brake

is fully released and the brake warning

light is off.

If the brake warning light remains on after

the parking brake is released while engine

is running, there may be a malfunction in

the brake system. Immediate attention is

necessary.

If at all possible, cease driving the vehi-

cle immediately. If that is not possible,

use extreme caution while operating the

vehicle and only continue to drive the

vehicle until you can reach a safe loca-

tion or repair shop.

WARNING

• To prevent unintentional move-

ment when stopped and leaving

the vehicle, do not use the

gearshift lever in place of the

parking brake. Set the parking

brake AND make sure the

gearshift lever is securely posi-

tioned in P (Park) for automatic

transaxle equipped vehicles.

• Never allow anyone who is unfa-

miliar with the vehicle to touch

the parking brake. If the parking

brake is released unintentionally,

serious injury may occur.

• All vehicles should always have

the parking brake fully engaged

when parking to avoid inadver-

tent movement of the car which

can injure occupants or pedestri-

ans.

OUN037010 W-75

517

Driving your vehicle

E070300AUN-EC

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

The ABS continuously senses the speed

of the wheels. If the wheels are going to

lock, the ABS system repeatedly modu-

lates the hydraulic brake pressure to the

wheels.

When you apply your brakes under con-

ditions which may lock the wheels, you

may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the

brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation

in the brake pedal. This is normal and it

means your ABS is active.

In order to obtain the maximum benefit

from your ABS in an emergency situa-

tion, do not attempt to modulate your

brake pressure and do not try to pump

your brakes. Press your brake pedal as

hard as possible or as hard as the situa-

tion warrants and allow the ABS to con-

trol the force being delivered to the

brakes.

WARNING

ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-

dents due to improper or danger-

ous driving maneuvers. Even

though vehicle control is improved

during emergency braking, always

maintain a safe distance between

you and objects ahead. Vehicle

speeds should always be reduced

during extreme road conditions.

The braking distance for cars

equipped with an anti-lock braking

system (or Electronic Stability

Control System) may be longer

than for those without it in the fol-

lowing road conditions.

During these conditions the vehicle

should be driven at reduced

speeds:

• Rough, gravel or snow-covered

roads.

(Continued)

• On roads where the road surface

is pitted or has different surface

height.

The safety features of an ABS (or

ESC) equipped vehicle should not

be tested by high speed driving or

cornering. This could endanger the

safety of yourself or others.

Driving your vehicle

185

✽✽NOTICE

A click sound may be heard in the

engine compartment when the vehicle

begins to move after the engine is start-

ed. These conditions are normal and

indicate that the anti-lock brake system

is functioning properly.

• Even with the anti-lock brake system,

your vehicle still requires sufficient

stopping distance. Always maintain a

safe distance from the vehicle in front

of you.

• Always slow down when cornering.

The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-

vent accidents resulting from exces-

sive speeds.

• On loose or uneven road surfaces,

operation of the anti-lock brake system

may result in a longer stopping dis-

tance than for vehicles equipped with a

conventional brake system.

✽✽NOTICE

When you jump start your vehicle

because of a drained battery, the engine

may not run as smoothly and the ABS

warning light may turn on at the same

time. This happens because of the low

battery voltage. It does not mean your

ABS is malfunctioning.

• Do not pump your brakes!

• Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.

W-78

CAUTION

• If the ABS warning light is on and

stays on, you may have a problem

with the ABS. In this case, howev-

er, your regular brakes will work

normally.

• The ABS warning light will stay

on for approximately 3 seconds

after the ignition switch is ON.

During that time, the ABS will go

through self-diagnosis and the

light will go off if everything is

normal. If the light stays on, you

may have a problem with your

ABS. Contact an authorized KIA

dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION

• When you drive on a road having

poor traction, such as an icy road,

and operate your brakes continu-

ously, the ABS will be active con-

tinuously and the ABS warning

light may illuminate. Pull your car

over to a safe place and stop the

engine.

• Restart the engine. If the ABS

warning light is off, then your

ABS system is normal.

Otherwise, you may have a prob-

lem with the ABS. Contact an

authorized KIA dealer as soon as

possible.

519

Driving your vehicle

E070500AUN-EU

Electronic stability control (ESC)

(If equipped)

The Electronic Stability control (ESC)

system is designed to stabilize the vehicle

during cornering maneuvers. ESC checks

where you are steering and where the

vehicle is actually going. ESC applies the

brakes at individual wheels and

intervenes in the engine management

system to stabilize the vehicle.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

system is an electronic system designed

to help the driver maintain vehicle control

under adverse conditions. It is not a

substitute for safe driving practices.

Factors including speed, road conditions

and driver steering input can all affect

whether ESC will be effective in

preventing a loss of control. It is still your

responsibility to drive and corner at

reasonable speeds and to leave a

sufficient margin of safety.

When you apply your brakes under con-

ditions which may lock the wheels, you

may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the

brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation

in the brake pedal. This is normal and it

means your ESC is active.

✽✽NOTICE

A click sound may be heard in the

engine compartment when the vehicle

begins to move after the engine is start-

ed. These conditions are normal and

indicate that the Electronic Stability

Control System is functioning properly.

WARNING

Never drive too fast for the road

conditions or too quickly when cor-

nering. Electronic stability control

(ESC) will not prevent accidents.

Excessive speed in turns, abrupt

maneuvers and hydroplaning on

wet surfaces can still result in seri-

ous accidents. Only a safe and

attentive driver can prevent acci-

dents by avoiding maneuvers that

cause the vehicle to lose traction.

Even with ESC installed, always fol-

low all the normal precautions for

driving - including driving at safe

speeds for the conditions.

OUN037011N

Driving your vehicle

205

E070501AUN-EU

ESC operation

ESC ON condition

• When the ignition is turned

ON, ESC and ESC OFF indi-

cator lights illuminate for

approximately 3 seconds,

then ESC is turned on.

• Press the ESC OFF button

for at least half a second after

turning the ignition ON to turn

ESC off. (ESC OFF indicator

will illuminate). To turn the

ESC on, press the ESC OFF

button (ESC OFF indicator

light will go off).

• When starting the engine,

you may hear a slight ticking

sound. This is the ESC per-

forming an automatic system

self-check and does not indi-

cate a problem.

When operating

When the ESC is in operation,

ESC indicator light blinks.

• When the Electronic Stability

Control is operating properly,

you can feel a slight pulsation

in the vehicle. This is only the

effect of brake control and

indicates nothing unusual.

• When moving out of the mud

or slippery road, pressing the

accelerator pedal may not

cause the engine rpm (revo-

lutions per minute) to

increase.

E070502AUN-EU

ESC operation off

ESC OFF state

• To cancel ESC operation,

press the ESC OFF button

(ESC OFF indicator light illu-

minates).

• If the ignition switch is turned

to LOCK position when ESC

is off, ESC remains off. Upon

restarting the engine, the

ESC will automatically turn

on again.

ESC

OFF

521

Driving your vehicle

E070503AUN-EU

Indicator light

When ignition switch is turned to ON, the

indicator light illuminates, then goes off if

ESC system is operating normally.

The ESC indicator light blinks whenever

ESC is operating.

ESC OFF indicator light comes on when

either the ESC is turned off with the but-

ton, or ESC fails to operate when turned

on.

E070504AUN-EU

ESC OFF usage

When driving

• It’s a good idea to keep the ESC turned

on for daily driving whenever possible.

• To turn ESC off while driving, press the

ESC OFF button while driving on a flat

road surface.

Never press ESC OFF button while ESC

is operating (ESC indicator light blinks).

If ESC is turned off while ESC is operat-

ing, the vehicle may slip out of control.

✽✽NOTICE

• When operating the vehicle on a

dynamometer, ensure that the ESC is

turned off (ESC OFF light illuminat-

ed). If the ESC is left on, it may pre-

vent the vehicle speed from increas-

ing, and result in false diagnosis.

• Turning the ESC off does not affect

ABS or brake system operation.

ESC

OFF

■ESC indicator light (blinks)

■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)

CAUTION

Driving with varying tire or wheel

sizes may cause the ESC system to

malfunction. When replacing tires,

make sure they are the same size as

your original tires.

WARNING

The Electronic Stability Control sys-

tem is only a driving aid; use pre-

cautions for safe driving by slowing

down on curved, snowy, or icy

roads. Drive slowly and don’t

attempt to accelerate whenever the

ESC indicator light is blinking, or

when the road surface is slippery.

Driving your vehicle

225

E070600AUN-EU

Good braking practices

• After parking the vehicle, check to be

sure the parking brake is not engaged

and that the parking brake indicator

light is out before driving away.

• Driving through water may get the

brakes wet. They can also get wet

when the car is washed. Wet brakes

can be dangerous! Your car will not

stop as quickly if the brakes are wet.

Wet brakes may cause the car to pull

to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakes

lightly until the braking action returns to

normal, taking care to keep the car

under control at all times. If the braking

action does not return to normal, stop

as soon as it is safe to do so and call

an authorized KIA dealer for assis-

tance.

• Don't coast down hills with the car out

of gear. This is extremely hazardous.

Keep the car in gear at all times, use

the brakes to slow down, then shift to a

lower gear so that engine braking will

help you maintain a safe speed.

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting

your foot on the brake pedal while driv-

ing can be dangerous because it can

result in the brakes overheating and

losing their effectiveness. It also

increases the wear of the brake com-

ponents.

• If a tire goes flat while you are driving,

apply the brakes gently and keep the

car pointed straight ahead while you

slow down. When you are moving

slowly enough for it to be safe to do so,

pull off the road and stop in a safe

place.

WARNING

Never press the ESC OFF button

while ESC is operating.

If the ESC is turned off while ESC is

operating, the vehicle may go out of

control.

To turn ESC off while driving, press

the ESC OFF button while driving

on a flat road surface.

523

Driving your vehicle

• If your car is equipped with an auto-

matic transaxle, don't let your car

creep forward. To avoid creeping for-

ward, keep your foot firmly on the

brake pedal when the car is stopped.

• Use caution when parking on a hill.

Firmly engage the parking brake and

place the gear selector lever in P. If

your car is facing downhill, turn the

front wheels into the curb to help keep

the car from rolling. If your car is facing

uphill, turn the front wheels away from

the curb to help keep the car from

rolling. If there is no curb or if it is

required by other conditions to keep

the car from rolling, block the wheels.

• Under some conditions your parking

brake can freeze in the engaged posi-

tion. This is most likely to happen when

there is an accumulation of snow or ice

around or near the rear brakes or if the

brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the

parking brake may freeze, apply it only

temporarily while you put the gear

selector lever in P and block the rear

wheels so the car cannot roll. Then

release the parking brake.

• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade

with the accelerator pedal. This can

cause the transaxle to overheat.

Always use the brake pedal or parking

brake.

Driving your vehicle

245

E090000AUN-EU

The cruise control system allows you to

program the vehicle to maintain a con-

stant speed without pressing the acceler-

ator pedal.

This system is designed to function

above approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

✽✽NOTICE

During normal cruise control operation,

when the SET switch is activated or

reactivated after applying the brakes,

the cruise control will energize after

approximately 3 seconds. This delay is

normal.

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING

• If the cruise control is left on,

(CRUISE indicator light in the

instrument cluster illuminated)

the cruise control can be

switched on accidentally. Keep

the cruise control system off

(CRUISE indicator light OFF)

when the cruise control is not in

use, to avoid inadvertently set-

ting a speed.

• Use the cruise control system

only when traveling on open

highways in good weather.

(Continued)

• Do not use the cruise control

when it may not be safe to keep

the car at a constant speed, for

instance, driving in heavy or

varying traffic, or on slippery

(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or

winding roads or over 6% up-hill

or down-hill roads.

• Pay particular attention to the

driving conditions whenever

using the cruise control system.

525

Driving your vehicle

E090100AUN

To set cruise control speed:

1. Pull the CRUISE ON-OFF button on

the steering wheel to turn the system

on. The CRUISE indicator light in the

instrument cluster will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which

must be more than 40 km/h (25 mph).

3. Push the COAST/SET switch, and

release it at the desired speed. The SET

indicator light in the instrument cluster

will illuminate. Release the accelerator

at the same time. The desired speed will

automatically be maintained.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow

down or speed up slightly while going

downhill.

E090200AUN-EU

To increase cruise control set

speed:

Follow either of these procedures:

• Push the RES/ACCEL switch and hold

it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Release

the switch at the speed you want.

• Push the RES/ACCEL switch and

release it immediately. The cruising

speed will increase by 1.6 km/h (1 mph)

each time the RES/ACCEL switch is

operated in this manner.

OUN056101L OUN056102LOUN056100L

Driving your vehicle

265

E090300AUN-EU

To decrease the cruising speed:

Follow either of these procedures:

• Push the COAST/SET switch and hold

it. Your vehicle will gradually slow

down. Release the switch at the speed

you want to maintain.

• Push the COAST/SET switch and

release it immediately. The cruising

speed will decrease by 1.6 km/h (1

mph) each time the COAST/SET switch

is operated in this manner.

E090400AUN

To temporarily accelerate with the

cruise control on:

If you want to speed up temporarily when

the cruise control is on, depress the

accelerator pedal. Increased speed will

not interfere with cruise control operation

or change the set speed.

To return to the set speed, take your foot

off the accelerator.

E090500AUN-EU

To cancel cruise control, do one

of the following:

• Press the brake pedal.

• Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic

transaxle.

• Press the CANCEL switch located on

the steering wheel.

• Decrease the vehicle speed lower than

the memory speed by 20 km/h (12

mph).

• Decrease the vehicle speed to less

than approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

OUN056103LOUN056101L

527

Driving your vehicle

Each of these actions will cancel cruise

control operation (the SET indicator light

in the instrument cluster will go off), but it

will not turn the system off. If you wish to

resume cruise control operation, push

the RES/ACCEL switch located on your

steering wheel. You will return to your

previously preset speed.

E090600AUN

To resume cruising speed at

more than approximately 40 km/h

(25 mph):

If any method other than the CRUISE

ON-OFF switch was used to cancel

cruising speed and the system is still

activated, the most recent set speed will

automatically resume when the

RES/ACCEL switch is pushed.

It will not resume, however, if the vehicle

speed has dropped below approximately

40 km/h (25 mph).

E090700AUN

To turn cruise control off, do one

of the following:

• Pull the CRUISE ON-OFF button (the

CRUISE indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster will go off).

• Turn the ignition off.

Both of these actions cancel cruise con-

trol operation. If you want to resume

cruise control operation, repeat the steps

provided in “To set cruise control speed”

on the previous page.

OUN056102L

Driving your vehicle

285

E100000AUN-EC

Your vehicle's fuel economy depends

mainly on your style of driving, where you

drive and when you drive.

Each of these factors affects how many

kilometers (miles) you can get from a

liter (gallon) of fuel. To operate your vehi-

cle as economically as possible, use the

following driving suggestions to help

save money in both fuel and repairs:

• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moder-

ate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts

or full-throttle shifts and maintain a

steady cruising speed. Don't race

between stoplights. Try to adjust your

speed to that of the other traffic so you

don't have to change speeds unneces-

sarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever

possible. Always maintain a safe dis-

tance from other vehicles so you can

avoid unnecessary braking. This also

reduces brake wear.

• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster

you drive, the more fuel your car uses.

Driving at a moderate speed, especial-

ly on the highway, is one of the most

effective ways to reduce fuel consump-

tion.

• Don't "ride" the brake. This can

increase fuel consumption and also

increase wear on these components.

In addition, driving with your foot rest-

ing on the brake pedal may cause the

brakes to overheat, which reduces

their effectiveness and may lead to

more serious consequences.

• Take care of your tires. Keep them

inflated to the recommended pressure.

Incorrect inflation, either too much or

too little, results in unnecessary tire

wear. Check the tire pressures at least

once a month.

• Be sure that the wheels are aligned

correctly. Improper alignment can

result from hitting curbs or driving too

fast over irregular surfaces. Poor align-

ment causes faster tire wear and may

also result in other problems as well as

greater fuel consumption.

• Keep your car in good condition. For

better fuel economy and reduced

maintenance costs, maintain your car

in accordance with the maintenance

schedule in section 7. If you drive your

car in severe conditions, more frequent

maintenance is required (see section 7

for details).

• Keep your car clean. For maximum

service, your vehicle should be kept

clean and free of corrosive materials. It

is especially important that mud, dirt,

ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate

on the underside of the car. This extra

weight can result in increased fuel con-

sumption and also contribute to corro-

sion.

• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary

weight in your car. Weight reduces fuel

economy.

• Don't let the engine idle longer than

necessary. If you are waiting (and not

in traffic), turn off your engine and

restart only when you're ready to go.

ECONOMICAL OPERATION

529

Driving your vehicle

• Remember, your vehicle does not

require extended warm-up. After the

engine has started, allow the engine to

run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to plac-

ing the vehicle in gear. In very cold

weather, however, give your engine a

slightly longer warm-up period.

• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.

Lugging is driving too slowly in too high

a gear resulting in the engine bucking.

If this happens, shift to a lower gear.

Over-revving is racing the engine

beyond its safe limit. This can be avoid-

ed by shifting at the recommended

speeds.

• Use your air conditioning sparingly.

The air conditioning system is operat-

ed by engine power so your fuel econ-

omy is reduced when you use it.

• Open windows at high speeds can

reduce fuel economy.

• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds

and headwinds. To help offset some of

this loss, slow down when driving in

these conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-

dition is important both for economy and

safety. Therefore, have an authorized KIA

dealer perform scheduled inspections

and maintenance.

WARNING - Engine off dur-

ing motion

Never turn the engine off to coast

down hills or anytime the vehicle is

in motion. The power steering and

power brakes will not function

properly without the engine run-

ning. Instead, keep the engine on

and downshift to an appropriate

gear for engine braking effect. In

addition, turning off the ignition

while driving could engage the

steering wheel lock resulting in

loss of vehicle steering which

could cause serious injury or

death.

Driving your vehicle

305

E110100AUN-EC

Hazardous driving conditions

When hazardous driving conditions are

encountered such as water, snow, ice,

mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow

these suggestions:

• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-

tance for braking.

• Avoid sudden movements in braking or

steering.

• When braking with non-ABS brakes

pump the brake pedal with a light up-

and-down motion until the vehicle is

stopped.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use

second gear. Accelerate slowly to

avoid spinning the drive wheels.

• Use sand, rock salt, or other non-slip

material under the drive wheels to pro-

vide traction when stalled in ice, snow,

or mud.

E110200AUN-EU

Rocking the vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free

it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the

steering wheel right and left to clear the

area around your front wheels. Then, shift

back and forth between R (Reverse) and

any forward gear in vehicles equipped

with an automatic transaxle. Do not race

the engine, and spin the wheels as little

as possible. If you are still stuck after a

few tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a

tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating

and possible damage to the transaxle.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

1VQA3002

WARNING - ABS

Do not pump the brake pedal on a

vehicle equipped with ABS.

WARNING - Downshifting

Downshifting with an automatic

transaxle, while driving on slippery

surfaces can cause an accident.

The sudden change in tire speed

could cause the tires to skid. Be

careful when downshifting on slip-

pery surfaces.

CAUTION

Prolonged rocking may cause

engine over-heating, transaxle dam-

age or failure, and tire damage.

531

Driving your vehicle

✽✽NOTICE

The ESC system (if equipped) should be

turned OFF prior to rocking the vehicle. E110300AUN

Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in cor-

ners, especially when roads are wet.

Ideally, corners should always be taken

under gentle acceleration. If you follow

these suggestions, tire wear will be held

to a minimum.

E110400AUN

Driving at night

Because night driving presents more

hazards than driving in the daylight, here

are some important tips to remember:

• Slow down and keep more distance

between you and other vehicles, as it

may be more difficult to see at night,

especially in areas where there may

not be any street lights.

WARNING - Spinning tires

Do not spin the wheels, especially

at speeds more than 56 km/h (35

mph). Spinning the wheels at high

speeds when the vehicle is station-

ary could cause a tire to overheat

which could result in tire damage

that may injure bystanders.

OUN056051 OCM053010

WARNING

If your vehicle becomes stuck in

snow, mud, sand, etc., then you

may attempt to rock the vehicle free

by moving it forward and backward.

Do not attempt this procedure if

people or objects are anywhere

near the vehicle. During the rocking

operation the vehicle may suddenly

move forward or backward as it

becomes unstuck, causing injury

or damage to nearby people or

objects.

Driving your vehicle

325

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare

from other driver's headlights.

• Keep your headlights clean and prop-

erly aimed on vehicles not equipped

with the automatic headlight aiming

feature. Dirty or improperly aimed

headlights will make it much more diffi-

cult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the headlights

of oncoming vehicles. You could be

temporarily blinded, and it will take

several seconds for your eyes to read-

just to the darkness.

E110500AUN

Driving in the rain

Rain and wet roads can make driving

dangerous, especially if you’re not pre-

pared for the slick pavement. Here are a

few things to consider when driving in the

rain:

• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to

see and will increase the distance

needed to stop your vehicle, so slow

down.

• Keep your windshield wiping equip-

ment in good shape. Replace your

windshield wiper blades when they

show signs of streaking or missing

areas on the windshield.

• If your tires are not in good condition,

making a quick stop on wet pavement

can cause a skid and possibly lead to

an accident. Be sure your tires are in

good shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-

ier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large puddles

can affect your brakes. If you must go

through puddles, try to drive through

them slowly.

• If you believe you may have gotten

your brakes wet, apply them lightly

while driving until normal braking oper-

ation returns.

E110600AUN

Driving in flooded areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas

unless you are sure the water is no high-

er than the bottom of the wheel hub.

Drive through any water slowly. Allow

adequate stopping distance because

brake performance may be affected.

After driving through water, dry the

brakes by gently applying them several

times while the vehicle is moving slowly.

1VQA3003

533

Driving your vehicle

E110700AUN

Highway driving

Tires

Adjust the tire inflation pressures to

specification. Low tire inflation pressures

will result in overheating and possible

failure of the tires.

Avoid using worn or damaged tires which

may result in reduced traction or tire fail-

ure.

✽✽NOTICE

Never exceed the maximum tire inflation

pressure shown on the tires.

Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil

High speed travel consumes more fuel

than urban motoring. Do not forget to

check both engine coolant and engine

oil.

Drive belt

A loose or damaged drive belt may result

in overheating of the engine.

WARNING

• Underinflated or overinflated

tires can cause poor handling,

loss of vehicle control, and sud-

den tire failure leading to acci-

dents, injuries, and even death.

Always check tires for proper

inflation before driving. For prop-

er tire pressures, refer to “Tires

and wheels” in section 9.

• Driving on tires with no or insuffi-

cient tread is dangerous. Worn-

out tires can result in loss of

vehicle control, collisions, injury,

and even death. Worn-out tires

should be replaced as soon as

possible and should never be

used for driving. Always check

the tire tread before driving your

car. For further information and

tread limits, refer to “Tires and

wheels” in section 7.

1VQA1004

Driving your vehicle

345

E120000AUN

The more severe weather conditions of

winter result in greater wear and other

problems. To minimize the problems of

winter driving, you should follow these

suggestions:

E120100AUN-EC

Snowy or icy conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may

be necessary to use snow tires. If snow

tires are needed, it is necessary to select

tires equivalent in size and type of the

original equipment tires. Failure to do so

may adversely affect the safety and han-

dling of your car. Furthermore, speeding,

rapid acceleration, sudden brake appli-

cations, and sharp turns are potentially

very hazardous practices.

During deceleration, use engine braking

to the fullest extent. Sudden brake appli-

cations on snowy or icy roads may cause

skids to occur. You need to keep suffi-

cient distance between the vehicle in

operation in front and your vehicle. Also,

apply the brake gently.

E120101AUN

Snow tires

If you mount snow tires on your vehicle,

make sure they are radial tires of the

same size and load range as the original

tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels

to balance your vehicle’s handling in all

weather conditions. Keep in mind that the

traction provided by snow tires on dry

roads may not be as high as your vehi-

cle's original equipment tires. You should

drive cautiously even when the roads are

clear. Check with the tire dealer for max-

imum speed recommendations.

Do not install studded tires without first

checking local, state and municipal regu-

lations for possible restrictions against

their use.

WINTER DRIVING

WARNING - Snow tire size

Snow tires should be equivalent in

size and type to the vehicle's stan-

dard tires. Otherwise, the safety

and handling of your vehicle may

be adversely affected.

1VQA3005

535

Driving your vehicle

E120200AUN

Use high quality ethylene glycol

coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high quality

ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling

system. It is the only type of coolant that

should be used because it helps prevent

corrosion in the cooling system, lubri-

cates the water pump and prevents

freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish

your coolant in accordance with the

maintenance schedule in section 7.

Before winter, have your coolant tested to

assure that its freezing point is sufficient

for the temperatures anticipated during

the winter.

E120300AUN

Check battery and cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the

battery system. Visually inspect the bat-

tery and cables as described in section

7. The level of charge in your battery can

be checked by an authorized KIA dealer

or a service station.

E120400AUN

Change to "winter weight" oil if

necessary

In some climates it is recommended that

a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be

used during cold weather. See section 9

for recommendations. If you aren't sure

what weight oil you should use, consult

an authorized KIA dealer.

E120500AUN

Check spark plugs and ignition

system

Inspect your spark plugs as described in

section 7 and replace them if necessary.

Also check all ignition wiring and compo-

nents to be sure they are not cracked,

worn or damaged in any way.

E120600AUN

To keep locks from freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an

approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into

the key opening. If a lock is covered with

ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing

fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is

frozen internally, you may be able to thaw

it out by using a heated key. Handle the

heated key with care to avoid injury.

E120700AUN

Use approved window washer

anti-freeze in system

To keep the water in the window washer

system from freezing, add an approved

window washer anti-freeze solution in

accordance with instructions on the con-

tainer. Window washer anti-freeze is

available from an authorized KIA dealer

and most auto parts outlets. Do not use

engine coolant or other types of anti-

freeze as these may damage the paint

finish.

Driving your vehicle

365

E120800AUN-EU

Don't let your parking brake

freeze

Under some conditions your parking

brake can freeze in the engaged position.

This is most likely to happen when there

is an accumulation of snow or ice around

or near the rear brakes or if the brakes

are wet. If there is a risk the parking

brake may freeze, apply it only temporar-

ily while you put the gear selector lever in

P and block the rear wheels so the car

cannot roll. Then release the parking

brake.

E120900AUN

Don't let ice and snow accumu-

late underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice

can build up under the fenders and inter-

fere with the steering. When driving in

severe winter conditions where this may

happen, you should periodically check

underneath the car to be sure the move-

ment of the front wheels and the steering

components is not obstructed.

E121000AUN-EC

Carry emergency equipment

Depending on the severity of the weath-

er where you drive your car, you should

carry appropriate emergency equipment.

Some of the items you may want to carry

include tow straps or chains, flashlight,

emergency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper

cables, a window scraper, gloves, ground

cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

537

Driving your vehicle

E140000AUN-EC

If you are considering towing with with

your car, you should first check with your

contries. Department of Motor Vehicles to

determine their legal requirements.

Since laws vary from province to province

the requirements for towing trailers, cars,

or other types of vehicles or apparatus

may differ. Ask an authorized KIA dealer

for further details before towing.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify

what the vehicle trailering capacity is for

your vehicle, you should read the infor-

mation in “Weight of the trailer” that

appears later in this section.

Remember that trailering is different than

just driving your vehicle by itself.

Trailering means changes in handling,

durability, and fuel economy. Successful,

safe trailering requires correct equip-

ment, and it has to be used properly.

This section contains many time-tested,

important trailering tips and safety rules.

Many of these are important for your

safety and that of your passengers.

Please read this section carefully before

you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the

engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and

tires are forced to work harder against

the load of the added weight. The engine

is required to operate at relatively higher

speeds and under greater loads. This

additional burden generates extra heat.

The trailer also adds considerably to

wind resistance, increasing the pulling

requirements.

TRAILER TOWING

WARNING - Towing a trail-

If you don't use the correct equip-

ment and drive improperly, you can

lose control when you pull a trailer.

For example, if the trailer is too

heavy, the brakes may not work

well - or even at all. You and your

passengers could be seriously or

fatally injured. Pull a trailer only if

you have followed all the steps in

this section.

WARNING - Weight limits

Before towing, make sure the total

trailer weight, gross combination

weight, gross vehicle weight, gross

axle weight and trailer tongue load

are all within the limits.

CAUTION

Pulling a trailer improperly can

damage your vehicle and result in

costly repairs not covered by your

warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,

follow the advice in this section.

Driving your vehicle

385

E140100AUN

Hitches

It's important to have the correct hitch

equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks

going by, and rough roads are a few rea-

sons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here

are some rules to follow:

• Will you have to make any holes in the

body of your vehicle when you install a

trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to

seal the holes later when you remove

the hitch.

If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon

monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can

get into your vehicle, as well as dirt and

water.

• The bumpers on your vehicle are not

intended for hitches. Do not attach

rental hitches or other bumper-type

hitches to them. Use only a frame-

mounted hitch that does not attach to

the bumper.

E140200AUN

Safety chains

You should always attach chains

between your vehicle and your trailer.

Cross the safety chains under the tongue

of the trailer so that the tongue will not

drop to the road if it becomes separated

from the hitch.

Instructions about safety chains may be

provided by the hitch manufacturer or by

the trailer manufacturer. Follow the man-

ufacturer’s recommendation for attaching

safety chains. Always leave just enough

slack so you can turn with your trailer.

And, never allow safety chains to drag on

the ground.

E140300AUN-EU

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking

system, make sure it conforms to federal

and/or local regulations and that it is

properly installed and operating correctly.

If your trailer weighs more than the max-

imum trailer weight without trailer brakes

loaded, then it needs its own brakes and

they must be adequate. Be sure to read

and follow the instructions for the trailer

brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust

and maintain them properly.

• Don’t tap into your vehicle's brake sys-

tem.

WARNING - Trailer brakes

Do not use a trailer with its own

brakes unless you are absolutely

certain that you have properly set

up the brake system. This is not a

task for amateurs. Use an experi-

enced, competent trailer shop for

this work.

539

Driving your vehicle

E140400AUN

Driving with a trailer

Towing a trailer requires a certain

amount of experience. Before setting out

for the open road, you must get to know

your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the

feel of handling and braking with the

added weight of the trailer. And always

keep in mind that the vehicle you are

driving is now a good deal longer and not

nearly so responsive as your vehicle is

by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer hitch

and platform, safety chains, electrical

connector(s), lights, tires and mirror

adjustment. If the trailer has electric

brakes, start your vehicle and trailer mov-

ing and then apply the trailer brake con-

troller by hand to be sure the brakes are

working. This lets you check your electri-

cal connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be

sure that the load is secure, and that the

lights and any trailer brakes are still work-

ing.

E140401AUN

Following distance

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehi-

cle ahead as you would when driving

your vehicle without a trailer. This can

help you avoid situations that require

heavy braking and sudden turns.

E140402AUN

Passing

You’ll need more passing distance up

ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And,

because of the increased vehicle length,

you’ll need to go much farther beyond the

passed vehicle before you can return to

your lane.

E140403AUN

Backing up

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel

with one hand. Then, to move the trailer

to the left, just move your hand to the left.

To move the trailer to the right, move your

hand to the right. Always back up slowly

and, if possible, have someone guide

you.

E140404AUN

Making turns

When you’re turning with a trailer, make

wider turns than normal. Do this so your

trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs,

road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid

jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well

in advance.

E140405AUN

Turn signals when towing a trailer

When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has

to have a different turn signal flasher and

extra wiring. The green arrows on your

instrument panel will flash whenever you

signal a turn or lane change. Properly

connected, the trailer lights will also flash

to alert other drivers you’re about to turn,

change lanes, or stop.

When towing a trailer, the green arrows

on your instrument panel will flash for

turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are

burned out. Thus, you may think drivers

behind you are seeing your signals

when, in fact, they are not. It’s important

to check occasionally to be sure the trail-

er bulbs are still working. You must also

check the lights every time you discon-

nect and then reconnect the wires.

Do not connect a trailer lighting system

directly to your vehicle’s lighting system.

Use only an approved trailer wiring har-

ness.

Driving your vehicle

405

An authorized KIA dealer can assist you

in installing the wiring harness.

E140406AUN

Driving on grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear

before you start down a long or steep

downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you

might have to use your brakes so much

that they would get hot and no longer

operate efficiently.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and

reduce your speed to around 70 km/h (45

mph) to reduce the possibility of engine

and transaxle overheating.

If your trailer weighs more than the max-

imum trailer weight without trailer brakes

and you have an automatic transaxle,

you should drive in D (Drive) when tow-

ing a trailer.

Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) when

towing a trailer will minimize heat build up

and extend the life of your transaxle.

E140407AUN-EU

Parking on hills

Generally, you should not park your vehi-

cle with a trailer attached on a hill. People

can be seriously or fatally injured, and

both your vehicle and the trailer can be

damaged if they begin a downhill trajec-

tory.

However, if you ever have to park your

trailer on a hill, here’s how to do it:

1. Apply your brakes, but don’t shift into

gear.

2. Have someone place chocks under

the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place,

release the brakes until the chocks

absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brakes. Apply your park-

ing brake, and then shift to P (Park) for

an automatic transaxle.

5. Release the brakes.

CAUTION

• When towing a trailer on steep

grades (in excess of 6%) pay

close attention to the engine

coolant temperature gauge to

ensure the engine does not over-

heat. If the needle of the coolant

temperature gauge moves across

the dial towards “H” (HOT), pull

over and stop as soon as it is safe

to do so, and allow the engine to

idle until it cools down. You may

proceed once the engine has

cooled sufficiently.

• You must decide driving speed

depending on trailer weight and

uphill grade to reduce the possi-

bility of engine and transaxle

overheating.

WARNING

Failure to use an approved trailer

wiring harness could result in dam-

age to the vehicle electrical system

and/or personal injury.

WARNING - Parking on a

hill

Parking your vehicle on a hill with a

trailer attached could cause seri-

ous injury or death should the trail-

er break lose.

541

Driving your vehicle

When you are ready to leave after park-

ing on a hill

1. With the automatic transaxle in P

(Park), apply your brakes and hold the

brake pedal down while you:

• Start your engine;

• Shift into gear; and

• Release the parking brake.

2. Slowly remove your foot from the

brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of

the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and

store the chocks.

E140500AUN

Maintenance when trailer towing

Your vehicle will need service more often

when you regularly pull a trailer.

Important items to pay particular atten-

tion to include engine oil, automatic

transaxle fluid, axle lubricant and cooling

system fluid. Brake condition is another

important item to frequently check. Each

item is covered in this manual, and the

Index will help you find them quickly. If

you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review

these sections before you start your trip.

Don’t forget to also maintain your trailer

and hitch. Follow the maintenance

schedule that accompanied your trailer

and check it periodically. Preferably, con-

duct the check at the start of each day’s

driving. Most importantly, all hitch nuts

and bolts should be tight.

WARNING - Parking brake

It can be dangerous to get out of

your vehicle if the parking brake is

not firmly set.

If you have left the engine running,

the vehicle can move suddenly. You

or others could be seriously or

fatally injured.

CAUTION

• Due to higher load during trailer

usage, overheating might occur

in hot days or during uphill driv-

ing. If the coolant gauge indicates

over-heating, switch off the A/C

and stop the vehicle in a safe area

to cool down the engine.

• When towing check transaxle

fluid more frequently.

• If your vehicle is not equipped

with the air conditioner, you

should install a condenser fan to

improve engine performance

when towing a trailer.

Driving your vehicle

425

E140600AUN-EU

If you do decide to pull a trailer

Here are some important points if you

decide to pull a trailer:

• Consider using a sway control.You can

ask a hitch dealer about sway control.

• Do not do any towing with your car dur-

ing its first 2,000 km (1,200 miles) in

order to allow the engine to properly

break in. Failure to heed this caution

may result in serious engine or

transaxle damage.

• When towing a trailer, be sure to con-

sult an authorized KIA dealer for fur-

ther information on additional require-

ments such as a towing kit, etc.

• Always drive your vehicle at a moder-

ate speed (less than 100 km/h / 60

mph).

• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed

70 km/h (45 mph) or the posted towing

speed limit, whichever is lower.

• The chart contains important consider-

ations that have to do with weight:

Item 2.4L 2.7L

454 (1000) 454 (1000)

680 (1500) 907 (2000)

68 (150) 91 (200)

Maximum trailer

weight

Maximum permissible static vertical load

on the coupling device

Without brake System

With brake System

kg (lbs.)

543

Driving your vehicle

E140601AUN

Weight of the trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be? It

should never weigh more than the maxi-

mum trailer weight with trailer brakes. But

even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your

trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road

grades, outside temperature and how

often your vehicle is used to pull a trailer

are all important. The ideal trailer weight

can also depend on any special equip-

ment that you have on your vehicle.

E140602AEN

Weight of the trailer tongue

The tongue load of any trailer is an

important weight to measure because it

affects the total gross vehicle weight

(GVW) of your vehicle. This weight

includes the curb weight of the vehicle,

any cargo you may carry in it, and the

people who will be riding in the vehicle.

And if you will tow a trailer, you must add

the tongue load to the GVW because

your vehicle will also be carrying that

weight.

The trailer tongue should weigh a maxi-

mum of 10% of the total loaded trailer

weight, within the limits of the maximum

trailer tongue load permissible. After

you've loaded your trailer, weigh the trail-

er and then the tongue, separately, to

see if the weights are proper. If they

aren’t, you may be able to correct them

simply by moving some items around in

the trailer.

C190E01JM

Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight

WARNING - Trailer

• Never load a trailer with more

weight in the rear than in the

front. The front should be loaded

with approximately 60% of the

total trailer load; the rear should

be loaded with approximately 40%

of the total trailer load.

• Never exceed the maximum

weight limits of the trailer or trail-

er towing equipment. Improper

loading can result in damage to

your vehicle and/or personal

injury. Check weights and loading

at a commercial scale or highway

patrol office equipped with scales.

• An improperly loaded trailer can

cause loss of vehicle control.

C190E02JM

Gross Axle Weight

Gross Vehicle Weight

Driving your vehicle

445

E150100AUN

Tire and loading information label

The label located on the driver's door

sill gives the original tire size, cold

tire pressures recommended for your

vehicle, the number of people that

can be in your vehicle and vehicle

capacity weight.

E150101AUN

Vehicle capacity weight:

■5-seater:

375 kg (827 lbs.)

■7-seater:

525 kg (1157 lbs.)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-

mum combined weight of occupants

and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped

with a trailer, the combined weight

includes the tongue load.

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

OUN086203N

OUN086204N

■5-seater

OUN086200N

OUN086201N

■7-seater

545

Driving your vehicle

E150102AUN

Seating capacity:

■5-seater:

Total : 5 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons,

Rear seat : 3 persons)

■7-seater:

Total : 7 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons,

Rear seat : 5 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum

number of occupants including a

driver, your vehicle may carry.

However, the seating capacity may

be reduced based upon the weight of

all of the occupants, and the weight

of the cargo being carried or towed.

Do not overload the vehicle as there

is a limit to the total weight, or load

limit including occupants and cargo,

the vehicle can carry.

E150103AUN

Towing capacity:

■2.4L engine:

Without trailer brakes:

454 kg (1000 lbs)

With trailer brakes:

680 kg (1500 lbs)

■2.7L engine:

Without trailer brakes:

454 kg (1000 lbs)

With trailer brakes:

907 kg (2000 lbs)

Towing capacity is the maximum

trailer weight including its cargo

weight, your vehicle can tow.

E150104AUN

Cargo capacity:

The cargo capacity of your vehicle

will increase or decrease depending

on the weight and the number of

occupants and the tongue load, if

your vehicle is equipped with a trail-

er.

E150105AUN

Steps for determining correct load

limit

1. Locate the statement "The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's

placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will

be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and lug-

gage load capacity. For example, if

the "XXX" amount equals 635 kg

(1400 lbs.), and there will be five

68 kg (150 lbs.) passengers in

your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load

capacity is 295 kg (650 lbs.).

(635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg or

1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

Driving your vehicle

465

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded

on the vehicle. That weight may

not safely exceed the available

cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your

vehicle.

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific informa-

tion about your vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The com-

bined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your

vehicle's capacity weight.

C190F01JM

Item Description Total

AVehicle Capacity 635 kg

Weight (1400 lbs)

Subtract Occupant

B Weight 136 kg

68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 (300 lbs)

Available Cargo and

499 kg

Luggage weight (1100 lbs)

Example 1

ABC

C190F02JM

Item Description Total

AVehicle Capacity 635 kg

Weight (1400 lbs)

Subtract Occupant

B Weight 340 kg

68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 (750 lbs)

Available Cargo and

295 kg

Luggage weight (650 lbs)

ABC

Example 2

547

Driving your vehicle

E150200AUN

Certification label

The certification label is located on

the driver's door sill at the center pil-

lar.

This label shows the maximum

allowable weight of the fully loaded

vehicle. This is called the GVWR

(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The

GVWR includes the weight of the

vehicle, all occupants, fuel and

cargo.

This label also tells you the maxi-

mum weight that can be supported

by the front and rear axles, called

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

To find out the actual loads on your

front and rear axles, you need to go

to a weigh station and weigh your

vehicle.Your dealer can help you with

this. Be sure to spread out your load

equally on both sides of the center-

line.

WARNING - Over loading

• Never exceed the GVWR for

your vehicle, the GAWR for

either the front or rear axle

and vehicle capacity weight.

Exceeding these ratings can

cause an accident or vehicle

damage. You can calculate the

weight of your load by weigh-

ing the items (or people)

before putting them in the

vehicle. Be careful not to over-

load your vehicle.

(Continued)

C190F03JM

Item Description Total

AVehicle Capacity 635 kg

Weight (1400 lbs)

Subtract Occupant

B Weight 390 kg

78 kg (172 lbs) × 5 (860 lbs)

Available Cargo and

245 kg

Luggage weight (540 lbs)

ABC

Example 3

Driving your vehicle

485

The label will help you decide how

much cargo and installed equipment

your vehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle

- like suitcases, tools, packages, or

anything else - they are moving as

fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop

or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,

the items will keep going and can

cause an injury if they strike the driv-

er or a passenger.

(Continued)

• Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR, either

the maximum front or rear

GAWR and vehicle capacity

weight. If you do, parts,

including tires on your vehicle

can break, and it can change

the way your vehicle handles

and braking ability. This could

cause you to lose control and

crash. Also, overloading can

shorten the life of your vehi-

cle.

WARNING

• Overloading your vehicle can

cause heat buildup in your

vehicle's tires and possible

tire failure that could lead to a

crash.

• Overloading your vehicle can

cause increased stopping dis-

tances that could lead to a

crash.

• A crash resulting from poor

handling vehicle damage, tire

failure, or increased stopping

distances could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

WARNING - Loose cargo

Items you carry inside your

vehicle can strike and injure

occupants in a sudden stop or

turn, or in a crash.

• Put items in the cargo area of

your vehicle. Try to spread the

weight evenly.

• Never stack items, like suit-

cases, inside the vehicle

above the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured

child restraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something

inside the vehicle, secure it.

• Do not drive with a seat folded

down unless necessary.

CAUTION

• Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs would

not be covered by your warran-

ty. Do not overload your vehicle.

• Using heavier suspension com-

ponents to get added durability

might not change your weight

ratings. Ask your dealer to help

you load your vehicle the right

way.

549

Driving your vehicle

E160000AUN

This section will guide you in the proper

loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to

keep your loaded vehicle weight within its

design rating capability, with or without a

trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will

provide maximum return of the vehicle

design performance. Before loading your

vehicle, familiarize yourself with the fol-

lowing terms for determining your vehi-

cle's weight ratings, with or without a

trailer, from the vehicle's specifications

and the certification label:

E160100AUN

Base curb weight

This is the weight of the vehicle including

a full tank of fuel and all standard equip-

ment. It does not include passengers,

cargo, or optional equipment.

E160200AUN

Vehicle curb weight

This is the weight of your new vehicle

when you picked it up from your dealer

plus any aftermarket equipment.

E160300AUN

Cargo weight

This figure includes all weight added to

the Base Curb Weight, including cargo

and optional equipment.

E160400AUN

GAW (Gross axle weight)

This is the total weight placed on each

axle (front and rear) - including vehicle

curb weight and all payload.

E160500AUN

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight

that can be carried by a single axle (front

or rear). These numbers are shown on

the certification label.

The total load on each axle must never

exceed its GAWR.

E160600AUN

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)

This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual

Cargo Weight plus passengers.

E160700AUN-EU

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight of

the fully loaded vehicle (including all

options, equipment, passengers and

cargo). The GVWR is shown on the cer-

tification label located on the driver’s

door sill.

VEHICLE WEIGHT

Road warning / 6-2

In case of an emergency while driving / 6-2

If the engine will not start / 6-3

Emergency starting / 6-4

If the engine overheats / 6-6

If you have a flat tire / 6-7

Towing / 6-18

What to do in an emergency

ROAD WARNING

F010100AUN

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher serves as a

warning to other drivers to exercise

extreme caution when approaching,

overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emergency

repairs are being made or when the vehi-

cle is stopped near the edge of a road-

way.

Depress the flasher switch with the igni-

tion switch in any position. The flasher

switch is located in the center console

switch panel. All turn signal lights will

flash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher operates

whether your vehicle is running or not.

• The turn signals do not work when the

hazard flasher is on.

• Care must be taken when using the

hazard warning flasher while the vehi-

cle is being towed.

F020100AUN-EU

If the engine stalls at a crossroad

or crossing

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or

crossing, set the shift lever in the N

(Neutral) position and then push the vehi-

cle to a safe place.

F020200AUN-EU

If you have a flat tire while driving

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal

and let the car slow down while driving

straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes

immediately or attempt to pull off the

road as this may cause a loss of con-

trol. When the car has slowed to such

a speed that it is safe to do so, brake

carefully and pull off the road. Drive off

the road as far as possible and park on

firm, level ground. If you are on a divid-

ed highway, do not park in the median

area between the two traffic lanes.

2.When the car is stopped, turn on your

emergency hazard flashers, set the

parking brake and put the transaxle in

3.Have all passengers get out of the car.

Be sure they all get out on the side of

the car that is away from traffic.

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

WHILE DRIVING

OUN027218N

What to do in an emergency

4.When changing a flat tire, follow the

instruction provided later in this sec-

tion.

F020300AUN

If engine stalls while driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping

a straight line. Move cautiously off the

road to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Try to start the engine again. If your

vehicle will not start, contact an

authorized KIA dealer or seek other

qualified assistance.

F030100AUN

If engine doesn't turn over or

turns over slowly

1. If your car has an automatic transaxle,

be sure the gear selector lever is in N

(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emer-

gency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections to be

sure they are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the light

dims or goes out when you operate the

starter, the battery is discharged.

4. Check the starter connections to be

sure they are securely tightened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start

it. See instructions for "Jump starting".

F030200AUN

If engine turns over normally but

does not start

1. Check fuel level.

2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK

position, check all connectors at igni-

tion, coil and spark plugs. Reconnect

any that may be disconnected or

loose.

3. Check the fuel line in the engine com-

partment.

4. If the engine still does not start, call an

authorized KIA dealer or seek other

qualified assistance.

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

WARNING

If the engine will not start, do not

push or pull the car to start it. This

could result in a collision or cause

other damage. In addition, push or

pull starting may cause the catalyt-

ic converter to be overloaded and

create a fire hazard.

What to do in an emergency

EMERGENCY STARTING

F040000AUN

F040100AUN

Jump starting

Jump starting can be dangerous if done

incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to

yourself or damage to your vehicle or

battery, follow the jump starting proce-

dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-

mend that you have a competent techni-

cian or towing service jump start your

vehicle.

CAUTION

Use only a 12-volt jumper system.

You can damage a 12-volt starting

motor, ignition system, and other

electrical parts beyond repair by

use of a 24-volt power supply (either

two 12-volt batteries in series or a

24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING - Battery

Never attempt to check the elec-

trolyte level of the battery as this

may cause the battery to rupture or

explode causing serious injury.

1VQA4001

Connect cables in numerical order and

disconnect in reverse order.

Discharged battery

Jumper Cables

Booster battery

(-)

(+)

(-)

What to do in an emergency

F040101AUN

Jump starting procedure

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-

volt and that its negative terminal is

grounded.

2. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to

touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical

loads.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact

sequence shown in the illustration.

First connect one end of a jumper

cable to the positive terminal of the

discharged battery (1), then connect

the other end to the positive terminal

on the booster battery (2).

Proceed to connect one end of the

other jumper cable to the negative ter-

minal of the booster battery (3), then

the other end to a solid, stationary,

metallic point (for example, the engine

lifting bracket) away from the battery

(4). Do not connect it to or near any

part that moves when the engine is

cranked.

Do not allow the jumper cables to con-

tact anything except the correct battery

terminals or the correct ground. Do not

lean over the battery when making

connections.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and let it run at 2,000

rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-

cle with the discharged battery.

If the cause of your battery discharging is

not apparent, you should have your vehi-

cle checked by an authorized KIA dealer.

F040200AUN-EU

Push-starting

Vehicles equipped with automatic

transaxle cannot be push-started.

Follow the directions in this section for

jump-starting.

WARNING - Battery

• Keep all flames or sparks away

from the battery. The battery pro-

duces hydrogen gas which may

explode if exposed to flame or

sparks.

• Do not attempt to jump start the

vehicle if the discharged battery

is frozen or if the electrolyte level

is low; the battery may rupture or

explode.

CAUTION - Battery cables

Do not connect the jumper cable

from the negative terminal of the

booster battery to the negative ter-

minal of the discharged battery.

This can cause the discharged bat-

tery to overheat and crack, releas-

ing battery acid.

WARNING

Never tow a vehicle to start it

because the sudden surge forward

when the engine starts could cause

a collision with the tow vehicle.

What to do in an emergency

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

F050000AUN-EU

If your temperature gauge indicates over-

heating, you experience a loss of power,

or hear loud pinging or knocking, the

engine is probably too hot. If this hap-

pens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it

is safe to do so.

2. Place the gear selector lever in P and

set the parking brake. If the air condi-

tioning is on, turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out under

the car or steam is coming out from

the hood, stop the engine. Do not open

the hood until the coolant has stopped

running or the steaming has stopped.

If there is no visible loss of engine

coolant and no steam, leave the

engine running and check to be sure

the engine cooling fan is operating. If

the fan is not running, turn the engine

off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drive

belt is missing. If it is not missing,

check to see that it is tight. If the drive

belt seems to be satisfactory, check for

coolant leaking from the radiator,

hoses or under the car. (If the air con-

ditioning had been in use, it is normal

for cold water to be draining from it

when you stop).

5. If the water pump drive belt is broken

or engine coolant is leaking out, stop

the engine immediately and call the

nearest authorized KIA dealer for

assistance.

6.If you cannot find the cause of the

overheating, wait until the engine tem-

perature has returned to normal. Then,

if coolant has been lost, carefully add

coolant to the reservoir to bring the

fluid level in the reservoir up to the

halfway mark.

7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert for

further signs of overheating. If over-

heating happens again, call an author-

ized KIA dealer for assistance.

WARNING

While the engine is running, keep

hair, hands and clothing away from

moving parts such as the fan and

drive belts to prevent injury.

WARNING

Do not remove the radiator cap

when the engine is hot. This can

allow coolant to be blown out of the

opening and cause serious burns.

CAUTION

Serious loss of coolant indicates

there is a leak in the cooling system

and this should be checked as soon

as possible by an authorized KIA

dealer.

What to do in an emergency

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

F070100BUN-EU

Jack and tools

The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut

wrench are stored in the luggage

compartment. Pull up the luggage

box cover to reach this equipment.

(1) Jack handle

(2) Jack

(3) Wheel lug nut wrench

(4) Fixing straps

F070101AUN

Jacking instructions

The jack is provided for emergency

tire changing only.

To prevent the jack from “rattling”

while the vehicle is in motion, store it

properly.

Follow jacking instructions to reduce

the possibility of personal injury.

WARNING - Changing tires

• Never attempt vehicle repairs

in the traffic lanes of a public

road or highway.

• Always move the vehicle com-

pletely off the road and onto

the shoulder before trying to

change a tire. The jack should

be used on level firm ground.

If you cannot find a firm, level

place off the road, call a tow-

ing service company for

assistance.

(Continued)

OUN048011-1

OUN047011L-1

7-seater

5-seater

What to do in an emergency

F070200AUN

Removing and storing the spare

tire

Your spare tire is stored underneath

your vehicle, directly below the cargo

area.

To remove the spare tire:

1. Open the tailgate and luggage

under tray cover.

2. Find the plastic hex bolt cover (1)

and remove the cover.

3. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to

loosen the bolt enough to lower

the spare tire.

Turn the wrench counterclockwise

until the spare tire reaches the

ground.

(Continued)

• Be sure to use the correct

front and rear jacking posi-

tions on the vehicle; never

use the bumpers or any other

part of the vehicle for jack

support.

• The vehicle can easily roll off

the jack causing serious

injury or death. No person

should place any portion of

their body under a vehicle that

is supported only by a jack;

use vehicle support stands.

• Do not start or run the engine

while the vehicle is on the

jack.

• Do not allow anyone to remain

in the vehicle while it is on the

jack.

• Make sure any children pres-

ent are in a secure place away

from the road and from the

vehicle to be raised with the

jack.

OUN048012 OUN047013-1

What to do in an emergency

4. After the spare tire reaches the

ground, continue to turn the

wrench counterclockwise, and

draw the spare tire outside. Never

rotate the wrench excessively, oth-

erwise the spare tire carrier may

be damaged.

5. Remove the retainer (1) from the

center of the spare tire.

To store the spare tire:

1. Lay the tire on the ground with the

valve stem facing up.

2. Place the wheel under the vehicle

and install the retainer (1) through

the wheel center.

3. Turn the wrench clockwise until it

clicks.

F070300AUN-EU

Changing tires

1. Park on a level surface and apply

the parking brake firmly.

2. Shift the shift lever into (Park) with

automatic transaxle.

3. Activate the hazard warning flash-

er.

WARNING

Ensure the spare tire retainer is

properly aligned with the center

of the spare tire to prevent the

spare tire “rattling”. Otherwise,

it may cause the spare tire to fall

off the carrier and lead to an

accident.

1VQA4022

OUN048014 OUN048015

What to do in an emergency

106

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,

jack, jack handle, and spare tire

from the vehicle.

5. Block both the front and rear of the

wheel that is diagonally opposite

the jack position.

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-

terclockwise one turn each, but do

not remove any nut until the tire

has been raised off the ground.

1VQA4023

WARNING -

Changing a tire

• To prevent vehicle movement

while changing a tire, always

set the parking brake fully,

and always block the wheel

diagonally opposite the wheel

being changed.

• We recommend that the

wheels of the vehicle be

blocked, and that no person

remain in a vehicle that is

being jacked.

OUN047016

611

What to do in an emergency

7. Place the jack at the front or rear

jacking position closest to the tire

you are changing. Place the jack

at the designated locations under

the frame. The jacking positions

are plates welded to the frame

with two tabs and a raised dot to

index with the jack.

8. Insert the jack handle into the jack

and turn it clockwise, raising the

vehicle until the tire just clears the

ground. This measurement is

approximately 30 mm (1.2 in).

Before removing the wheel lug

nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-

ble and that there is no chance for

movement or slippage.

9. Loosen the wheel nuts and

remove them with your fingers.

Slide the wheel off the studs and

lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To

put the wheel on the hub, pick up

the spare tire, line up the holes

with the studs and slide the wheel

onto them. If this is difficult, tip the

wheel slightly and get the top hole

in the wheel lined up with the top

stud. Then jiggle the wheel back

and forth until the wheel can be

slid over the other studs.

WARNING - Jack location

To reduce the possibility of

injury, be sure to use only the

jack provided with the vehicle

and in the correct jack position;

never use any other part of the

vehicle for jack support.

OUN046017 OUN047018

What to do in an emergency

126

10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on

the studs, put the wheel nuts on

the studs and tighten them finger

tight. The nuts should be installed

with their tapered small diameter

ends directed inward. Jiggle the

tire to be sure it is completely

seated, then tighten the nuts as

much as possible with your fin-

gers again.

11. Lower the car to the ground by

turning the wheel nut wrench

counterclockwise. Then position the wrench as shown

in the drawing and tighten the wheel

nuts. Be sure the socket is seated

completely over the nut (Type A). Do

not stand on the wrench handle or

use an extension pipe over the

wrench handle. Go around the wheel

tightening every other nut until they

are all tight. Then double-check each

nut for tightness. After changing

wheels, have an authorized KIA

dealer tighten the wheel nuts to their

proper torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel:

9~11 kg.m (65~79 lb.ft)

WARNING

Wheels and wheel covers may

have sharp edges. Handle them

carefully to avoid possible

severe injury. Before putting the

wheel into place, be sure that

there is nothing on the hub or

wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel,

etc.) that interferes with the

wheel from fitting solidly

against the hub.

If there is, remove it. If there is

not good contact on the mount-

ing surface between the wheel

and hub, the wheel nuts could

come loose and cause the loss

of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may

result in loss of control of the

vehicle. This may cause serious

injury or death.

OUN047019

613

What to do in an emergency

If you have a tire gauge, remove the

valve cap and check the air pressure.

If the pressure is lower than recom-

mended, drive slowly to the nearest

service station and inflate to the cor-

rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust

it until it is correct. Always reinstall

the valve cap after checking or

adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is

not replaced, air may leak from the

tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy

another and install it as soon as pos-

sible.

After you have changed wheels,

always secure the flat tire in its place

and return the jack and tools to their

proper storage locations.

To prevent the jack, jack handle,

wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire

from rattling while the vehicle is in

motion, store them properly.

CAUTION

Your vehicle has metric threads

on the wheel studs and nuts.

Make certain during wheel

removal that the same nuts that

were removed are reinstalled -

or, if replaced, that nuts with

metric threads and the same

chamfer configuration are used.

Installation of a non-metric

thread nut on a metric stud or

vice-versa will not secure the

wheel to the hub properly and

will damage the stud so that it

must be replaced.

Note that most lug nuts do not

have metric threads. Be sure to

use extreme care in checking

for thread style before installing

aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.

If in doubt, consult an author-

ized KIA dealer.

WARNING - Wheel studs

If the studs are damaged, they

may lose their ability to retain

the wheel. This could lead to the

loss of the wheel and a collision

resulting in serious injuries.

WARNING - Inadequate

spare tire pressure

Check the inflation pressures as

soon as possible after installing

the spare tire. Adjust it to the

specified pressure, if necessary.

Refer to “Tires and wheels” sec-

tion 9.

What to do in an emergency

146

F070301AUN-EC

Important - use of compact spare tire

Your vehicle is equipped with a com-

pact spare tire. This compact spare

tire takes up less space than a regu-

lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than a

conventional tire and is designed for

temporary use only.

The compact spare should be inflat-

ed to 420 kPa (60 psi).

✽✽NOTICE

Check the inflation pressure after

installing the spare tire. Adjust it to

the specified pressure, as necessary.

CAUTION

• You should drive carefully

when the compact spare is in

use. The compact spare

should be replaced by the

proper conventional tire and

rim at the first opportunity.

• The operation of this vehicle

is not recommended with

more than one compact spare

tire in use at the same time.

WARNING

The compact spare tire is for

emergency use only. Do not

operate your vehicle on this

compact spare at speeds over

80 km/h (50 mph). The original

tire should be repaired or

replaced as soon as is possible

to avoid failure of the spare

possibly leading to personal

injury or death.

615

What to do in an emergency

When using a compact spare tire,

observe the following precautions:

• Under no circumstances should

you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a

higher speed could damage the

tire.

• Ensure that you drive slowly

enough for the road conditions to

avoid all hazards. Any road hazard,

such as a pothole or debris, could

seriously damage the compact

spare.

• Any continuous road use of this tire

could result in tire failure, loss of

vehicle control, and possible per-

sonal injury.

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-

mum load rating or the load-carry-

ing capacity shown on the sidewall

of the compact spare tire.

• Avoid driving over obstacles. The

compact spare tire diameter is

smaller than the diameter of a con-

ventional tire and reduces the

ground clearance approximately

25 mm (1 inch), which could result

in damage to the vehicle.

• Do not take this vehicle through an

automatic car wash while the com-

pact spare tire is installed.

• The compact spare tire should not

be installed on the front axle if the

vehicle must be driven in snow or

on ice.

• Do not use the compact spare tire

on any other vehicle because this

tire has been designed especially

for your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire’s tread life

is shorter than a regular tire.

Inspect your compact spare tire

regularly and replace worn com-

pact spare tires with the same size

and design, mounted on the same

wheel.

• The compact spare tire should not

be used on any other wheels, nor

should standard tires, snow tires,

wheel covers or trim rings be used

with the compact spare wheel. If

such use is attempted, damage to

these items or other car compo-

nents may occur.

• Do not use more than one compact

spare tire at a time.

• Do not tow a trailer while the com-

pact spare tire is installed.

What to do in an emergency

166

F070400AUN

Carrying a flat tire

(if equipped)

Do not store the flat tire on the com-

pact spare tire carrier underneath

your vehicle. The full size flat tire

should be stored and fixed in the

vehicle until you reach a service sta-

tion.

The fixing straps are stored in the

luggage under tray.

To place a flat tire in the vehicle:

1. 7-seater

Stand the flat tire vertically behind

the 3rd row seat with the seatback

in upright position.

5-seater

Place the flat tire horizontally on

the luggage under tray.

2. Pass the straps inside one or two

wheel-spoke.

Hang each side of straps on the

luggage net holders as illustra-

tions.

3. Make sure the flat tire is properly

secured by trying to move it.

OUN047026

OUN047326L

7-seater

5-seater

WARNING - Flat tire

Never leave the flat tire unfixed

in the vehicle to prevent the tire

“rattling”. Otherwise, the unse-

cured flat tire may be thrown

about inside the vehicle which

can cause damage to the vehi-

cle and serious injury or death

to the vehicle occupants in case

of a sharp turn, a sudden stop

or an accident.

617

What to do in an emergency

TOWING

F080100AUN

Towing service

If emergency towing is necessary, we

recommend having it done by an author-

ized KIA dealer or a commercial tow-

truck service. Proper lifting and towing

procedures are necessary to prevent

damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel

dollies or flatbed is recommended.

For trailer towing guidelines information,

refer to “Trailer towing” in section 5.

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the

rear wheels on the ground (without dol-

lies) and the front wheels off the ground.

If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-

sion components are damaged or the

vehicle is being towed with the front

wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly

under the front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial tow

truck and wheel dollies are not used, the

front of the vehicle should always be lift-

ed, not the rear.

OUN046028

OUN046030

OUN046029

CAUTION

• Do not tow the vehicle backwards

with the front wheels on the

ground as this may cause dam-

age to the vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-type equip-

ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed

equipment.

CAUTION

Before towing, check the level of

the automatic transaxle fluid. If it is

below the "HOT" range on the dip-

stick, add fluid. If you cannot add

fluid, a towing dolly must be used.

dolly

What to do in an emergency

186

When towing your vehicle in an emer-

gency without wheel dollies :

1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-

tion.

2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).

3. Release the parking brake.

F080300AUN

Emergency towing

If towing is necessary, we recommend

you to have it done by an authorized

KIA dealer or a commercial tow truck

service.

If towing service is not available in an

emergency, your vehicle may be tem-

porarily towed using a cable or chain

secured to the emergency towing hook

under the front of the vehicle. Use

extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it

and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only

on hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-

tance and at low speeds. Also, the

wheels, axles, power train, steering and

brakes must all be in good condition.

• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehi-

cle out of mud, sand or other condi-

tions from which the vehicle cannot be

driven out under its own power.

• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the

vehicle doing the towing.

• The drivers of both vehicles should

communicate with each other frequent-

ly.

CAUTION

Failure to place the transaxle shift

lever in N (Neutral) may cause inter-

nal damage to the transaxle.

OUN046022L

619

What to do in an emergency

• Before emergency towing, check that

the hook is not broken or damaged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chain

securely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and

even force.

• To avoid damaging the hook, do not

pull from the side or at a vertical angle.

Always pull straight ahead.

• Use a towing strap less than 5 m (16

feet) long. Attach a white or red cloth

(about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) in the

middle of the strap for easy visibility.

• Drive carefully so that the towing strap

is not loosened during towing.

CAUTION

• Attach a towing strap to the tow

hook.

• Using a portion of the vehicle

other than the tow hooks for tow-

ing may damage the body of your

vehicle.

• Use only a cable or chain specifi-

cally intended for use in towing

vehicles. Securely fasten the

cable or chain to the towing hook

provided.

WARNING

Use extreme caution when towing

the vehicle.

• Avoid sudden starts or erratic

driving maneuvers which would

place excessive stress on the

emergency towing hook and tow-

ing cable or chain. The hook and

towing cable or chain may break

and cause serious injury or dam-

age.

• If the disabled vehicle is unable

to be moved, do not forcibly con-

tinue the towing. Contact an

authorized KIA dealer or a com-

mercial tow truck service for

assistance.

• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead

as possible.

• Keep away from the vehicle dur-

ing towing.

OUN046024

What to do in an emergency

206

F080301AUN

Emergency towing precautions

• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the

steering wheel isn’t locked.

• Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).

• Release the parking bake.

• Press the brake pedal with more force

than normal since you will have

reduced brake performance.

• More steering effort will be required

because the power steering system

will be disabled.

• If you are driving down a long hill, the

brakes may overheat and brake per-

formance will be reduced. Stop often

and let the brakes cool off.

F080400AUN

Tie-down hook

(for flatbed towing)

CAUTION

If the car is being towed with all four

wheels on the ground, it can be

towed only from the front. Be sure

that the transaxle is in neutral. Do

not tow at speeds greater than 40

km/h (25 mph) and for more than 25

km (15 miles). Be sure the steering

is unlocked by placing the ignition

switch in the ACC position. A driver

must be in the towed vehicle to

operate the steering and brakes.

WARNING

Do not use the hooks under the

front (or rear) of the vehicle for tow-

ing purposes. These hooks are

designed ONLY for transport tie-

down. If the tie-down hooks are

used for towing, the tie-down hooks

or front bumper will be damaged

and this could lead to serious

injury.

OUN046023L

OUN046024L

Front

Rear

Engine compartment / 7-2

Maintenance services / 7-4

Owner maintenance / 7-6

Maintenance schedule / 7-8

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-12

Engine oil / 7-16

Engine coolant / 7-17

Brakes fluid / 7-20

Power steering fluid / 7-21

Automatic transaxle fluid / 7-22

Washer fluid / 7-24

Parking brake / 7-24

Air cleaner / 7-25

Climate control air filter / 7-25

Wiper blades / 7-26

Battery / 7-28

Tires and wheels / 7-31

Fuses / 7-44

Appearance care / 7-53

Emission control system / 7-59

Maintenance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

G010000AUN-EU

OUN078001L

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box

6. Negative battery terminal

7. Positive battery terminal

8. Automatic transaxle fluid dipstick

9. Radiator cap

10. Engine oil dipstick

11. Power steering fluid reservoir

12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

■■2.4L Engine

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Maintenance

OUN078001

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box

6. Negative battery terminal

7. Positive battery terminal

8. Automatic transaxle fluid dipstick

9. Radiator cap

10. Engine oil dipstick

11. Power steering fluid reservoir

12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

■■2.7L Engine

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SERVICES

G020000AUN

You should exercise the utmost care to

prevent damage to your vehicle and

injury to yourself whenever performing

any maintenance or inspection proce-

dures.

Should you have any doubts concerning

the inspection or servicing of your vehi-

cle, we strongly recommend that you

have an authorized KIA dealer perform

this work.

An authorized KIA dealer has factory-

trained technicians and genuine KIA

parts to service your vehicle properly. For

expert advice and quality service, see an

authorized KIA dealer.

Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient

servicing may result in operational prob-

lems with your vehicle that could lead to

vehicle damage, an accident, or person-

al injury.

G020100AUN-EU

Owner’s responsibility

✽✽NOTICE

Maintenance Service and Record

Retention are the owner's responsibility.

You should retain documents that show

proper maintenance has been performed

on your vehicle in accordance with the

scheduled maintenance service charts

shown on the following pages. You need

this information to establish your compli-

ance with the servicing and maintenance

requirements of your vehicle warranties.

Detailed warranty information is provided

in your Warranty & Consumer Information

manual.

Repairs and adjustments required as a

result of improper maintenance or a lack

of required maintenance are not covered.

We recommend you have your vehicle

maintained and repaired by an author-

ized KIA dealer. An authorized KIA deal-

er meets KIA’s high service quality stan-

dards and receives technical support

from KIA in order to provide you with a

high level of service satisfaction.

Maintenance

G020200AUN-EU

Owner maintenance precautions

Improper or incomplete service may

result in problems. This section gives

instructions only for the maintenance

items that are easy to perform.

As explained earlier in this section, sev-

eral procedures can be done only by an

authorized KIA dealer with special tools.

✽✽NOTICE

Improper owner maintenance during

the warranty period may affect warran-

ty coverage. For details, read the sepa-

rate Warranty & Consumer Information

manual provided with the vehicle. If

you're unsure about any servicing or

maintenance procedure, have it done by

an authorized KIA dealer.

WARNING - Maintenance

work

• Performing maintenance work on

a vehicle can be dangerous. You

can be seriously injured while

performing some maintenance

procedures. If you lack sufficient

knowledge and experience or the

proper tools and equipment to do

the work, have it done by an

authorized KIA dealer.

• Working under the hood with the

engine running is dangerous. It

becomes even more dangerous

when you wear jewelry or loose

clothing. These can become

entangled in moving parts and

result in injury. Therefore, if you

must run the engine while work-

ing under the hood, make certain

that you remove all jewelry (espe-

cially rings, bracelets, watches,

and necklaces) and all neckties,

scarves, and similar loose cloth-

ing before getting near the

engine or cooling fans.

Maintenance

OWNER MAINTENANCE

G030000AUN

The following lists are vehicle checks and

inspections that should be performed by

the owner or an authorized KIA dealer at

the frequencies indicated to help ensure

safe, dependable operation of your vehi-

cle.

Any adverse conditions should be

brought to the attention of your dealer as

soon as possible.

These Owner Maintenance Checks are

generally not covered by warranties and

you may be charged for labor, parts and

lubricants used.

Owner maintenance schedule

G030101AUN

When you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.

• Check coolant level in coolant reser-

voir.

• Check the windshield washer fluid

level.

• Look for low or under-inflated tires.

G030102AUN

While operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of the

exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes

in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steering

wheel. Notice any increased steering

effort or looseness in the steering

wheel, or change in its straight-ahead

position.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns

slightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-

eling on smooth, level road.

• When stopping, listen and check for

unusual sounds, pulling to one side,

increased brake pedal travel or “hard-

to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the oper-

ation of your transaxle occurs, check

the transaxle fluid level.

• Check automatic transaxle P (Park)

function.

• Check parking brake.

• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle

(water dripping from the air condition-

ing system during or after use is nor-

mal).

WARNING

Be careful when checking your

engine coolant level when the

engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant

and steam may blow out under

pressure. This could cause burns

or other serious injury.

Maintenance

G030103AUN

At least monthly:

• Check coolant level in the engine

coolant reservoir.

• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-

nals and hazard warning flashers.

• Check the inflation pressures of all

tires including the spare.

G030104AUN

At least twice a year

(i.e., every Spring and Fall):

• Check radiator, heater and air condi-

tioning hoses for leaks or damage.

• Check windshield washer spray and

wiper operation. Clean wiper blades

with clean cloth dampened with wash-

er fluid.

• Check headlight alignment.

• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields

and clamps.

• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear

and function.

• Check for worn tires and loose wheel

lug nuts.

G030105AUN-EU

At least once a year:

• Clean body and door drain holes.

• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and

hood hinges.

• Lubricate door and hood locks and

latches.

• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.

• Check the air conditioning system.

• Check the power steering fluid level.

• Inspect and lubricate automatic

transaxle linkage and controls.

• Clean battery and terminals.

• Check the brake fluid level.

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

G040100AUN-EC

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

Engine control system

Kilometers or time in months, whichever comes first

× 1,000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128

# Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64

Engine oil & engine oil filter (1) R R R R R R RRRRRRRRRR

Drive belts (tension) I I I I

Cooling system hoses & connections I I I I I

Engine coolant (1) I I I I I R IIIIIRIIII

Fuel filter RR

Fuel tank cap, lines, EVAP canister and hoses

Fuel tank air filter I R I R I

Air cleaner element (2) I I I I I R IIIIIRIIII

Ignition wires I I

Spark plugs (Iridium coated)

PCV valve (if equipped) I I I I

Idle speed I I I I I

Valve clearance I

Engine timing belt 2.7L R

Replace every 160,000 km

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

Kilometers or time in months, whichever comes first

× 1,000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128

# Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64

Air conditioner compressor operation & IIIII

refrigerant amount (if equipped)

Exhaust pipes, heat shield & mountings I I IIIIII

Front suspension ball joints I I I I

Brakes fluid (1) I I I I I I I R IIIIIIIR

Front brake pads & discs (3) I I I I I I IIIIIIIIII

Rear brake pads & discs (3) I I I I I I IIIIIIIIII

Parking brake I I I IIIII

Brake lines & connections IIIII

(including booster)

Brake pedal free play I I I I I I IIIIIIIIII

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

Chassis and body

Maintenance

107

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

Kilometers or time in months, whichever comes first

× 1,000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128

# Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64

Automatic transaxle fluid (1) I I I R I I I R I I I R I I I R

Chassis & underbody bolts & nuts I I I I I I IIIIIIIIII

Tire condition & inflation pressure I I I I I I IIIIIIIIII

Wheel alignment (4)

Tire rotation

Steering operation & linkage I I I I I I IIIIIIIIII

Power steering fluid & lines I I I IIIII

Driveshaft u-joints L L L L L L LLLLLLLLLL

Driveshaft dust boots I I I I I

Safety belts, buckles & anchors I I I I I I IIIIIIIIII

Lock, hinges & hood latch L L L L L L LLLLLLLLLL

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

Inspect when abnormal condition noted

Rotate the tires every 12,000 km

Chassis and body (Continued)

711

Maintenance

Chart symbols:

I- Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, refill, adjust of replace.

R- Replace or change

L- Lubricate.

(1) Refer to the lubricant and coolant specifications in the Owner’s Manual.

(2) More frequent maintenance is required if driving under dusty conditions.

(3) More frequent maintenance is required if the vehicle is operated under any of the following conditions:

a. Short-distance driving

b. Driving on dusty roads

c. Extensive idling or slow-speed driving in stop-and-go traffic

(4) If necessary, rotate and balance the wheels.

* Note: Check the engine oil and coolant levels every week.

Maintenance

127

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

G050100AUN

Engine oil and filter

The engine oil and filter should be

changed at the intervals specified in the

maintenance schedule. If the car is being

driven in severe conditions, more fre-

quent oil and filter changes are required.

G050200AUN

Drive belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of

cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil satu-

ration and replace if necessary. Drive

belts should be checked periodically for

proper tension and adjusted as neces-

sary.

G050300AUN

Fuel filter (cartridge)

A clogged filter can limit the speed at

which the vehicle may be driven, damage

the emission system and cause multiple

issues such as hard starting. If an exces-

sive amount of foreign matter accumu-

lates in the fuel tank, the filter may

require replacement more frequently.

After installing a new filter, run the engine

for several minutes, and check for leaks

at the connections. Fuel filters should be

installed by an authorized KIA dealer.

G050400AUN-EU

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-

nections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-

nections for leakage and damage. Have

an authorized KIA dealer replace any

damaged or leaking parts immediately.

713

Maintenance

G050500AUN

Timing belt (if equipped)

Inspect all parts related to the timing belt

for damage and deformation. Replace

any damaged parts immediately.

G050600AUN

Vapor hose and fuel filler cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should

be inspected at those intervals specified

in the maintenance schedule. Make sure

that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is

correctly replaced.

G050700AUN

Vacuum crankcase ventilation

hoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence

of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard

and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,

abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-

cate deterioration. Particular attention

should be paid to examine those hose

surfaces nearest to high heat sources,

such as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure that

the hoses do not come in contact with

any heat source, sharp edges or moving

component which might cause heat dam-

age or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose

connections, such as clamps and cou-

plings, to make sure they are secure, and

that no leaks are present. Hoses should

be replaced immediately if there is any

evidence of deterioration or damage.

G050800AUN

Air cleaner filter

A Genuine KIA air cleaner filter is recom-

mended when the filter is replaced.

G050900AUN

Spark plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of

the correct heat range.

G051000AUN

Valve clearance

Inspect excessive valve noise and/or

engine vibration and adjust if necessary.

An authorized KIA dealer should perform

the operation.

Maintenance

147

G051100AUN

Cooling system

Check cooling system components, such

as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and

connections for leakage and damage.

Replace any damaged parts.

G051200AUN

Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the

intervals specified in the maintenance

schedule.

G051400AUN

Automatic transaxle fluid

The fluid level should be in the "HOT"

range of the dipstick, after the engine

and transaxle are at normal operating

temperature. Check the automatic

transaxle fluid level with the engine run-

ning and the transaxle in neutral, with the

parking brake properly applied.

G051500AUN

Brake hoses and lines

Visually check for proper installation,

chafing, cracks, deterioration and any

leakage. Replace any deteriorated or

damaged parts immediately.

G051600AUN

Brake fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid

reservoir. The level should be between

“MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of

the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake

fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4

specification.

G051700AUN

Parking brake

Inspect the parking brake system includ-

ing the parking brake pedal and cables.

G051900AUN

Brake discs, pads, calipers and

rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs

for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid

leakage.

G052000AUN

Exhaust pipe and muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muf-

fler and hangers for cracks, deterioration,

or damage. Start the engine and listen

carefully for any exhaust gas leakage.

Tighten connections or replace parts as

necessary.

G052100AUN

Suspension mounting bolts

Check the suspension connections for

looseness or damage. Retighten to the

specified torque.

715

Maintenance

G052200AUN

Steering gear box, linkage &

boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off,

check for excessive free-play in the

steering wheel.

Check the linkage for bends or damage.

Check the dust boots and ball joints for

deterioration, cracks, or damage.

Replace any damaged parts.

G052300AUN

Power steering pump, belt and

hoses

Check the power steering pump and

hoses for leakage and damage. Replace

any damaged or leaking parts immedi-

ately. Inspect the power steering belt for

evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear,

oiliness and proper tension. Replace or

adjust it if necessary.

G052400AUN

Drive shafts and boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps

for cracks, deterioration, or damage.

Replace any damaged parts and, if nec-

essary, repack the grease.

G052500AUN

Air conditioning refrigerant

(if equipped)

Check the air conditioning lines and con-

nections for leakage and damage.

Maintenance

167

ENGINE OIL

G060100AUN

Checking the engine oil level

1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.

2. Start the engine and allow it to reach

normal operating temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few

minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to

return to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and

re-insert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and check

the level. The level should be between

F and L.

If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring

the level to F. Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil from

being spilled on engine components.

Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer

to “Recommended lubricants and capaci-

ties” in section 8.)

WARNING - Radiator hose

Be very careful not to touch the

radiator hose when checking or

adding the engine oil as it may be

hot enough to burn you.

OUN058004N OUN058006N

717

Maintenance

G060200AUN

Changing the engine oil and filter

Have engine oil and filter changed by an

authorized KIA dealer according to the

Maintenance Schedule at the beginning

of this section.

G070000AUN

The high-pressure cooling system has a

reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze

coolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac-

tory.

Check the antifreeze protection and

coolant level at least once a year, at the

beginning of the winter season, and

before traveling to a colder climate.

G070100AUN

Checking the coolant level

WARNING

Used engine oil may cause irrita-

tion or cancer of the skin if left in

contact with the skin for prolonged

periods of time. Used engine oil

contains chemicals that have

caused cancer in laboratory ani-

mals. Always protect your skin by

washing your hands thoroughly

with soap and warm water as soon

as possible after handling used oil.

ENGINE COOLANT

WARNING - Removing

radiator cap

• Never attempt to remove the radi-

ator cap while the engine is oper-

ating or hot. Doing so might lead

to cooling system and engine

damage and could result in seri-

ous personal injury from escap-

ing hot coolant or steam.

(Continued)

• Turn the engine off and wait until

it cools down. Use extreme care

when removing the radiator cap.

Wrap a thick towel around it, and

turn it counterclockwise slowly to

the first stop. Step back while the

pressure is released from the

cooling system. When you are

sure all the pressure has been

released, press down on the cap,

using a thick towel, and continue

turning counterclockwise to

remove it.

• Even if the engine is not operat-

ing, do not remove the radiator

cap or the drain plug while the

engine and radiator are hot. Hot

coolant and steam may still blow

out under pressure, causing seri-

ous injury.

Maintenance

187

Check the condition and connections of

all cooling system hoses and heater

hoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-

rated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled

between F and L marks on the side of the

coolant reservoir when the engine is

cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough

specified coolant to provide protection

against freezing and corrosion. Bring the

level to F, but do not overfill. If frequent

additions are required, see an authorized

KIA dealer for a cooling system inspec-

tion.

G070101AUN

Recommended engine coolant

• Use only soft (de-mineralized) water in

the coolant mixture.

• The engine in your vehicle has alu-

minum engine parts and must be pro-

tected by an ethylene-glycol-based

coolant to prevent corrosion and freez-

ing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol

coolant or mix them with the specified

coolant.

• Do not use a solution that contains

more than 60% antifreeze or less than

35% antifreeze, which would reduce

the effectiveness of the solution.

For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-

lowing table.

OUN056007

-15°C (5°F) 35 65

-25°C (-13°F) 40 60

-35°C (-31°F) 50 50

-45°C (-49°F) 60 40

Ambient

Temperature

Mixture Percentage (volume)

Coolant

Solution Water

719

Maintenance

G070200AUN

Changing the coolant

Have coolant changed by an authorized

KIA dealer according to the Maintenance

Schedule at the beginning of this section.

WARNING - Radiator cap

Do not remove the radiator cap

when the engine and radiator are

hot. Scalding hot coolant and

steam may blow out under pres-

sure causing serious injury.

OUN056010N

CAUTION

Put a thick cloth or fabric around

the radiator cap before refilling the

coolant in order to prevent the

coolant from overflowing into

engine parts such as generator.

WARNING - Coolant

• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severely

obscure visibility when sprayed

on the windshield and may cause

loss of vehicle control or damage

to paint and body trim.

Maintenance

207

BRAKE FLUID

G080100AUN-EU

Checking the brake fluid level

Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-

odically. The fluid level should be

between MAX and MIN marks on the

side of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap and

adding brake fluid, clean the area around

the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent

brake fluid contamination.

If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX

level. The level will fall with accumulated

mileage. This is a normal condition asso-

ciated with the wear of the brake linings.

If the fluid level is excessively low, have

the brake system checked by an author-

ized KIA dealer.

Use only the specified brake fluid. (Refer

to “Recommended lubricants or capaci-

ties” in section 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

WARNING - Brake fluid

When changing and adding brake

fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it

come in contact with your eyes. If

brake fluid should come in contact

with your eyes, immediately flush

them with a large quantity of fresh

tap water. Have your eyes examined

by a doctor as soon as possible.

WARNING - Loss of brake

fluid

In the event the brake system

requires frequent additions of fluid,

the vehicle should be inspected by

an authorized KIA dealer.

OUN056023 CAUTION

Do not allow brake fluid to contact

the vehicle's body paint, as paint

damage will result. Brake fluid,

which has been exposed to open air

for an extended time should never

be used as its quality cannot be

guaranteed. It should be disposed

of properly. Don't put in the wrong

kind of fluid. A few drops of miner-

al-based oil, such as engine oil, in

your brake system can damage

brake system parts.

721

Maintenance

POWER STEERING FLUID

G090100AUN

Checking the power steering fluid

level

With the vehicle on level ground, check

the fluid level in the power steering reser-

voir periodically. The fluid should be

between MAX and MIN marks on the

side of the reservoir at the normal tem-

perature.

Before adding power steering fluid, thor-

oughly clean the area around the reser-

voir cap to prevent power steering fluid

contamination.

If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX

level.

In the event the power steering system

requires frequent addition of fluid, the

vehicle should be inspected by an

authorized KIA dealer.

Use only the specified power steering

fluid. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants

or capacities" in section 8.)

G090200AUN

Checking the power steering

hose

Check the connections for oil leaks,

severe damage and twists in the power

steering hose before driving.

CAUTION

• To avoid damage to the power

steering pump, do not operate the

vehicle for prolonged periods

with a low power steering fluid

level.

• Never start the engine when the

reservoir tank is empty.

• When adding fluid, be careful that

dirt does not get into the tank.

• Too little fluid can result in

increased steering effort and/or

noise from the power steering

system.

• The use of the non-specified fluid

could reduce the effectiveness of

the power steering system and

cause damage to it.

OUN056021

Maintenance

227

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

G100100BUN

Checking the automatic transaxle

fluid level

The automatic transaxle fluid level

should be checked regularly.

Keep the vehicle on the level ground with

the parking brake applied and check the

fluid level according to the following pro-

cedure.

1. Place the selector lever in N (Neutral)

position and confirm the engine is run-

ning at normal idle speed.

2. After the transaxle is warmed up suffi-

ciently (fluid temperature 70~80°C

(158~176°F)), for example by 10 min-

utes usual driving, shift the selector

lever through all positions then place

the selector lever in N (Neutral) or P

(Park) position.

3. Confirm that the fluid level is in “HOT”

range on the level gauge. If the fluid

level is lower, add the specified fluid

from the fill hole. If the fluid level is

higher, drain the fluid from the drain

hole.

4. If the fluid level is checked in cold con-

dition (fluid temperature 20~30°C

(68~86°F) add the fluid to “COLD” line

and then recheck the fluid level

according to the above step 2.

OUN056011

WARNING - Transaxle fluid

The transaxle fluid level should be

checked when the engine is at nor-

mal operating temperature. This

means that the engine, radiator,

radiator hose and exhaust system

etc., are very hot. Exercise great

care not to burn yourself during

this procedure.

OUN075010

723

Maintenance

✽✽NOTICE

“COLD” range is for reference only and

should NOT be used to determine

transaxle fluid level.

✽✽NOTICE

New automatic transaxle fluid should be

red. The red dye is added so the assem-

bly plant can identify it as automatic

transaxle fluid and distinguish it from

engine oil or antifreeze. The red dye,

which is not an indicator of fluid quali-

ty, is not permanent. As the vehicle is

driven, the automatic transaxle fluid

will begin to look darker. The color may

eventually appear light brown.

Therefore, have an authorized KIA

dealer change the automatic transaxle

fluid according to the Scheduled

Maintenance at the beginning of this

section.

Use only the specified automatic

transaxle fluid. (Refer to "Recommended

lubricants or capacities" in section 8.)

G100200AUN

Changing the automatic transaxle

fluid

Have automatic transaxle fluid changed

by an authorized KIA dealer according to

the Maintenance Schedule at the begin-

ning of this section.

WARNING - Parking brake

To avoid sudden movement of the

vehicle, apply parking brake and

depress the brake pedal before

moving the shift lever.

CAUTION

• Low fluid level causes transaxle

slippage. Overfilling can cause

foaming, loss of fluid and transaxle

malfunction.

• The use of a non-specified fluid

could result in transaxle malfunc-

tion and failure.

Maintenance

247

WASHER FLUID

G120100AUN

Checking the washer fluid level

The reservoir is translucent so that you

can check the level with a quick visual

inspection.

Check the fluid level in the washer fluid

reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain

water may be used if washer fluid is not

available. However, use washer solvent

with antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-

mates to prevent freezing.

G140100AUN

Checking the parking brake

Check whether the stroke is within spec-

ification when the parking brake pedal is

depressed with 20 kg (44 lb, 196 N) of

force. Also, the parking brake alone

should securely hold the vehicle on a fair-

ly steep grade. If the stroke is more or

less than specified, have the parking

brake adjusted by an Authorized KIA

Dealer.

Stroke : 88~98 mm (3.5~3.8 in)

WARNING - Coolant

• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severely

obscure visibility when sprayed

on the windshield and may cause

loss of vehicle control or damage

to paint and body trim.

• Windshield washer fluid agents

contain some amounts of alcohol

and can be flammable under cer-

tain circumstances. Do not allow

sparks or flame to contact the

washer fluid or the washer fluid

reservoir. Damage to the vehicle

or occupants could occur.

• Windshield washer fluid is poi-

sonous to humans and animals.

Do not drink and avoid contacting

windshield washer fluid. Serious

injury or death could occur.

OUN056024 OUN036009

PARKING BRAKE

725

Maintenance

AIR CLEANER

G160100AUN-EC

Filter replacement

It must be replaced when necessary, and

should not be cleaned and reused.

Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is operated in extremely

dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-

ment more often than the usual recom-

mended intervals. (Refer to

“Maintenance under severe usage condi-

tions” in this section.)

G170100AUN-EC

Filter inspection

The climate control air filter should be

replaced every 15,000 km (10,000

miles). If the vehicle is operated in the

severely air-polluted cities or on dusty

rough roads for a long period, it should

be inspected more frequently and

replaced earlier. When you, the owner,

replace the climate control air filter,

replace it performing the following proce-

dure, and be careful to avoid damaging

other components.

OUN056012

CAUTION

• Do not drive with the air cleaner

removed; this will result in exces-

sive engine wear.

• Use a KIA genuine part. Use of

non-genuine parts could damage

the air flow sensor.

OUN028322

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

Maintenance

267

WIPER BLADES

G180100AUN

Blade inspection

✽✽NOTICE

Commercial hot waxes applied by auto-

matic car washes have been known to

make the windshield difficult to clean.

Contamination of either the windshield or

the wiper blades with foreign matter can

reduce the effectiveness of the wind-

shield wipers. Common sources of con-

tamination are insects, tree sap, and hot

wax treatments used by some commer-

cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-

ing properly, clean both the window and

the blades with a good cleaner or mild

detergent, and rinse thoroughly with

clean water.

G180200AUN

Blade replacement

When the wipers no longer clean ade-

quately, the blades may be worn or

cracked, and require replacement.

1JBA5122 CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper

blades, do not use gasoline,

kerosene, paint thinner, or other

solvents on or near them.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper

arms or other components, do not

attempt to move the wipers manual-

ly.

CAUTION

The use of a non-specified wiper

blade could result in wiper malfunc-

tion and failure.

727

Maintenance

G180201AUN

Front windshield wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper

blade assembly to expose the plastic

locking clip.

2. Compress the clip and slide the blade

assembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm.

4. Install the blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

G180202AUN

Rear window wiper blade

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or

other components, have an authorized

KIA dealer replace the wiper blade.

1LDA5023

CAUTION

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall

against the windshield, since it may

chip or crack the windshield.

1JBA7037

1JBA7038

Maintenance

287

G190100AUN

For best battery service

• Keep the battery securely mounted.

• Keep the battery top clean and dry.

• Keep the terminals and connections

clean, tight, and coated with petroleum

jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the

battery immediately with a solution of

water and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to be used for

an extended time, disconnect the bat-

tery cables.

WARNING - Battery

dangers

Always read the following

instructions carefully when

handling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes and

all other flames or sparks

away from the battery.

Hydrogen, a highly com-

bustible gas, is always

present in battery cells and

may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of the

reach of children because

batteries contain highly

corrosive SULFURIC ACID.

Do not allow battery acid to

contact your skin, eyes,

clothing or paint finish.

(Continued)

If any electrolyte gets into

your eyes, flush your eyes

with clean water for at least

15 minutes and get immedi-

ate medical attention.

If electrolyte gets on your

skin, thoroughly wash the

contacted area. If you feel a

pain or a burning sensa-

tion, get medical attention

immediately.

Wear eye protection when

charging or working near a

battery. Always provide

ventilation when working in

an enclosed space.

(Continued)

BATTERY

OUN056025

729

Maintenance

G190200AUN

Battery recharging

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,

calcium-based battery.

• If the battery becomes discharged in a

short time (because, for example, the

headlights or interior lights were left on

while the vehicle was not in use),

recharge it by slow charging (trickle)

for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually discharges

because of high electric load while the

vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-

30A for two hours.

(Continued)

• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-

tery, excessive pressure on the

case may cause battery acid to

leak, resulting in personal injury.

Lift with a battery carrier or with

your hands on opposite corners.

• Never attempt to recharge the

battery when the battery cables

are connected.

• The electrical ignition system

works with high voltage. Never

touch these components with the

engine running or the ignition

switched on.

Failure to follow the above warn-

ings can result in serious bodily

injury or death.

WARNING - Recharging

battery

When recharging the battery,

observe the following precautions:

• The battery must be removed

from the vehicle and placed in an

area with good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,

or flame near the battery.

• Watch the battery during charg-

ing, and stop or reduce the charg-

ing rate if the battery cells begin

gassing (boiling) violently or if

the temperature of the electrolyte

of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).

• Wear eye protection when check-

ing the battery during charging.

• Disconnect the battery charger in

the following order.

1. Turn off the battery charger main

switch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp from

the negative battery terminal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp from

the positive battery terminal.

Maintenance

307

G190300AUN

Reset items

Items should be reset after the battery

has been discharged or the battery has

been disconnected.

• Auto up/down window (See section 4)

• Sunroof (See section 4)

• Trip computer (See section 4)

• Climate control system

(See section 4)

• Clock (See section 4)

• Audio (See section 4)

WARNING

• Before performing maintenance

or recharging the battery, turn off

all accessories and stop the

engine.

• The negative battery cable must

be removed first and installed

last when the battery is discon-

nected.

731

Maintenance

CAUTION

• Underinflation also results in

excessive wear, poor handling

and reduced fuel economy.

Wheel deformation also is

possible. Keep your tire pres-

sures at the proper levels. If a

tire frequently needs refilling,

have it checked by an author-

ized KIA dealer.

• Overinflation produces a

harsh ride, excessive wear at

the center of the tire tread, and

a greater possibility of dam-

age from road hazards.

TIRES AND WHEELS

G200100AUN

Tire care

For proper maintenance, safety, and

maximum fuel economy, you must

always maintain recommended tire

inflation pressures and stay within

the load limits and weight distribution

recommended for your vehicle.

G200200AUN-EU

Recommended cold tire inflation

pressures

All tire pressures (including the

spare) should be checked when the

tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the

vehicle has not been driven for at

least three hours or driven less than

1.6 km (one mile).

Recommended pressures must be

maintained for the best ride, top vehi-

cle handling, and minimum tire wear.

For recommended inflation pressure,

refer to “Tire and wheels” in section

All specifications (sizes and pres-

sures) can be found on a label

attached to the driver’s side center

pillar.

WARNING - Tire underin-

flation

Severe underinflation (70 kPa

(10 psi) or more) can lead to

severe heat build-up, causing

blowouts, tread separation and

other tire failures that can result

in the loss of vehicle control

leading to severe injury or

death. This risk is much higher

on hot days and when driving

for long periods at high speeds.

OUN086005

Maintenance

327

G200300AUN

Checking tire inflation pressure

Check your tires once a month or

more.

Also, check the tire pressure of the

spare tire.

G200301AUN

How to check

Use a good quality gage to check tire

pressure. You can not tell if your tires

are properly inflated simply by look-

ing at them. Radial tires may look

properly inflated even when they're

underinflated.

Check the tire's inflation pressure

when the tires are cold. - "Cold"

means your vehicle has been sitting

for at least three hours or driven no

more than 1.6 km (1 mile).

WARNING - Tire Inflation

Overinflation or underinflation

can reduce tire life, adversely

affect vehicle handling, and

lead to sudden tire failure. This

could result in loss of vehicle

control and potential injury.

CAUTION - Tire pressure

Always observe the following:

• Check tire pressure when the

tires are cold. (After vehicle

has been parked for at least

three hours or hasn't been

driven more than 1.6 km (one

mile) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of your

spare tire each time you check

the pressure of other tires.

• Never overload your vehicle.

Be careful not to overload a

vehicle luggage rack if your

vehicle is equipped with one.

• Worn, old tires can cause acci-

dents. If your tread is badly

worn, or if your tires have

been damaged, replace them.

CAUTION

• Warm tires normally exceed

recommended cold tire pres-

sures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6

psi). Do not release air from

warm tires to adjust the pres-

sure or the tires will be under-

inflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tire

inflation valve caps. Without

the valve cap, dirt or moisture

could get into the valve core

and cause air leakage. If a

valve cap is missing, install a

new one as soon as possible.

733

Maintenance

Remove the valve cap from the tire

valve stem. Press the tire gage firm-

ly onto the valve to get a pressure

measurement. If the cold tire inflation

pressure matches the recommended

pressure on the tire and loading

information label, no further adjust-

ment is necessary. If the pressure is

low, add air until you reach the rec-

ommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in the

center of the tire valve. Recheck the

tire pressure with the tire gage. Be

sure to put the valve caps back on

the valve stems. They help prevent

leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-

ture.

G200400AUN

Tire rotation

To equalize tread wear, it is recom-

mended that the tires be rotated

every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or

sooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tires for

correct balance.

When rotating tires, check for uneven

wear and damage. Abnormal wear is

usually caused by incorrect tire pres-

sure, improper wheel alignment, out-

of-balance wheels, severe braking or

severe cornering. Look for bumps or

bulges in the tread or side of tire.

Replace the tire if you find either of

these conditions. Replace the tire if

fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,

be sure to bring the front and rear tire

pressures to specification and check

lug nut tightness.

Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section

WARNING

• Inspect your tires frequently

for proper inflation as well as

wear and damage. Always use

a tire pressure gauge.

• Tires with too much or too little

pressure wear unevenly caus-

ing poor handling, loss of vehi-

cle control, and sudden tire

failure leading to accidents,

injuries, and even death. The

recommended cold tire pres-

sure for your vehicle can be

found in this manual and on

the tire label located on the dri-

ver's side center pillar.

• Worn tires can cause acci-

dents. Replace tires that are

worn, show uneven wear, or

are damaged.

• Remember to check the pres-

sure of your spare tire. KIA

recommends that you check

the spare every time you

check the pressure of the

other tires on your vehicle.

Maintenance

347

Disc brake pads should be inspected

for wear whenever tires are rotated.

✽✽NOTICE

Rotate radial tires that have an

asymmetric tread pattern only from

front to rear and not from right to

left.

G200500AUN

Wheel alignment and tire balance

The wheels on your vehicle were

aligned and balanced carefully at the

factory to give you the longest tire life

and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to

have your wheels aligned again.

However, if you notice unusual tire

wear or your vehicle pulling one way

or the other, the alignment may need

to be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibrating

when driving on a smooth road, your

wheels may need to be rebalanced.

WARNING

• Do not use the compact spare

tire for tire rotation.

• Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tires under any circum-

stances. This may cause

unusual handling characteris-

tics that could result in death,

severe injury, or property

damage.

CAUTION

Improper wheel weights can

damage your vehicle's alu-

minum wheels. Use only

approved wheel weights.

S2BLA790A

CBGQ0707A

Without a spare tire

Directional tires (if equipped)

735

Maintenance

G200600AUN

Tire replacement

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear

indicator will appear as a solid band

across the tread. This shows there is

less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread

left on the tire. Replace the tire when

this happens.

Do not wait for the band to appear

across the entire tread before replac-

ing the tire.

1LDA5026

Tread wear indicator WARNING - Replacing

tires

To reduce the chance or serious

or fatal injuries from an acci-

dent caused by tire failure or

loss of vehicle control:

• Replace tires that are worn,

show uneven wear, or are

damaged. Worn tires can

cause loss of braking effec-

tiveness, steering control, and

traction.

• Do not drive your vehicle with

too little or too much pressure

in your tires. This can lead to

uneven wear and tire failure.

• When replacing tires, never

mix radial and bias-ply tires

on the same car. You must

replace all tires (including the

spare) if moving from radial to

bias-ply tires.

(Continued)

• Using tires and wheel other

than the recommended sizes

could cause unusual handling

characteristics and poor vehi-

cle control, resulting in a seri-

ous accident.

• Wheels that do not meet KIA’s

specifications may fit poorly

and result in damage to the

vehicle or unusual handling

and poor vehicle control.

Maintenance

367

G200601AUN

Compact spare tire replacement

A compact spare tire has a shorter

tread life than a regular size tire.

Replace it when you can see the

tread wear indicator bars on the tire.

The replacement compact spare tire

should be the same size and design

tire as the one provided with your

new vehicle and should be mounted

on the same compact spare tire

wheel. The compact spare tire is not

designed to be mounted on a regular

size wheel, and the compact spare

tire wheel is not designed for mount-

ing a regular size tire.

G200700AUN

Wheel replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for

any reason, make sure the new

wheels are equivalent to the original

factory units in diameter, rim width

and offset.

G200800AUN

Tire traction

Tire traction can be reduced if you

drive on worn tires, tires that are

improperly inflated or on slippery

road surfaces. Tires should be

replaced when tread wear indicators

appear. To reduce the possibility of

losing control, slow down whenever

there is rain, snow or ice on the road.

G200900AUN

Tire maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct

wheel alignment helps to decrease

tire wear. If you find a tire is worn

unevenly, have your dealer check the

wheel alignment.

When you have new tires installed,

make sure they are balanced. This

will increase vehicle ride comfort and

tire life. Additionally, a tire should

always be rebalanced if it is removed

from the wheel.

WARNING

A wheel that is not the correct

size may adversely affect wheel

and bearing life, braking and

stopping abilities, handling

characteristics, ground clear-

ance, body-to-tire clearance,

snow chain clearance,

speedometer calibration, head-

light aim and bumper height.

737

Maintenance

G201000AUN

Tire sidewall labeling

This information identifies and

describes the fundamental charac-

teristics of the tire and also provides

the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The

TIN can be used to identify the tire in

case of a recall.

G201001AUN

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or Brand name is

shown.

G201002AUN

2. Tire size designation

A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire

size designation. You will need this

information when selecting replace-

ment tires for your car. The following

explains what the letters and num-

bers in the tire size designation

mean.

Example tire size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an

example only; your tire size designa-

tor could vary depending on your

vehicle.)

P205/65R15 92H

P - Applicable vehicle type (tires

marked with the prefix “P’’ are

intended for use on passenger

cars or light trucks; however, not

all tires have this marking).

205 - Tire width in millimeters.

65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section

height as a percentage of its

width.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).

15 - Rim diameter in inches.

92 - Load Index, a numerical code

associated with the maximum

load the tire can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the

speed rating chart in this section

for additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with impor-

tant information that you need if you

ever have to replace one. The follow-

ing explains what the letters and

numbers in the wheel size designa-

tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:

6.0JX15

6.0 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

15 - Rim diameter in inches.

I030B04JM

5,6

Maintenance

387

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the dif-

ferent speed ratings currently being

used for passenger cars. The speed

rating is part of the tire size designa-

tion on the sidewall of the tire. This

symbol corresponds to that tire's

designed maximum safe operating

speed.

G201003AEN

3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire

Identification Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years, based

on the manufacturing date, tire

strength and performance, decline

with age naturally (even unused

spare tires). Therefore, the tires

(including the spare tire) should be

replaced by new ones. You can find

the manufacturing date on the tire

sidewall (possibly on the inside of the

wheel), displaying the DOT Code.

The DOT Code is a series of num-

bers on a tire consisting of numbers

and English letters. The manufactur-

ing date is designated by the last four

digits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO

The front part of the DOT means a

plant code number, tire size and

tread pattern and the last four num-

bers indicate week and year manu-

factured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1606 represents

that the tire was produced in the 16th

week of 2006.

G201004AUN

4. Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rub-

ber-coated fabric are in the tire. Tire

manufacturers also must indicate the

materials in the tire, which include

steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

The letter "R" means radial ply con-

struction; the letter "D" means diago-

nal or bias ply construction; and the

letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-

struction.

WARNING - Tire age

Tires degrade over time, even

when they are not being used.

Regardless of the remaining

tread, it is recommended that

tires generally be replaced after

six (6) years of normal service.

Heat caused by hot climates or

frequent high loading conditions

can accelerate the aging

process. Failure to follow this

warning can result in sudden tire

failure, which could lead to a

loss of control and an accident

involving serious injury or death.

S 180 km/h (112 mph)

T 190 km/h (118 mph)

H 210 km/h (130 mph)

V 240 km/h (149 mph)

Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)

Maximum Speed

Speed

Rating

Symbol

739

Maintenance

G201005AUN

5. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire. Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure. Refer

to the Tire and Loading Information

label for recommended inflation

pressure.

G201006AUN

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum

load in kilograms and pounds that

can be carried by the tire. When

replacing the tires on the vehicle,

always use a tire that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tire.

G2010007AUN-EU

7. Uniform tire quality grading

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified govern-

ment test course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one-and-a-

half times (1½) as well on the gov-

ernment course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

because of variations in driving

habits, service practices and differ-

ences in road characteristics and cli-

mate.

These grades are molded on the

side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.

The tires available as standard or

optional equipment on your vehicles

may vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tires ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spec-

ified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction perform-

ance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accelera-

tion, cornering, hydroplaning,

or peak traction characteristics.

Maintenance

407

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B and C representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled condi-

tions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tire to

degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-

responds to a level of performance

which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher

levels of performance on the labora-

tory test wheel than minimum

required by law.

G201100AUN-EC

Tire terminology and definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air

inside the tire pressing outward on

the tire. Air pressure is expressed in

kilopascal (kPa) or pounds per

square inch (psi).

Accessory Weight: This means the

combined weight of optional acces-

sories. Some examples of optional

accessories are, automatic transmis-

sion, power seats, and air condition-

ing.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a

tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords

that is located between the plies and

the tread. Cords may be made from

steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel

wires wrapped by steel cords that

hold the tire onto the rim.

WARNING - Tire

temperature

The temperature grade for this

tire is established for a tire that

is properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed,

underinflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in

combination, can cause heat

build-up and possible sudden

tire failure. This can cause loss

of vehicle control and serious

injury or death.

741

Maintenance

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in

which the plies are laid at alternate

angles less than 90 degrees to the

centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of

air pressure in a tire, measured in

kilopascals (kPa) or pounds per

square inch (psi) before a tire has

built up heat from driving.

Curb Weight: This means the weight

of a motor vehicle with standard and

optional equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil and

coolant, but without passengers and

cargo.

DOT Markings: The DOT code

includes the Tire Identification

Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-

ignator which can also identify the

tire manufacturer, production plant,

brand and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight

Rating for the Front Axle.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight

Rating for the Rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The

side of an asymmetrical tire, that

must always face outward when

mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for

air pressure.

Load Index: An assigned number

ranging from 1 to 279 that corre-

sponds to the load carrying capacity

of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The

maximum air pressure to which a

cold tire may be inflated. The maxi-

mum air pressure is molded onto the

sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load

rating for a tire at the maximum per-

missible inflation pressure for that

tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:

The sum of curb weight; accessory

weight; vehicle capacity weight; and

production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight:The

number of occupants a vehicle is

designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg

(150 pounds).

Occupant Distribution: Designated

seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side

of a asymmetrical tire that has a par-

ticular side that faces outward when

mounted on a vehicle. The outward

facing sidewall bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same moldings on

the inner facing sidewall.

Maintenance

427

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire

used on passenger cars and some

light duty trucks and multipurpose

vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure:

Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-

ed tire inflation pressure and shown

on the tire placard.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in

which the ply cords that extend to the

beads are laid at 90 degrees to the

centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and

upon which the tire beads are seat-

ed.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire

between the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric

code assigned to a tire indicating the

maximum speed at which a tire can

operate.

Traction: The friction between the

tire and the road surface. The

amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that

comes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow

bands, sometimes called "wear

bars," that show across the tread of a

tire when only 2/32 inch of tread

remains.

UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality

Grading Standards, a tire information

system that provides consumers with

ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-

ture and treadwear. Ratings are

determined by tire manufacturers

using government testing proce-

dures. The ratings are molded into

the sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-

ber of designated seating positions

multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs.) plus the

rated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the

Tire: Load on an individual tire due to

curb and accessory weight plus

maximum occupant and cargo

weight.

Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the curb weight,

accessory weight, and normal occu-

pant weight and driving by 2.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-

ly attached to a vehicle showing the

original equipment tire size and rec-

ommended inflation pressure.

743

Maintenance

All season tires

KIA specifies all season tires on

some models to provide good per-

formance for use all year round,

including snowy and icy road condi-

tions. All season tires are identified

by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud

and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow

tires have better snow traction than

all season tires and may be more

appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

KIA specifies summer tires on some

models to provide superior perform-

ance on dry roads. Summer tire per-

formance is substantially reduced in

snow and ice. Summer tires do not

have the tire traction rating M+S

(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.

if you plan to operate your vehicle in

snowy or icy conditions. KIA recom-

mends the use of snow tires or all

season tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires

If you equip your car with snow tires,

they should be the same size and

have the same load capacity as the

original tires. Snow tires should be

installed on all four wheels; other-

wise, poor handling may result.

Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4

psi) more air pressure than the pres-

sure recommended for the standard

tires on the tire label on the driver's

side of the center pillar, or up to the

maximum pressure shown on the tire

sidewall, whichever is less.

Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75

mph) when your car is equipped with

snow tires.

Maintenance

447

FUSES

G210000AUN

A vehicle’s electrical system is protected

from electrical overload damage by

fuses.

This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one locat-

ed in the driver’s side panel bolster, the

other in the engine compartment near

the battery.

If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-

sories, or controls do not work, check the

appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has

blown, the element inside the fuse will be

melted.

If the electrical system does not work,

first check the driver’s side fuse panel.

Always replace a blown fuse with one of

the same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-

cates an electrical problem. Avoid using

the system involved and immediately

consult an authorized KIA dealer.

Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type

for lower amperage rating, cartridge type,

and fusible link for higher amperage rat-

ings.

1VQA4037

Normal

Blade type

Cartridge type

Fusible link

Blown

Normal Blown

WARNING - Fuse replace-

ment

• Never replace a fuse with any-

thing but another fuse of the

same rating.

• A higher capacity fuse could

cause damage and possibly a

fire.

• Never install a wire instead of the

proper fuse - even as a temporary

repair. It may cause extensive

wiring damage and a possible a

fire.

CAUTION

Do not use a screwdriver or any

other metal object to remove fuses

because it may cause a short circuit

and damage the system.

745

Maintenance

G210100AUN

Inner panel fuse replacement

1. Turn the ignition switch and all other

switches off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover.

3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.

Use the removal tool provided in the

engine compartment fuse panel.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it

is blown.

Spare fuses are provided in the inner

fuse panel (or in the engine compart-

ment fuse panel).

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,

and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorized KIA

dealer.

If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of

the same rating from a circuit you may

not need for operating the vehicle, such

as the cigarette lighter fuse.

If the headlights or other electrical com-

ponents do not work and the fuses are

OK, check the fuse panel in the engine

compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must

be replaced.

OUN046003OUN047002

Maintenance

467

G210101AUN

Memory fuse

Your vehicle is equipped with a memory

fuse to prevent battery discharge if your

vehicle is parked without being operated

for prolonged periods. Use the following

procedures before parking the vehicle for

prolonged periods.

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.

3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and

pull up the memory fuse.

✽✽NOTICE

• If the memory fuse is pulled up from

the fuse panel, the warning chime,

audio, clock and interior lamps, etc.,

will not operate. Some items must be

reset after replacement. Refer to

“Battery” in this section.

• Even though the memory fuse is

pulled up, the battery can still be dis-

charged by operation of the head-

lights or other electrical devices.

G210200AUN

Engine compartment panel fuse

replacement

1. Turn the ignition switch and all other

switches off.

2. Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tab and pulling up.

3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it

is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,

use the fuse puller in the engine com-

partment fuse panel.

OUN046004 OUN046005

747

Maintenance

4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,

and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorized

KIA dealer.

G210201AUN

Main fuse

If the main fuse is blown, it must be

removed as follows:

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture

above.

3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the

same rating.

4. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

✽✽NOTICE

If the main fuse is blown, consult an

Authorized KIA Dealer.

CAUTION

After checking the fuse panel in the

engine compartment, securely

install the fuse panel cover. If not,

electrical failures may occur from

water leaking in.

OUN046007

Maintenance

487

✽✽NOTICE

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this

manual may be applicable to your vehi-

cle. It is accurate at the time of printing.

When you inspect the fuse panel in your

vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.

Inner fuse panel Engine compartment fuse panel

OUN048008/OUN048009

G210300AUN-EU

Fuse/Relay panel description

Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

749

Maintenance

Inner fuse panel

Description Fuse rating Protected component

AUDIO 15A Audio

MEMORY 15A BCM, Digital clock, Mirror folding relay, Instrument cluster, Room lamp, Sunvisor lamp, Door warning switch,

A/C control module

MIRR HTD 10A Outside mirror motor & Defogger, A/C control module

A/BAG 15A SRS control module

D/CLOCK 10A Power outside mirror switch, Audio, BCM, Digital clock, ATM key lock control module

W/DEICER 15A Windshield defogger relay

CLUSTER 10A Instrument cluster, Pre-excitation resistor

TELL TALE 10A Digital clock

C/LIGHTER 15A Cigarette lighter

A/BAG IND 10A Instrument cluster

MODULE-1 10A ATM key lock control module, Steering angle sensor, Cluster, Back warning buzzer, ESC switch, BCM,

Auto light control module

P/OUTLET FR 20A Front power outlet

SPARE 15A Spare fuse

T/SIG 10A Hazard switch

RR WIPER 15A Rear wiper motor, Rear wiper relay, Multifunction switch

H/LP 10A Head lamp relay

SPARE 10A Spare fuse

A/CON 10A A/C control module, Blower relay

FRT WIPER 25A Wiper relay, Wiper motor, Multifunction switch

MODULE-2 10A Sunroof, Rain sensor, Seat warmer relay, BCM

SPARE 15A Spare fuse

TAIL-RH 10A Head lamp RH, Rear combination lamp RH, License lamp, DRL control module, Instrument panel illumination

Maintenance

507

Description Fuse rating Protected component

T/GATE OPEN 15A Fuel filler door switch, Tailgate relay

STOP LP 15A Stop lamp switch

TAIL-LH 10A Head lamp LH, Rear combination lamp LH, Front fog lamp relay

FRT FOG 15A Front fog lamp relay

START 10A Burglar alarm relay, Start relay coil, Inhibitor switch

DR/LOCK 25A Door lock/unlock relay

HAZARD 15A Hazard switch, Hazard relay

TPMS 15A Tire pressure monitoring system (if equipped)

P/WDW-LH 25A Power window main switch, Power window switch LH

ATM LOCK 10A Sports mode switch, Data link connector, A/C control module, Multipurpose check connector,

Occupant classification system

P/WDW-RH 25A Power window main switch, Power window switch RH

SPARE 30A Spare fuse

SAFETY PWR 25A Safety window motor (if equipped)

P/SEAT-LH 30A Driver power seat control switch

751

Maintenance

Engine compartment fuse panel

Description Fuse rating Protected component

I/P B+ 2 40A I/P junction box

HORN RELAY - Horn relay

H/LP LOW RELAY - Head lamp (Low) relay

H/LP HI RELAY - Head lamp (High) relay

ABS 2 40A ABS/ESC control module

DRL 15A DRL control module

HORN 15A Horn relay, Burglar horn relay

H/LP LOW 15A Head lamp relay (Low)

F/PUMP 20A Fuel pump relay

H/LP HI 15A Head lamp relay (High)

ECU 10A TCM, Generator, ECM

ALTERNATOR

125A (2.4L)

Generator

150A (2.7L)

RAD FAN HI RELAY - Radiator fan (High) relay

RAD FAN LOW RELAY - Radiator fan (Low) relay

F/PUMP RELAY - Fuel pump relay

ABS 1 40A ABS/ESC control module

SPARE 15A Spare fuse

MAIN 30A Engine control relay

SPARE 10A Spare fuse

SPARE 15A Spare fuse

SPARE 20A Spare fuse

P/AMP 25A Amplifier

SPARE 15A Spare fuse

S/ROOF 20A Sunroof control module

SPARE 20A Spare fuse

Maintenance

527

Description Fuse rating Protected component

RAD FAN 40A Radiator fan relay

PCU 10A Pulse generator, ECM, Radiator fan relay, Stop lamp switch

ABS 10A ABS/ESC control module, Multipurpose check connector

S/WARMER 20A Seat warmer relay

ATM 20A ATM control relay

TAIL 20A Tail lamp relay

SPARE 20A Spare fuse

BACK-UP 10A Vehicle speed sensor, Back-up lamp switch, Transaxle range switch

WIPER RELAY - Wiper relay

MAIN RELAY - Main relay

RR HTD 40A Rear defogger relay

IGN 1 40A Ignition switch (ACC, IG1)

I/P B+ 1 30A I/P junction box

ACC SOCKET 20A Rear power outlet

A/CON 10A A/C relay

START RELAY - Start relay

ECU-1 20A ECM

IGN COIL 20A Ignition coil

SNSR 3 15A A/C relay, Injector, Lambda sensor, Radiator fan relay, Stop switch (Brake test line)

BLOWER 40A Blower relay

ATM CONT RELAY - ATM control relay

IGN 2 30A Ignition switch (IG2, START), Start relay

A/CON RELAY - A/C relay

SNSR 2 15A Fuel pump relay, Oxygen sensor

SNSR 1 15A Immobilizer control module, Camshaft position sensor, Mass air flow sensor, Oil control valve,

Canister purge solenoid valve

753

Maintenance

APPEARANCE CARE

Exterior care

G230101AUN

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label

directions when using any chemical

cleaner or polish. Read all warning and

caution statements that appear on the

label.

G230102BUN

Finish maintenance

Washing

To help protect your vehicle’s finish from

rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly

and frequently at least once a month with

lukewarm or cold water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-

ing, you should wash it after each off-

road trip. Pay special attention to the

removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,

mud, and other foreign materials. Make

sure the drain holes in the lower edges of

the doors and rocker panels are kept

clear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,

industrial pollution and similar deposits

can damage your vehicle’s finish if not

removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain water

may not completely remove all these

deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on

painted surfaces, may be used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-

oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do

not allow soap to dry on the finish.

WARNING - Wet brakes

After washing the vehicle, test the

brakes while driving slowly to see if

they have been affected by water. If

braking performance is impaired,

dry the brakes by applying them

lightly while maintaining a slow for-

ward speed.

CAUTION

Do not use strong soap, chemical

detergents or hot water, and do not

wash the vehicle in direct sunlight

or when the body of the vehicle is

warm.

CAUTION

• Water washing in the engine com-

partment including high pressure

water washing may cause the fail-

ure of electrical circuits located in

the engine compartment.

• Never allow water or other liquids

to come in contact with electri-

cal/electronic components inside

the vehicle as this may damage

them.

OJB037800

Maintenance

547

Waxing

Wax the vehicle when water will no

longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle before

waxing. Use a good quality liquid or

paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s

instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect

it and to maintain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materials

with a spot remover will usually strip the

wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax

these areas even if the rest of the vehicle

does not yet need waxing.

G230103AUN

Finish damage repair

Deep scratches or stone chips in the

painted surface must be repaired

promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust

and may develop into a major repair

expense.

✽✽NOTICE

If your vehicle is damaged and requires

any metal repair or replacement, be sure

the body shop applies anti-corrosion

materials to the parts repaired or

replaced.

G230104AUN

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects, use a

tar remover, not a scraper or other

sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal

parts from corrosion, apply a coating of

wax or chrome preservative and rub to

a high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastal

areas, cover the bright metal parts with

a heavier coating of wax or preserva-

tive. If necessary, coat the parts with

non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other

protective compound.

CAUTION

• Wiping dust or dirt off the body

with a dry cloth will scratch the

finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abrasive

cleaners, or strong detergents

containing highly alkaline or

caustic agents on chrome-plated

or anodized aluminum parts. This

may result in damage to the pro-

tective coating and cause discol-

oration or paint deterioration.

755

Maintenance

G230105AUN

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and

snow removal and dust control may col-

lect on the underbody. If these materials

are not removed, accelerated rusting can

occur on underbody parts such as the

fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust

system, even though they have been

treated with rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody

and wheel openings with lukewarm or

cold water once a month, after off-road

driving and at the end of each winter. Pay

special attention to these areas because

it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It

will do more harm than good to wet down

the road grime without removing it. The

lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and

frame members have drain holes that

should not be allowed to clog with dirt;

trapped water in these areas can cause

rusting.

G230106AUN

Aluminum wheel maintenance

The aluminum wheels are coated with a

clear protective finish.

• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-

ishing compound, solvent, or wire

brushes on aluminum wheels. They

may scratch or damage the finish.

• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-

gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.

Also, be sure to clean the wheels after

driving on salted roads. This helps pre-

vent corrosion.

• Avoid washing the wheels with high-

speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any acid detergent. It may

damage and corrode the aluminum

wheels coated with a clear protective

finish.

WARNING

After washing the vehicle, test the

brakes while driving slowly to see if

they have been affected by water. If

braking performance is impaired,

dry the brakes by applying them

lightly while maintaining a slow for-

ward speed.

Maintenance

567

G230107AUN

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corrosion

By using the most advanced design and

construction practices to combat corro-

sion, we produces cars of the highest

quality. However, this is only part of the

job. To achieve the long-term corrosion

resistance your vehicle can deliver, the

owner's cooperation and assistance is

also required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion

on your car are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is

allowed to accumulate underneath the

car.

• Removal of paint or protective coatings

by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor

scrapes and dents which leave unpro-

tected metal exposed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your car is

regularly exposed to corrosive materials,

corrosion protection is particularly impor-

tant. Some of the common causes of

accelerated corrosion are road salts,

dust control chemicals, ocean air and

industrial pollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which

corrosion is most likely to occur. For

example, corrosion is accelerated by

high humidity, particularly when tempera-

tures are just above freezing. In such

conditions, the corrosive material is kept

in contact with the car surfaces by mois-

ture that is slow to evaporate.

Mud is particularly corrosive because it is

slow to dry and holds moisture in contact

with the vehicle. Although the mud

appears to be dry, it can still retain the

moisture and promote corrosion.

High temperatures can also accelerate

corrosion of parts that are not properly

ventilated so the moisture can be dis-

persed. For all these reasons, it is par-

ticularly important to keep your car clean

and free of mud or accumulations of

other materials. This applies not only to

the visible surfaces but particularly to the

underside of the car.

757

Maintenance

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion from get-

ting started by observing the following:

Keep your car clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to

keep your car clean and free of corrosive

materials. Attention to the underside of

the car is particularly important.

• If you live in a high-corrosion area —

where road salts are used, near the

ocean, areas with industrial pollution,

acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra

care to prevent corrosion. In winter,

hose off the underside of your car at

least once a month and be sure to

clean the underside thoroughly when

winter is over.

• When cleaning underneath the car,

give particular attention to the compo-

nents under the fenders and other

areas that are hidden from view. Do a

thorough job; just dampening the accu-

mulated mud rather than washing it

away will accelerate corrosion rather

than prevent it. Water under high pres-

sure and steam are particularly effec-

tive in removing accumulated mud and

corrosive materials.

• When cleaning lower door panels,

rocker panels and frame members, be

sure that drain holes are kept open so

that moisture can escape and not be

trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poorly

ventilated garage. This creates a favor-

able environment for corrosion. This is

particularly true if you wash your car in

the garage or drive it into the garage

when it is still wet or covered with snow,

ice or mud. Even a heated garage can

contribute to corrosion unless it is well

ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should be

covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as

possible to reduce the possibility of cor-

rosion. If bare metal is showing through,

the attention of a qualified body and paint

shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are high-

ly corrosive and may damage painted

surfaces in just a few hours. Always

remove bird droppings as soon as possi-

ble.

Don't neglect the interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats

and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check

under the mats periodically to be sure

the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if

you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or

chemicals in the car.

These should be carried only in proper

containers and any spills or leaks should

be cleaned up, flushed with clean water

and thoroughly dried.

Maintenance

587

Interior care

G230201AUN

Interior general precautions

Prevent caustic solutions such as per-

fume and cosmetic oil from contacting

the dashboard because they may cause

damage or discoloration. If they do con-

tact the dashboard, wipe them off imme-

diately. See the instructions that follow for

the proper way to clean vinyl.

G230202AUN

Cleaning the upholstery and interior

trim

Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl

with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.

Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric

with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.

Clean with a mild soap solution recom-

mended for upholstery or carpets.

Remove fresh spots immediately with a

fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not

receive immediate attention, the fabric

can be stained and its color can be

affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties

can be reduced if the material is not

properly maintained.

G230203AUN

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web-

bing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild

soap solution recommended for cleaning

upholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-

tions provided with the soap. Do not

bleach or re-dye the webbing because

this may weaken it.

G230204AUN

Cleaning the interior window glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-

cle become fogged (that is, covered with

an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should

be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the

directions on the glass cleaner container.

CAUTION

Never allow water or other liquids

to come in contact with

electrical/electronic components

inside the vehicle as this may dam-

age them.

CAUTION

Using anything but recommended

cleaners and procedures may affect

the fabric’s appearance and fire-

resistant properties.

CAUTION

Do not scrape or scratch the inside

of the rear window. This may result

in damage to the rear window

defroster grid.

759

Maintenance

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

G270000AUN-EU

The emission control system of your

vehicle is covered by a written limited

warranty. Please see the warranty infor-

mation contained in the Warranty &

Maintenance booklet in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an emis-

sion control system to meet all emission

regulations.

There are three emission control sys-

tems which are as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system

(2) Evaporative emission control system

(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of

the emission control systems, it is rec-

ommended that you have your car

inspected and maintained by an author-

ized KIA dealer in accordance with the

maintenance schedule in this manual.

Caution for the Inspection and

Maintenance Test (With Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system)

• To prevent the vehicle from misfir-

ing during dynamometer testing,

turn the Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) system off by pressing the

ESC switch.

• After dynamometer testing is com-

pleted, turn the ESC system back on

by pressing the ESC switch again.

G270100AUN

1. Crankcase emission control

system

The positive crankcase ventilation sys-

tem is employed to prevent air pollution

caused by blow-by gases being emitted

from the crankcase.This system supplies

fresh filtered air to the crankcase through

the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,

the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,

which then pass through the PCV valve

into the induction system.

G270200AUN

2. Evaporative emission control

(including ORVR: Onboard

Refueling Vapor Recovery) sys-

tem

The Evaporative Emission Control

System is designed to prevent fuel

vapors from escaping into the atmos-

phere.

(The ORVR system is designed to allow

the vapors from the fuel tank to be

loaded into a canister while refueling at

the gas station, preventing the escape of

fuel vapors into the atmosphere.)

Maintenance

607

G270201AUN

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel

tank are absorbed and stored in the

onboard canister. When the engine is

running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the

canister are drawn into the surge tank

through the purge control solenoid valve.

G270202AUN

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is con-

trolled by the Engine Control Module

(ECM); when the engine coolant temper-

ature is low during idling, the PCSV clos-

es so that evaporated fuel is not taken

into the engine. After the engine warms-

up during ordinary driving, the PCSV

opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the

engine.

G270300AUN

3. Exhaust emission control

system

The Exhaust Emission Control System is

a highly effective system which controls

exhaust emissions while maintaining

good vehicle performance.

G270301AUN

Vehicle modifications

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification of your vehicle could affect

its performance, safety or durability and

may even violate governmental safety

and emissions regulations.

In addition, damage or performance

problems resulting from any modification

may not be covered under warranty.

G270302AUN

Engine exhaust gas precautions

(carbon monoxide)

• Carbon monoxide can be present with

other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you

smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside

your vehicle, have it inspected and

repaired immediately. If you ever sus-

pect exhaust fumes are coming into

your vehicle, drive it only with all the

windows fully open. Have your vehicle

checked and repaired immediately.

WARNING - Exhaust

Engine exhaust gases contain car-

bon monoxide (CO). Though color-

less and odorless, it is dangerous

and could be lethal if inhaled.

Follow the instructions on this

page to avoid CO poisoning.

761

Maintenance

• Do not operate the engine in confined

or closed areas (such as garages) any

more than what is necessary to move

the vehicle in or out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in an

open area for more than a short time

with the engine running, adjust the

ventilation system (as needed) to draw

outside air into the vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-

cle for any extended time with the

engine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to start,

excessive attempts to restart the

engine may cause damage to the

emission control system.

G270303AUN

Operating precautions for catalytic

converters

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic

converter emission control device.

Therefore, the following precautions

must be observed:

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gaso-

line engine.

• Do not operate the vehicle when there

are signs of engine malfunction, such

as misfire or a noticeable loss of per-

formance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.

Examples of misuse are coasting with

the ignition off and descending steep

grades in gear with the ignition off.

• Do not operate the engine at high idle

speed for extended periods (5 minutes

or more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any part

of the engine or emission control sys-

tem. All inspections and adjustments

must be made by an authorized KIA

dealer.

• Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.

If you run out of gasoline, it could

cause the engine to misfire and result

in excessive loading of the catalytic

converter.

Failure to observe these precautions

could result in damage to the catalytic

converter and to your vehicle.

Additionally, such actions could void your

warranties.

WARNING - Fire

A hot exhaust system can ignite

flammable items under your vehi-

cle. Do not park the vehicle over or

near flammable objects, such as

grass, vegetation, paper, leaves,

etc.

Dimensions / 8-2

Bulb wattage / 8-2

Tires and wheels / 8-3

Recommended lubricants and capacities / 8-4

Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-6

Vehicle certification label / 8-6

Tire specification and pressure label / 8-6

Engine number / 8-7

Specifications & Consumer information

Item mm (in)

Overall length 4545 (178.9)

Overall width 1820 (71.6)

Overall height 1650 (65.0) / 1720 (66.7) *1

Front tread 1573 (61.9) / 1563 (61.5) *2

Rear tread 1569 (61.8) / 1560 (61.4) *2

Wheelbase 2700 (106.3)

DIMENSIONS

Light Bulb Wattage

Headlights (Low) 55

Headlights (High) 55

Front turn signal lights 28/8

Position lights 5

Front side mark lights 5

Front fog lights* 27

Stop and tail lights 28/8

Rear turn signal lights 27

Back-up lights 18

Rear side mark lights 5

High mounted stop light* LED

License plate lights 5

Map lamps* 10

Room lamp 10

Vanity mirror lamps* 5

BULB WATTAGE

* : If equipped

*1: with roof rack

*2: with P225/50R17 tire

I010000AUN-EE I030000AUN-EU

Specifications & Consumer information

TIRES AND WHEELS

I020000AUN-EU

Front Rear

P205/60R16 6.5J×16 220 220

P225/50R17 6.5J×17 (32) (32)

420 420

T125/80D16 4.0T×16 (60) (60)

Full size tire

Compact spare tire

Wheel lug nut torque

kgf•m (lb•ft, N•m)

9~11

(65~79 , 88~107)

Item Tire

size Wheel size

Inflation pressure

kPa (psi)

CAUTION

Vehicles that are factory equipped

with P205/60R16 tires should not be

upgraded to accommodate P225/

50R17 tires and wheels.

Specifications & Consumer information

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

I040000AUN-EC

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct

lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

*1Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

*2Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel nec-

essary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and

energy savings.

Lubricant Volume Classification

2.4L Engine 4.3 l (4.54 US qt.)

2.7L Engine 4.5 l(4.76 US qt.)

2.4L Engine 7.8 l (8.24 US qt.)

Automatic transaxle fluid 2.7L Engine 9.5 l(10.04 US qt.)

Power steering 0.9 l (0.95 US qt.) PSF-4

Coolant 2.4L Engine 6.7 l (7.08 US qt.) Mixture of antifreeze and water (Ethylene

2.7L Engine 8.4 l (8.88 US qt.) glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)

Brake fluid 0.7~0.8 l

(0.7~0.8 US qt.) FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Fuel 60 l (15.85 US gal.) -

Engine oil *1*2

(drain and refill)

API Service SJ, SL or above,

ILSAC GF-3 or above

DIAMOND ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP-III

Specifications & Consumer information

I040100AUN-EU

Recommended SAE viscosity

number

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an

effect on fuel economy and cold weather

operating (engine start and engine oil

flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils

can provide better fuel economy and cold

weather performance, however, higher

viscosity engine oils are required for sat-

isfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using

oils of any viscosity other than those rec-

ommended could result in engine dam-

age.

When choosing an oil, consider the range

of temperature your vehicle will be oper-

ated in before the next oil change.

Proceed to select the recommended oil

viscosity from the chart.

CAUTION

Always be sure to clean the area

around any filler plug, drain plug, or

dipstick before checking or drain-

ing any lubricant. This is especially

important in dusty or sandy areas

and when the vehicle is used on

unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug

and dipstick areas will prevent dirt

and grit from entering the engine

and other mechanisms that could

be damaged.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

Engine Oil *

°C

(°F)

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-

20, 5W-30 (API SJ, SL / ILSAC GF-3 or above). However, if the engine oil is not available in

your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

10W-30

5W-20, 5W-30

Specifications & Consumer information

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

NUMBER (VIN)

H010000AUN

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is

the number used in registering your car

and in all legal matters pertaining to its

ownership, etc.

It can be found on the floor under the

passenger seat. To check the number,

remove the cover (1).

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION

LABEL

H020000AUN-EU

The vehicle certification label located on

the driver's side center pillar gives the

vehicle identification number (VIN).

TIRE SPECIFICATION AND

PRESSURE LABEL

H030000AUN

The tires supplied on your new vehicle

are chosen to provide the best perform-

ance for normal driving.

The tire label located on the driver's side

center pillar gives the tire pressures rec-

ommended for your car.

OUN086004 OUN086005

OUN088001

OVQ076002N

Type A

Type B

Specifications & Consumer information

H04000AUN-EE

The engine number is stamped on the

engine block as shown in the drawing.

ENGINE NUMBER

OUN088003L

OUN088003N

2.7L Engine

2.4L Engine

Index

Air bag-advanced supplemental restraint system··········3-40

Air cleaner ·····································································7-25

Appearance care·····························································7-53

Audio system ·································································4-92

Automatic climate control system ·································4-70

Automatic transaxle ·························································5-7

Automatic transaxle fluid ··············································7-22

Battery············································································7-28

Before driving··································································5-3

Brake system··································································5-14

Brakes fluid····································································7-20

Bulb wattage ····································································8-2

Child restraint system ····················································3-32

Climate control air filter ················································7-25

Cruise control system ····················································5-24

Defroster ········································································4-59

Dimensions ······································································8-2

Door locks······································································4-11

Economical operation ····················································5-28

Emergency starting ··························································6-4

Emission control system················································7-59

Engine compartment ·················································2-4/7-2

Engine coolant ·······························································7-17

Engine number·································································8-7

Engine oil·······································································7-16

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ···············7-12

Exterior feature ······························································4-90

Fuel filler lid ··································································4-22

Fuel requirements ····························································1-3

Fuses ··············································································7-44

Hazard warning flasher··················································4-50

Hood···············································································4-20

How to use this manual ···················································1-2

Index

If the engine overheats·····················································6-6

If the engine will not start ···············································6-3

If you have a flat tire ·······················································6-7

In case of an emergency while driving····························6-2

Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster ···················1-5

Instrument cluster ··························································4-34

Instrument panel overview ··············································2-3

Interior features······························································4-83

Interior light ···································································4-58

Interior overview ·····························································2-2

Key positions ···································································5-4

Keys ·················································································4-3

Lighting··········································································4-51

Maintenance schedule······················································7-8

Maintenance services·······················································7-4

Manual climate control system······································4-61

Mirrors ···········································································4-31

Owner maintenance ·························································7-6

Parking brake ································································7-24

Power steering fluid·······················································7-21

Rear parking assist system·············································4-48

Recommended lubricants and capacities·························8-4

Remote keyless entry·······················································4-6

Road warning···································································6-2

Seat belts········································································3-18

Seats ·················································································3-2

Special driving conditions ·············································5-30

Starting the engine ···························································5-6

Steering wheel································································4-29

Storage compartment ·····················································4-80

Sunroof···········································································4-25

Index

Tailgate···········································································4-15

Theft-alarm system ··························································4-9

Tire specification and pressure label ·······························8-6

Tires and wheels······················································7-31/8-3

Towing ···········································································6-18

Trailer towing ································································5-37

Vehicle break-in process··················································1-4

Vehicle certification label ················································8-6

Vehicle identification number (VIN)·······························8-6

Vehicle load limit···························································5-44

Vehicle weight ·······························································5-49

Washer fluid···································································7-24

Windows ········································································4-17

Windshield defrosting and defogging····························4-77

Winter driving································································5-34

Wiper blades ··································································7-26

Wipers and washers ·······················································4-54

2008 Rondo Owners Manual EN

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation